JP7283780B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Conventionally, a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information is provided, a variable display game is executed with variable display on the variable display device, and the variable display is stopped by a player's stop operation. A gaming machine is known that derives a game result and generates a specific game state advantageous to the player according to the derived result of the variable display game.
In recent years, there has also been known a game machine in which the variable display can be stopped a plurality of times in one variable display game, thereby giving the player multiple opportunities to perform a stop operation. there is (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-083374

However, conventional game machines have room for improvement.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine of the present invention comprises a game state control means capable of controlling a first game state advantageous to the player and a second game state advantageous to the player, and a first game control means capable of executing a first game capable of imparting a game value for executing a game; and executing a second game, which is a pseudo game to which the game value cannot be imparted, in the first game state. winning combination determination means capable of determining a winning combination based on the establishment of a predetermined condition; stop operation means operable by a player; and said winning combination determination means in said first game. variable display means capable of stop-displaying the identification information that is being variably displayed based on the winning combination determined by and the stop operation mode of the stop operation means; Based on the winning combination determined by the determining means, a point granting means capable of granting points, a point storage means capable of storing the points granted by the point granting means, and the points stored in the point storage means and a determination means capable of determining whether or not to shift to the second game state based on the above, and the variable display means, after it is determined by the determination means to shift to the second game state, the second game state. When the stop operation means is operated in the second game, it is possible to stop and display the identification information that is being variably displayed in a specific mode, and after it is determined by the determination means that the second game state will not be entered. , when the stop operation means is operated in the second game, the identification information can be stopped and displayed in a non-specific manner.

1 is a schematic front view showing the appearance of a gaming machine in the first embodiment; FIG. It is a block diagram showing the control configuration of the gaming machine in the first embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the arrangement of reels in the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a symbol combination when the pushing order bell combination is won in the first embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a symbol combination when a colored bell combination is won in the first embodiment; It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the game of the gaming machine in 1st Embodiment. 4 is a timing chart for explaining game state transitions and display contents on a main display device in the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an effect at the start of a pseudo-bonus state in Modification 1 of the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows the production|presentation at the time of AT state start in the modified example 2 of 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the control structure of the game machine in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a timing chart for explaining game state transitions and display contents on a main display in the second embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart for explaining a navigation state during a bonus state in modification 1 of the second embodiment; FIG. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation at the time of the bonus 1 state start in the modification 1 of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation at the time of the bonus 2 state start in the modification 1 of 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a timing chart for explaining a navigation state during a bonus state in modification 2 of the second embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart for explaining a navigation state during a bonus 2 state in Modification 2 of the second embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a timing chart for explaining the navigation state during the bonus state and the effect contents of the main display in Modification 4 of the second embodiment; FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining a game flow regarding a bonus state and an RT state in a gaming machine according to the third embodiment; FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the flow of a 3-bet game on the gaming machine in the third embodiment; FIG. 12 is a chart showing a lottery table used in the award of a role and the lottery of a role in the main control device in the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the arrangement of reels in the third embodiment; FIG. 11 is a chart showing a lottery table used when determining the number of ceiling games in the main controller in the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 12 is a chart showing a lottery table used when determining a privilege when the number of ceiling games is reached in the main controller in the third embodiment; FIG. It is a diagram showing a pseudo-game advance notice effect on the main display in the third embodiment. It is a chart showing a lottery table used when executing a pseudo-game in the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a chart showing a lottery table used when promoting the pseudo-game LV in the main control device in the third embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram and a chart for explaining the determination processing of the pseudo stop symbol sequence when using the weak table in the main controller in the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram and a chart for explaining the determination processing of the pseudo stop symbol sequence when using the strong table in the main controller in the third embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram and a chart for explaining the determination processing of the pseudo stop symbol sequence when using the real table in the main controller in the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram and a chart for explaining the determination processing of the pseudo stop symbol sequence when using the special 1 table in the main controller in the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram and a chart for explaining the determination processing of the pseudo stop symbol sequence when using the special 2 table in the main controller in the third embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram and a chart for explaining the determination processing of the pseudo stop symbol sequence when using the special 3 table in the main controller in the third embodiment; FIG. It is a chart which shows the lottery table used when determining a high probability state in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a chart showing a lottery table used when determining a privilege when a winning combination is won by the main controller in the third embodiment; FIG. It is a chart which shows the lottery table used during CZ state in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an effect on the main display when a pseudo-bonus state is won in the CZ state in the third embodiment; FIG. 11 is a chart showing an addition point lottery table used when determining the addition points in the AT state lottery during the pseudo-bonus state in the main controller in the third embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an effect on the main display at the start of the AT state after the end of the pseudo-bonus state in the third embodiment; FIG. 12 is a chart showing a lottery table used when shifting to a specialized zone in AT state in the main controller in the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram and a table for explaining the process of determining a pseudo stop symbol sequence when using an AT table in an AT state in a main controller in a third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a lottery table used in a specialized zone in the main controller in the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a lottery table used when determining the number of additional games in the AT state in the main controller in the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a lottery table used when determining a concealment advance notice effect in the sub control device in the third embodiment; FIG. It is a diagram showing a pseudo-game concealment advance notice effect (at the time of full concealment) on the main display device in the third embodiment. It is a diagram showing a pseudo-game concealment advance notice effect (at the time of partial concealment) on the main display device in the third embodiment.

<First embodiment>
A first embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
Here, a slot machine as a suitable example of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described.

First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG.
The slot machine 1 is installed in a game arcade or the like.
As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the slot machine 1 includes a front door 1a, a bet button 2a, a return button 2c, a production button 2d, an upper production button 2f, a medal slot 2, a start lever 3, reels 4, and a stop button. 5, display window 6, medal payout device 7, medal payout port 7b, main display 8, speaker 9, front panel 19, lamp 11, navigation lamp 12, advantageous section lamp 13, probability setting device 14, display decorative frame 15 , drum unit 4 d , main controller 10 and sub controller 20 .

The main control device 10 and the sub-control device 20 are each provided with a storage section and a control section, and are devices capable of performing various kinds of arithmetic processing and various controls, and are included in the concept of a computer. Each storage unit includes a storage device such as a semiconductor memory device for storing programs, information, etc. necessary for the operation of the slot machine 1 . Each control unit includes a CPU and the like. Each control unit implements various functions of the embodiment by appropriately reading and executing various programs and the like stored in each storage unit.

[Schematic front view showing appearance of gaming machine]
As shown in FIG. 1, a front door 1a is provided on the front surface of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG.
The front door 1a is pivotally attached to one side (left side in front view) of a main body (not shown) which is arranged on the rear side of the front door 1a and attached to an island facility (not shown). It is configured so that it can be opened and closed from the side. In the following description, left and right directions are shown when the slot machine 1 is viewed from the front side.

When the slot machine 1 is viewed from the front side, a main display 8 is arranged at the center position in the left-right direction above the front door 1a. The main display 8 is composed of a liquid crystal display or the like capable of displaying a plurality of information such as information relating to effects (effect images) as will be described later, and constitutes display means.
A display decorative frame 15 having an opening in the center is disposed above the front door 1a and in front of the main display 8. The main display 8 extends from the opening of the display decorative frame 15 to the display surface. is placed facing forward.

A speaker 9 is arranged on each of the left and right sides of the main display 8, and can output sound effects corresponding to the presentation displayed on the main display 8, for example.
In addition, lamps 11 made of LEDs or the like are arranged on the left and right sides of the main display 8, respectively. can be output.

On the right side of the main display 8, an upper effect button 2f is provided as an example of operating means.
The upper effect button 2f is a push-type button that moves in the front-rear direction, and the pressing operation of the upper effect button 2f is detected by a non-contact type sensor or the like, and is transmitted to the sub control device 20 as operation information of the upper effect button 2f. output to A light source (not shown) made up of an LED or the like is provided inside the upper effect button 2f, and it is possible to notify that the operation of the upper effect button 2f is effective by light emission of the light source.

At the center of the front door 1a of the slot machine 1 in the vertical direction, a flat front panel 19 having decorations and various functional displays on its surface is provided.
Behind the front panel 19, a drum unit 4d having a reel 4 as variable display means is arranged.
A display window 6 made of a translucent member is formed in substantially the center of the front panel 19 so that the patterns on the reel 4 can be visually recognized from the front.

The reel 4 is composed of a left reel 4a, a middle reel 4b, and a right reel 4c arranged side by side in the left-right direction. is set. The reels 4 (4a to 4c) have patterns (identification information) continuous on the peripheral surface, and these patterns are configured to be identifiable from the outside through the display window 6, and the reels 4 rotate in one direction. As a result, within the display window 6, for example, the pattern can be variably displayed from top to bottom. A plurality of symbols (for example, 20 symbols) are displayed on each of the reels 4a to 4c. be.
The form of the reel 4 is not limited to this, and for example, the number of patterns on the peripheral surface may be other than 20.

Above the display window 6 on the front panel 19, navigation lamps 12a, 12b, 12c capable of informing the stop order of the stop button 5, which will be described later, are arranged corresponding to the respective reels 4a, 4b, 4c.
Further, on the lower left side of the display window 6 on the front panel 19, an advantageous section lamp 13 composed of, for example, an LED is arranged. The advantageous section lamp 13 is controlled to light up during an advantageous section (to be described later). In addition, instead of the advantageous section lamp 13, the slot machine 1 has, for example, a 7-segment display (also referred to as "7-segment") that constitutes a payout number display section for displaying the payout number of medals. , may be controlled to light up.

A sub-display 17 is arranged on the right side of the display window 6 (reel 4) on the front panel 19 .
The sub-display 17 is composed of a liquid crystal display or the like capable of displaying a plurality of information such as information relating to effects (effect images) as will be described later, and constitutes display means.
Also, the sub-display 17 has a smaller display area than the main display 8, but is arranged closer to the reel 4 than the main display 8, so that the rotation and stop state of the reel 4 can be seen. However, it is easy to visually recognize the displayed image.
The sub-display 17 may be provided on the left side of the display window 6 (reel 4). Also, the sub-display 17 may be configured by a touch-panel type display.

A stepped portion protruding forward is formed below the front panel 19, and a medal slot 2, a bet button 2a as an example of operating means, and a performance button 2d are arranged on the upper surface of the stepped portion.
The medal slot 2 is a portion into which a player inserts medals (game media). Inside the medal insertion slot 2, a medal selector 2b (medal detection means), which is a sensor or the like for detecting medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 2, is provided.
The bet button 2a is a push-type button that allows the player to input the number of bets, which is a condition for starting the game.

The effect button 2d is a push-type button that moves in the vertical direction, and the pressing operation of the effect button 2d is detected by a non-contact sensor or the like, and is output to the sub-controller 20 as operation information of the effect button 2d. be. In addition, a light source (not shown) made up of an LED or the like is provided inside the effect button 2d, and it is possible to inform that the operation of the corresponding effect button 2d is effective by light emission of the light source. The effect button 2d is arranged at a position closer to the reel 4 than the upper effect button 2f.

A start lever 3, a return button 2c, and a stop button 5 exemplified as operation means (stop operation means) are arranged on the front surface of the stepped portion.
The start lever 3 is a lever operated by the player to start the game. After inputting the number of bets, the start lever 3 becomes effective and the game can be started.
The return button 2c is a push-type button that moves in the front-rear direction, and is a button that is operated to cancel the set number of bets or to pay out medals stored as credit medals.
The stop button 5 is a button for stopping the rotating reel 4, and is composed of a push-type button that moves in the front-rear direction. , a middle stop button 5b, and a right stop button 5c are arranged laterally at predetermined intervals.

Below the front door 1a of the slot machine 1, a medal payout port 7b through which medals paid out from the medal payout device 7 are discharged is arranged.

[Block Diagram Showing Control Configuration of Game Machine in First Embodiment]
FIG. 2 shows a block diagram of a control system in the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 2, the slot machine 1 includes a main controller 10 that controls the lottery of wins and progress of the game, and a main controller 10 configured to communicate with the main controller 10 based on control information from the main controller 10 . A sub-control device 20 that performs various effects control and the like is provided. Transmission of control information between the main controller 10 and the sub-controller 20 is restricted to one direction only from the main controller 10 to the sub-controller 20, and an illegal signal from the sub-controller 20 to the main controller 10 is prohibited. input is prevented.

The main controller 10 includes a bet button 2a, a medal selector 2b, a return button 2c, a start lever 3, a stop button 5, a probability setting device 14 (setting means), an external output terminal 18, a medal payout device 7, a drum unit 4d, and an advantageous section. It is connected to the lamp 13 by a communication cable, and each device can be controlled. Further, the main controller 10 is provided with a storage section (storage means) and a control section.

The probability setting device 14 as setting means changes the setting of the degree of advantage for the player in multiple stages by changing the probability of winning in a specific game state (eg, pseudo-bonus state) in multiple stages (eg, 6 stages). Main controller 10 sets the winning probability of a specific game state to one of a plurality of probability values with different probabilities based on the probability setting operation in the probability setting device 14. I do.
As for the setting values set by the probability setting device 14, setting 1 is the lowest probability value, setting 6 is the highest probability value, and the larger the number, the higher the probability value. Therefore, setting 1 is the most unfavorable setting for the player (setting with the lowest degree of advantage), the larger the number, the more advantageous the player is, and setting 6 is the most advantageous setting for the player (the setting with the highest degree of advantage). It has become.

Incidentally, the winning probability of the specific game state may be controlled by a fixed probability value without being affected by the setting value of the probability setting device 14. - 特許庁
Also, by changing the transition probability to the CZ state or the AT state according to the set value in the probability setting device 14, the degree of advantage of the player may be changed in a plurality of stages.
Further, in addition to the specific game state, the probability of winning a predetermined minor combination (eg, bell combination) may be changed in a plurality of stages (eg, 6 stages).

The external output terminal 18 outputs information related to the game played in the slot machine 1 to a management device (not shown) or a calling device (not shown) installed in the game arcade. The number of medals inserted, the number of medals paid out, the number of occurrences of game states advantageous to the player (for example, a pseudo-bonus state and an AT state, which will be described later), and the transition period, etc. is output by the control of

The drum unit 4d is a device that integrally includes reels 4a to 4c and a stepping motor (not shown) that rotates each of the reels 4a to 4c.
The medal payout device 7 has a medal storage unit (not shown) that collects the medals inserted into the medal selector 2b as medals before payout, and pays out the medals stored in the medal storage unit to the medal payout port 7b. is. The medal payout device 7 is provided with a sensor for detecting the paid out medals.
The medal selector 2 b is provided on the downstream side of the medal insertion slot 2 and has a sensor for detecting medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 2 .

The storage unit of the main controller 10 stores various information such as a game program related to the game, a table for performing a lottery for small wins and AT states, and the like.
The main controller 10 is operated by a control unit and a storage unit storing programs, thereby performing processes related to progress of the game of the slot machine 1 and the like.

Based on the signal from the start lever 3, the main controller 10 performs processing such as starting the game and sampling random numbers from a random number generator (not shown). Then, lottery processing for a winning combination is performed based on the sampled random numbers. In addition, according to the control program of the storage unit, for example, by updating the random number at a predetermined timing, random number generation processing is performed, and based on the generated random number, the pseudo bonus state transition lottery processing and the continuous lottery during the AT state, which will be described later. Processing, addition lottery processing during AT state, etc. are performed.

That is, the main controller 10 is provided with lottery means for lottery (determining) whether or not to give a privilege such as a small win, a pseudo-bonus state, an AT state, etc., corresponding to the execution of the game.
In addition, the lottery pattern using random numbers may be any pattern other than the pattern described above, and the lottery for the role is performed based on the random numbers generated by software, and the pseudo-bonus state or AT state transition is performed based on the random numbers generated by the random number generator. A lottery, an additional lottery, or the like may be performed, or all lotteries may be performed using random numbers generated by software or random numbers generated by a random number generator.

Main controller 10 also controls the rotation of reel 4 based on a signal from start lever 3 . The main controller 10 detects the rotational positions of the reels 4a, 4b, and 4c based on signals from sensors (not shown) provided on the reels 4a, 4b, and 4c. It is possible to grasp the rotational position of the pattern on 4c. Then, based on the signal from the stop button 5, control is performed to stop the desired pattern within the display window 6. FIG.

In addition, the main control device 10, in accordance with the operation of the operation unit such as the start lever 3, performs game progress processing including internal lottery processing, etc., manages various information stored in the storage unit, and controls devices such as the medal payout device 7. The game of the slot machine 1 is realized by controlling the .

The sub-control device 20 is connected to the production button 2d, the upper production button 2f, the speaker 9, the main display 8, the lamp 11, the navigation lamp 12, and the sub-display 17 by communication cables and can communicate with them. The sub control device 20 controls these devices according to control information from the main control device 10 . Further, the sub control device 20 is provided with a storage section and a control section.

The storage unit of the sub-controller 20 stores various kinds of information such as programs related to effects, effect image data, sound data, and the like.
The sub-controller 20 is operated by a control unit and a storage unit in which programs are stored, and performs processes such as effects synchronized with the game of the slot machine 1 according to commands (control information) from the main control unit 10 . For example, the main display 8, the lamp 11, the speaker 9, and the like are controlled to output an effect image indicating the transition of the game state, output sound effects, and produce a lamp effect.

Further, the sub control device 20 can control switching timing of each effect based on a signal from the effect button 2d.
Either one or both of the main controller 10 and the sub-controller 20 may be the specific stop control means (first specific stop control means, second specific stop control means), stop operation notification means (first Stop operation notification means, second stop operation notification means), first specific game state control means, second specific game state control means, first specific game state lottery means, notification control means, lottery means, effect control means, change control Means, first game control means, second game control means, stop symbol determination means, privilege provision means, and notification means are configured.

[Arrangement of reels in the first embodiment]
Next, the arrangement of the reels 4 exemplified as the variable display means will be described with reference to FIG.
The reels 4 as variable display means are composed of a left reel 4a, a middle reel 4b and a right reel 4c as individual variable display means. ) are displayed, and the arrangement of each pattern is different.

First, as shown in FIG. 6(a), on the left reel 4a, "Blank", "Bell B", "Watermelon", "Bell A", "Replay", and "BAR" are arranged in the order of arrangement numbers 0 to 19. , Cherry, Watermelon, Bell A, Replay, Red 7A, Red 7B, Watermelon, Bell A, Replay, White 7, Bell B , "Watermelon", "Bell A", and "Replay" are shown.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6(b), on the middle reel 4b, "Blank", "Bell B", "Replay", "Cherry", "Watermelon", and "BAR" are arranged in the order of array numbers 0 to 19. , "Bell B", "Replay", "Cherry", "Watermelon", "Red 7A", "Bell A", "Replay", "White 7", "Watermelon", "White 7", "Bell A" , “Replay”, “Cherry”, and “Watermelon” are represented.

Also, as shown in FIG. 6(c), on the right reel 4c, "Blank", "Replay", "Bell A", "Cherry", "Watermelon", and "BAR" are arranged in the order of array numbers 0 to 19. , "Replay", "Bell A", "Cherry", "Red 7B", "Red 7A", "Replay", "Bell A", "Cherry", "Watermelon", "White 7", "Replay", "Bell A", "Cherry", and "Watermelon" are represented.

In the drawing, each symbol is identified by a notation, but the actual reel 4 has a predetermined design corresponding to each combination.
Also, "Bell A" and "Bell B", and "Red 7A" and "Red 7B" are set to have the same pattern, respectively, and have the same overall design, but some internal The design is different.
Further, each of "blank", "BAR", "red 7A", and "white 7" is set as a special symbol, and the arrangement interval of each special symbol on the left reel 4a is the pull-in range for symbol stop control, which will be described later. It is larger than, and it is impossible to stop operation aiming at multiple special symbols on the winning line at the same time.

In addition, each special pattern is designed to make it easier to press the special pattern than the other patterns, and has a larger outer shape than the other patterns and a relatively conspicuous color scheme. ing.
Furthermore, in order to facilitate the operation of visually distinguishing the respective patterns of "blank", "BAR", "red 7A", and "white 7", for example, "blank" is blue, "BAR" is black, " Red 7A” has a red color scheme, and “White 7” has a white color scheme.
In addition, "Red 7B" has the same color scheme as "Red 7A", and by arranging "Red 7A" and "Red 7B" side by side, it is easier to see. However, as will be described later, "Red 7B" has nothing to do with winning a role.
The pattern arrangement of the reel 4 is set as described above.

Such a slot machine 1 is configured to be able to execute slot machine games as described below under the control of the main controller 10 .

At the start of the game, the player inserts medals from the medal slot 2 or sets the number of bets from the credit medals by operating the bet button 2a.
Then, when the number of bets reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3), one of the conditions for starting the game is satisfied, and a state in which the right to execute one game is held and the game can be started.

In this game-startable state, the operation of the start lever 3 is enabled. In this effective state, when the start lever 3 is tilted, all the conditions for starting the game are satisfied, the game is started, and the reels 4a to 4c on which a plurality of symbols are displayed start to fluctuate. Before the reels 4 stop, an internal lottery process is executed to determine in advance the lottery results of the current game for a plurality of winnings (including loss) such as replay winnings and minor winnings, pseudo-bonus state, and transition to the AT state.
In the internal lottery process, a winning combination for the current game is determined by lottery based on a predetermined winning probability from among a plurality of winning combinations. For example, lottery results such as a replay combination and a bell combination are derived by lottery.

In addition, when the main controller 10 receives a signal from the start lever 3, the predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has not passed since the reels 4 started rotating in the previous game. , by temporarily waiting (inserting a waiting time) for the start of rotation of the reels 4 to delay the start of rotation of the reels 4, the number of times the game is executed per unit time (for example, one minute) is increased to a predetermined number ( For example, limit control is performed to limit the number of games to within 14 times. That is, main controller 10 has a game number limiting means capable of limiting the number of times games are executed per unit time within a predetermined number. By this control, the shortest execution time required for one game is defined as a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds).
It should be noted that the period for monitoring the shortest execution time may be set other than based on the start of rotation of the reel 4 between games. Any point in time may be used as a reference as long as the number of games can be monitored.

When the game is started, the reels 4a to 4c gradually increase their rotation speed from a stopped state, and then reach steady rotation at a constant speed.
When such steady rotation is reached, the stop buttons 5a to 5c provided corresponding to the respective reels 4a to 4c can be pressed.

When the stop buttons 5a to 5c are pressed in this state, the reels 4a to 4c are controlled to stop so that they are stopped at combinations of symbols allowed by the operation timing and the lottery result of the internal lottery process. .
In the stop control of each reel 4a to 4c, a pull-in range is set for each, and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of symbols in the reverse rotation direction (upward direction) from the symbol at the time when the stop operation is performed. It becomes possible to draw in, and only one of the symbols in this drawing range can be stopped on the effective line.

In the stopped state, the reels 4a to 4c are stopped (stopped display) so that the three vertically continuous symbols displayed on the respective reels 4a to 4c face the outside of the machine through the display window 6, and a prize is awarded based on the stopped display mode at this time. Presence or absence is determined.
Winning is determined based on the combination of symbols stopped on the middle winning line connecting the middle symbols of each reel 4 in the display window 6 .

Winning of a winning combination such as a small combination or a replay combination is determined based on such a combination of symbols on the winning line.
The small roles include, for example, a bell role, a watermelon role, and a cherry role.

For the bell combination, two bell combinations with different combinations of corresponding symbols are provided. For example, a push order bell combination in which a symbol combination of "Bell A" and "Bell B" is formed in the display window 6, one of special symbols on the left reel 4a, and "Bell A" on the middle reel 4b and right reel 4c A color bell combination that forms a symbol combination with Bell A" is set.

Furthermore, for the bell role, one of six pressing orders (for example, "5a→5b→5c", "5c→5b→5a", etc.) can When the stop buttons 5a to 5c are operated, predetermined symbols are stopped on the respective reels 4a to 4c (individual variation display means), and the corresponding combinations of symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined arrangement in the display window 6. Six push order bell combinations 1 to 6 are provided.

The push order bell combination 1 is a push order bell combination in which a prize is established only when the push order is "5a→5b→5c". Any one of the bells "B" will stop.
For example, as shown in FIG. 4(a), on the left reel 4a, the patterns of "Bell A", "Replay", and "BAR" in the range of array numbers 3 to 5 are stopped in the display window 6, and the middle reel 4a is displayed. 4b, the patterns of "Bell B", "Replay", and "Cherry" in the range of array numbers 1 to 3 stop in the display window 6, and "Bell A" in the range of array numbers 2 to 4 are displayed on the right reel 4c. , ``Cherry'', and ``Watermelon'' stop in the display window 6, and the combination of ``Bell A, Bell B, and Bell A'' on the upper line stops when the pushing order is correct. .
However, since winning is determined on the middle winning line, the symbol combination of ``replay, replay, cherry'' stopped on the middle winning line is actually determined as winning.

The push order bell combination 2 is a push order bell combination in which a prize is established only when the push order is "5a→5c→5b". Alternatively, one of "Bell B" will stop.
For example, as shown in FIG. 4(b), on the left reel 4a, the patterns of "Bell A", "Replay", and "BAR" in the range of arrangement numbers 3 to 5 are stopped in the display window 6, and the middle reel 4b, the patterns of "Red 7A", "Bell A", and "Replay" in the range of array numbers 10 to 12 stop in the display window 6, and on the right reel 4c, "Blank" in the range of array numbers 0 to 2 , ``Replay'', and ``Bell A'' will stop in the display window 6, and the pattern combination of ``Bell A, Bell A, Bell A'' will stop in the lower right line when the pressing order is correct. It's becoming
However, actually, the symbol combination of "replay, bell A, replay" stopped on the middle winning line is determined as winning.

The push-order bell combination 3 is a push-order bell combination in which a prize is established only when the push order is "5b→5c→5a." Alternatively, one of "Bell B" stops, and this symbol combination is determined as winning.
For example, as shown in FIG. 4(c), on the left reel 4a, the symbols "Watermelon", "Bell A", and "Replay" in the range of array numbers 2 to 4 are stopped in the display window 6, and the middle reel 4b, the patterns of "Red 7A", "Bell A", and "Replay" in the range of array numbers 10 to 12 stop in the display window 6, and on the right reel 4c, "Replay" in the range of array numbers 1 to 3 , ``Bell A'', and ``Cherry'' are stopped in the display window 6, and the pattern combination of ``Bell A, Bell A, and Bell A'' is stopped in the middle line when the pushing order is correct. there is

The push-order bell combination 4 is a push-order bell combination in which a prize is established only when the push order is "5b→5a→5c". Either "Bell A" or "Bell B" will stop on the line.
For example, as shown in FIG. 4(d), on the left reel 4a, the patterns of "Bell B", "Watermelon", and "Bell A" having array numbers 1 to 3 are stopped in the display window 6, On the reel 4b, the symbols "Red 7A", "Bell A", and "Replay" with array numbers 10 to 12 stop in the display window 6, and on the right reel 4c, " The patterns of "Blank", "Replay" and "Bell A" are stopped in the display window 6, and the pattern combination of "Bell A, Bell A, Bell A" is stopped when the pressing order is correct. It's becoming
However, actually, the symbol combination of "watermelon, bell A, replay" stopped on the middle winning line is determined as winning.

The push order bell combination 5 is a push order bell combination in which a prize is established only when the push order is "5c→5a→5b". Alternatively, one of "Bell B" will stop.
For example, as shown in FIG. 4(e), on the left reel 4a, the patterns of "Cherry", "Watermelon", and "Bell A" in the range of arrangement numbers 6 to 8 are stopped in the display window 6, and the middle reel 4b, the patterns of "Red 7A", "Bell A", and "Replay" in the range of array numbers 10 to 12 stop in the display window 6, and on the right reel 4c, the "bell" in the range of array numbers 2 to 4 A", "cherry", and "watermelon" are stopped in the display window 6, and the combination of "bell A, bell A, bell A" is stopped in the upper right line when the pressing order is correct. It's becoming
However, actually, the symbol combination of "watermelon, bell A, and cherry" stopped on the middle winning line is determined as winning.

The push-order bell combination 6 is a push-order bell combination in which a prize is established only when the push order is "5c→5b→5a". Either "Bell A" or "Bell B" will stop on the line.
For example, as shown in FIG. 4(f), on the left reel 4a, the patterns of "Bell A", "Replay", and "BAR" in the range of array numbers 3 to 5 are stopped in the display window 6, and the middle reel 4b, the patterns of "Red 7A", "Bell A", and "Replay" in the range of array numbers 10 to 12 stop in the display window 6, and on the right reel 4c, the "bell" in the range of array numbers 2 to 4 A", "Cherry", and "Watermelon" are stopped in the display window 6, and the combination of "Bell A, Bell A, Bell A" on the small V-shaped line is stopped when the pressing order is correct. It's becoming
However, actually, the symbol combination of "replay bell A cherry" stopped on the middle winning line is determined as winning.

As described above, when any one of the push order bell combinations 1 to 6 is won, only when the stop buttons 5a to 5c are operated in accordance with the corresponding push order, the winning push order bell combination is established. The combination will stop on the winning line.
That is, as the first stop operation mode by the player, the main controller 10 receives a predetermined number of medals (for example, 6) as the first privilege based on the operation of the pressing order corresponding to the winning pressing order bell combination. This constitutes a first specific stop control means capable of drawing out to the reels 4 the winning symbol combination of the pushing order bell combination as the first specific stop mode that can be provided.

Incidentally, when winning the push-order bell combination, regardless of whether the stop button 5 is operated second or third, if only the stop button 5 operated first follows a specific push order, it corresponds to the push-order bell combination. The stop control of the reels 4 may be performed so as to stop the combination of symbols. Also, the number of push order bells is not limited to six, and three push order bells 1 to 3 may be provided.
Further, as the bell combination, a common bell combination that wins prizes without restrictions on the pressing order may be provided in addition to the bell combination of the pressing order.

On the other hand, for the colored bells, there is a colored bell 1 in which a prize is established when the symbol combination of "blank, bell A, and bell A" stops on the middle winning line, and a colored bell winning, ``BAR, bell A, A color bell combination 2 that wins when the symbol combination of "Bell A" stops, and a color bell that wins when the symbol combination of "Red 7A, Bell A, Bell A" stops on the middle winning line. A winning combination 3 and a colored bell winning combination 4 in which a prize is established when the symbol combination of "white 7, bell A, bell A" stops on the middle winning line are set.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5(a), in the color bell combination 1, the left reel 4a displays patterns of "Replay", "Blank", and "Bell B" in the range of arrangement numbers 19 to 1. It is essential to stop within the window 6, and on the middle reel 4b, for example, the patterns of "Red 7A", "Bell A", and "Replay" in the range of array numbers 10 to 12 stop within the display window 6, On the right reel 4c, for example, the patterns of "Replay", "Bell A", and "Cherry" in the range of sequence numbers 1 to 3 are stopped in the display window 6, and "Blank Bell A" is displayed on the middle winning line. This is a color bell combination that wins when the symbol combination of "Bell A" stops.

As for the color bell combination 2, as shown in FIG. 5(b), the left reel 4a displays the patterns of "Replay", "BAR", and "Cherry" in the range of array numbers 4 to 6 in the display window 6. It is essential to stop, and for example, the patterns of "Red 7A", "Bell A", and "Replay" in the range of array numbers 10 to 12 are stopped in the display window 6 on the middle reel 4b, and on the right reel 4c. , for example, the patterns of "Replay", "Bell A", and "Cherry" in the range of sequence numbers 1 to 3 are stopped in the display window 6, and "BAR, Bell A, Bell A" is displayed on the middle prize line. It is a color bell combination that wins when the combination of symbols stops.

As for the color bell combination 3, as shown in FIG. 5(c), the left reel 4a displays the symbols "replay", "red 7A", and "red 7B" in the range of arrangement numbers 9 to 11 in the display window 6. For example, the patterns of "Red 7A", "Bell A", and "Replay" in the range of arrangement numbers 10 to 12 are stopped in the display window 6 on the middle reel 4b, and the right reel 4b stops. At 4c, for example, the patterns of "Replay", "Bell A", and "Cherry" in the range of sequence numbers 1 to 3 stop in the display window 6, and "Red 7A, Bell A, Bell It is a color bell combination that wins when the symbol combination of "A" stops.

As for the color bell combination 4, as shown in FIG. 5(d), the left reel 4a displays the symbols "Replay", "White 7", and "Bell B" in the range of arrangement numbers 14 to 16 in the display window 6. For example, the patterns of "Red 7A", "Bell A", and "Replay" in the range of arrangement numbers 10 to 12 are stopped in the display window 6 on the middle reel 4b, and the right reel 4b stops. At 4c, for example, the patterns of "Replay", "Bell A", and "Cherry" in the range of sequence numbers 1 to 3 stop in the display window 6, and "White 7, Bell A, Bell It is a color bell combination that wins when the symbol combination of "A" stops.

Also, in the color bell role, unlike the bell role in which you press the button, you can win in any order. In order to win a prize, it is necessary to press the left reel 4a, which is a predetermined individual variable display means, aiming at one of the special symbols.

As described above, when one of the colored bell combinations 1 to 4 is won, the winning colored bell combination is established only when the eye-pushing operation is performed aiming at the corresponding special symbol on the left reel 4a. The symbol combination that causes the player to stop on the winning line.
That is, the main controller 10, as the second stop operation mode by the player, provides a predetermined number of medals (for example, 15) as the second privilege based on the operation aiming at the special symbol corresponding to the winning colored bell combination. is configured as a second specific stop control means capable of causing the winning symbol combination of the color bell combination to be drawn to the reels 4 as the second specific stop mode capable of providing the .
Note that a predetermined reel 4 has an operation aimed at a special symbol, and with respect to the other reels 4, a winning symbol combination is derived only when the reels 4 are stopped in a predetermined pressing order. You may do so.

The watermelon role is a small role (rare role) in which the combination of corresponding symbols is "watermelon, watermelon, watermelon". Watermelon, watermelon, watermelon" has a strong watermelon role in which it stops on a line rising to the right or a line falling to the right.
The cherry combination is a small combination (rare combination) in which the combination of corresponding symbols is "cherry, ANY, ANY". There is a strong cherry combination in which the is stopped at the middle stage of the left reel 4a.

In the replay role, two replay roles with different combinations of corresponding symbols are provided. A normal replay role (hereinafter referred to as a replay role) in which the corresponding combination of symbols is "replay, replay, replay"; A chance replay role (chance role) called "replay bell bell" is provided.
"Replay Bell Bell" (chance eye) is a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed when the chance replay role is won, and is a so-called rare role that has a relatively low winning probability in the internal lottery process, along with the watermelon role and cherry role. is set.
As for the watermelon combination, the cherry combination, and the replay combination, similarly to the push-order bell combination, the determination of winning is performed by the symbols stopped on the middle winning line when each of the above-described symbol combinations stops.
Also, the role of cherry or the role of watermelon may be used as a type of replay role.

The symbols corresponding to the replay combination and the symbols corresponding to the push order bell combination (“Bell A” or “Bell B”) are always within the pull-in range regardless of when the reels 4 are stopped at any timing. This eliminates the need for a so-called eye-pushing operation aimed at a "replay" symbol, a "bell A" symbol, or a "bell B" symbol. On the other hand, the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 4a and the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 4b are partially arranged with an interval wider than the pull-in range. In the stopping operation of 4a, it is necessary to perform a pressing operation aiming at the "cherry" symbol. Similarly, when winning the role of watermelon, in performing the stopping operation of the middle reel 4b, it is necessary to perform a pressing operation aiming at the "watermelon" symbol. It's becoming
Note that the "cherry" symbols and the "watermelon" symbols on each reel 4 may be arranged in any way as long as they require eye-pressing operations when winning the cherry combination and the watermelon combination.

Further, the main controller 10 and the sub-controller 20 can execute push order navigation for each game as a notification state regarding the push order bell combination. In the push order navigation, when one of the push order bell roles 1 to 6 is won, the pushing order of the winning push order bell role is reported (executed push order navigation) by the main display 8 and the navigation lamp 12. state.
Therefore, when the push order navigation is executed, the player can win the winning push order bell combination simply by stopping the reels 4 in accordance with the instructed push order.

That is, the sub control device 20 enables the player to recognize the first stop operation mode of stopping the winning symbol combination in the game in which the winning symbol combination of the push-order bell role can be stopped as the first specific stop mode. This constitutes the first stop operation notifying means capable of notifying.
Further, the sub-controller 20 notifies the stop operation order for each of the reels 4a to 4c as a plurality of individual variable display means as the first stop operation mode.

Similarly, color navigation can be executed for each game as a notification state regarding the color bell combination. In the color navigation, when one of the color bell combinations 1 to 4 is won, the main display 8 informs (executes the color navigation) of the type of the special symbol on the left reel 4a corresponding to the winning color bell combination. state.
Therefore, when the color navigation is executed, the player can win the winning color bell combination by performing the eye pressing operation aiming at the notified special symbol on the left reel 4a.

That is, the sub control device 20 recognizably informs the player of the second stop operation mode for stopping the winning symbol combination in the game in which the winning symbol combination of the color bell can be stopped as the second specific stop mode. This constitutes a possible second stop operation notification means.
In addition, the sub-controller 20 notifies, as the second stop operation mode, a stop operation mode for drawing out a predetermined symbol on the left reel 4a as predetermined individual variation display means.
In this way, the player can easily acquire medals by executing push order navigation and color navigation. (activated).

Based on the combination of symbols as described above, winning of a small combination and a replay combination is determined (determining means). A prize is established and a game value is given according to the establishment of each prize.
For example, when a combination of symbols corresponding to a small combination such as a bell combination, a cherry combination, and a watermelon combination is stopped, establishment of a small combination winning is determined, and the medal payout device 7 is driven and controlled to open the medal payout port 7b. A predetermined number of medals are paid out through the game.

Specifically, when the combination of the corresponding symbols is stop-displayed in the push-order bell combination, six medals are paid out.
Further, when the pressing order bell combination is won, if the stop buttons 5a to 5c are operated in a pressing order (five pressing orders) other than the specific pressing order, and the corresponding combination of symbols is not stopped and displayed. , a number of medals less than 6 (for example, 1) is paid out.

Also, in the color bell combination, when the combination of the corresponding symbols is stopped and displayed, 15 medals are paid out.
Further, when the winning of the color bell combination is made, if any of the special symbols are not stopped and displayed on the middle winning line of the left reel 4a, no medals are paid out.
Note that the pressing order bell combination and the color bell combination are set to winning probabilities such that the number of medals held by the player increases during the pseudo-bonus state or AT state, which will be described later.

Also, when the combinations of symbols corresponding to the weak watermelon combination and the strong watermelon combination are stopped and displayed, two medals are paid out.
Further, when the combinations of symbols corresponding to the weak cherry combination and the strong cherry combination are stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out.
It should be noted that the number of medals to be paid out when the combination of symbols corresponding to each winning combination is stopped and displayed may be other than the number described above.

In addition, the replay hand and the chance replay hand are determined by the stop display of the combination of symbols corresponding to the replay hand and the chance replay hand (chance hand), and in the next game, medals are not inserted (the number of bets is not set). ), the game can be played with the same number of bets as the number of bets set in the previous game.

In addition, the probability of winning each role is determined by the following relationship at each set value: bell role > colored bell role > replay role > weak cherry role > weak watermelon role > chance replay role > strong watermelon role > strong cherry role. , the bell combination is most likely to be won, and the strong cherry combination is most difficult to be won. However, the probability of winning the bell combination in the order of pressing here is the sum of the bell combinations in the order of pressing, and the same applies to the bell combination in color.
It should be noted that the relationship of winning probabilities of each combination may be other than those described above.
In addition, the weak cherry role, weak watermelon role, chance replay role (chance role), strong cherry role, and strong watermelon role are called rare roles in the sense that they are hard-to-win winning roles.

[Game flow in the gaming machine of the first embodiment]
Next, the game flow of the slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a game state in the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment.
The main control device 10 and the sub-control device 20 can control the slot machine 1 in a plurality of game states, various processes in each game state, control of transition between game states (hereinafter simply referred to as "transition"), etc. is performed as follows.

As shown in FIG. 6, the game of the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment consists of a plurality of game states such as a normal game state, a CZ state, a pseudo-bonus state, and an AT state. The main control device 10 and the sub-control device 20 are controllable so as to shift from one game state to another game state based on establishment of a predetermined transition condition.

Also, the game of the slot machine 1 has a normal section and an advantageous section. These sections are divided according to the game state, and further divided according to the winning state for the game state advantageous to the player, such as the AT state.
A normal probability state and a high probability state are set as winning states for game states advantageous to the player, as will be described later.
The normal section is a section in which a game can be played in a normal game state, and includes a section in which a game can be played by lottery with a lottery probability when the pseudo-bonus state is a normal probability state in the normal game state.
In the normal section, lottery control may be performed so as not to win the pseudo-bonus state.
In addition, in the normal section, the lottery probability of the pseudo-bonus state may be set to a super-high probability state that is higher than the high-probability state. You may choose to win.
The advantageous section stays continuously until it returns to the normal section again after shifting from the normal section to another game state.

The advantageous section includes a CZ state, a precursor state of the CZ state, a pseudo-bonus state, a normal probability state and a high-probability state of the pseudo-bonus state, a precursor state of the pseudo-bonus state, and a section in which a game can be played in the AT state. Main controller 10 counts (calculates) the number of games that have been played continuously while staying in the advantageous section. When the game state is in the advantageous section, the advantageous section lamp 13 is lit.
Note that the advantageous section lamp 13 may be lit only during periods such as the CZ state, the pseudo-bonus state, the AT state, etc., in which the player can actually recognize the state as being advantageous. For example, the advantageous section lamp 13 may not be lit during the high probability state of the pseudo-bonus state.

After moving to the advantageous section, in order to end the advantageous section, in addition to the case of transitioning to the normal section due to the game lottery result, etc., "the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section has reached a predetermined number" or "the advantageous section Limiting means for limiting the number of medals that can be obtained during a series of advantageous intervals consisting of each state specified as an advantageous interval, in which any of the conditions "that the number of medals acquired during the period has reached a predetermined number" is satisfied (so-called limiter) is provided.

Note that the conditions for ending the advantageous interval are just an example, and may include, for example, "at least one pressing order bell has been announced". In addition, the conditions for ending the advantageous section are, for example, "the combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped and displayed", "the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination of the first type special bonus (so-called regular bonus) may be included. In addition, the upper limit of the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section can be any number such as 1000 or 1500, and the upper limit of the number of medals obtained can be any number such as 1000 or 2400. Any number is acceptable.

Next, each game state (normal game state, CZ state, pseudo-bonus state, AT state) executed under the control of the main controller 10 and the sub-controller 20, transition processing between game states, and transition processing Various effects that occur will be described in detail for each game state.

Hereinafter, unless otherwise specified, the point of transition from each game state to another game state is basically after the third reel stop operation of the game in which the transition condition is established (or after the payout of medals is completed). is. However, it is not limited to this, and the next game may be shifted after the transition condition is established.
In addition, the effects are exemplified by later-described precursor effects (real precursor effects or fake precursor effects), continuous effects, and the like. It consists of notification of the awarding of the privilege by light emission at 11, advance notification before the awarding of the privilege, etc., and heightens the expectation of the awarding of the privilege to the player.

(Normal game state)
The normal game state is a game state in which the main controller 10 of the slot machine 1 stays when it is reset, and is a disadvantageous state for the player.
As shown in FIG. 6, the main controller 10 performs a lottery process for shifting to the CZ state, the pseudo-bonus state, and the AT state while staying in the normal game state. Depending on the specification of the slot machine 1 or the like, the normal game state may not be directly shifted to the AT state.

During the normal game state, an individual effect that is completed in one game is executed on the main display 8 or the sub display 17 with a predetermined probability.
The individual effects are effects that are executed mainly to increase the player's sense of expectation, and include winning effects that are executed based on the lottery result of the winning combination in the main controller 10, which will be described later.
In addition, the individual effects include those that are executed based on the probability state at that time (normal probability state or high probability state) and those that are executed to explain the game.
The winning effect is a effect that is mainly executed to notify the result of the lottery for the winning combination. When a predetermined character appears, an item that can notify the winning rare winning combination is displayed, or an AT state occurs when a predetermined character appears. Depending on the type of rare role won, and the AT state transition lottery result triggered by the rare role won This is an effect in which the image is displayed.

・Transition processing from the normal game state to the pseudo-bonus state (arrow a in FIG. 6)
In the normal game state, a pseudo-bonus state (privilege) as a second specific game state based on the determination result of whether or not to grant a privilege by the main control device 10 is a predetermined special determination result. is given.

More specifically, main controller 10 preliminarily performs a lottery process for shifting to the pseudo-bonus state based on the winning of a predetermined rare combination as a specific lottery result. For example, the process of transitioning to the pseudo-bonus state is performed at a predetermined probability (for example, 20%) when a chance combination or a strong cherry combination is won.
The pseudo-bonus state is a gaming state that continues until a predetermined number of games are played, during which an AT state transition lottery is performed. Details of the pseudo-bonus state will be described later.

Further, in the normal game state, the probability of winning the pseudo-bonus state when a predetermined rare combination is won can be changed according to the set value in the probability setting device 14 as setting means. , 20% at setting 1, 22% at setting 2, 24% at setting 3, 26% at setting 4, 28% at setting 5, and 30% at setting 6. there is

It should be noted that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state, that is, the decision as to whether or not to award the privilege may be made by means other than the lottery for the rare combination by the lottery means. For example, when a predetermined winning combination (for example, a bell combination) has been won (or the actual number of times) has reached a predetermined number of times, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state may be determined, or a lottery for the pseudo-bonus state may be conducted at that time. Alternatively, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state may be determined when the number of games executed after the end of the previous pseudo-bonus state or the AT state reaches a predetermined number. Points are added according to a lottery, points to be added can be changed according to the type of winning combination and the state of winning the combination, and when the points reach a predetermined number, a pseudo-bonus state is established. It may be decided to shift to , or a lottery for a pseudo-bonus state may be performed at that time.

Also, a pseudo-bonus state may be generated during the AT state, which will be described later.
In addition, in the first embodiment, the chance combination and the strong cherry combination are set as the lottery triggering combination in the pseudo-bonus state.

In the case of winning the lottery for transition to the pseudo-bonus state, the final transition to the pseudo-bonus state is to be made in order to increase the player's expectation for the transition to the pseudo-bonus state before the transition to the pseudo-bonus state. is executed on the main display 8 for a predetermined number of games (for example, 18 games).

That is, even if the main controller 10 as a lottery means determines in advance to transition to the pseudo-bonus state, it does not immediately transition to the pseudo-bonus state, and a predetermined number of games (for example, 30 times) have been played since that time. A pseudo-bonus state is generated after execution, and based on the fact that the main controller 10 has determined in advance to generate a pseudo-bonus state, the sub-controller 20 controls a predetermined amount before transitioning to the pseudo-bonus state. In the number of game execution periods, control is performed to execute the main sign effect as the sign effect.
Therefore, when the transition to the pseudo-bonus state is determined in advance for granting the privilege, the sub control device 20 generates a specific effect (first specific effect) over a plurality of games for a predetermined period before granting the privilege. This makes it possible to execute this omen effect.

In addition, a waiting period for a predetermined number of games (for example, 12 games) is set between the winning of the lottery for transition to the pseudo-bonus state and the execution of the present sign effect, and the present sign effect is based on this. It will be executed after the waiting period ends.
Therefore, even if the lottery for shifting to the pseudo-bonus state is won, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state does not take place immediately, and the transition to the pseudo-bonus state takes place during the waiting period and after execution of this precursor effect.

During this omen effect, the main display 8 is switched to a stage image with a background different from that during the normal game state, and an effect on the omen stage in which the characters that appear perform different actions than during the normal game state. image is executed. For example, the production on the sign stage, such as a character advancing through a cave, is performed through a plurality of games. These effects do not change even if one game ends. For example, even if screens are switched due to the occurrence of various events in a predetermined game, the effect itself, such as a character advancing through a cave, does not change and continues in the next game. Therefore, this portent effect is a series of effects that are executed over (across) a plurality of games.
In addition, a plurality of patterns with different backgrounds and the like are prepared for the precursor stage, and under the control of the sub-controller 20, one of the patterns of the precursor stage is selected according to whether or not the pseudo-bonus state is won at that time. It is supposed to be

In addition, even if you win a rare role (for example, a chance role) that triggers the transition to the pseudo-bonus state, but do not win the lottery for transition to the pseudo-bonus state, the same as when you win the pseudo-bonus state A predetermined number of games (for example, 18 games) of fake precursor effects (second specific effects) are executed on the main display 8 to notify that the state will not finally shift to the pseudo-bonus state.
It should be noted that the fake sign effect is executed with a predetermined probability (for example, 50%) when a rare role that triggers the transition to the pseudo-bonus state is won, but the lottery for transition to the pseudo-bonus state is not won. , or you may make it always be executed.

That is, the sub control device 20 performs a specific effect (second specific effect) over a plurality of games based on establishment of a predetermined condition when the main control device 10 has not previously determined the transition to the pseudo-bonus state. It is possible to execute the fake omen production as.
Therefore, regardless of whether or not the main control device 10 as the privilege granting means has decided in advance to shift to the pseudo-bonus state, the sub control device 20, when a specific condition such as winning a chance combination is satisfied, , it is possible to execute a specific effect (a real portent effect or a fake portent effect) that can indicate whether or not a privilege will be given, across a plurality of games.

Also, when the fake precursor effect is executed, similarly to when the pseudo-bonus state is won, between the winning of the rare role that triggers the transition to the pseudo-bonus state and the execution of the fake precursor effect, A fake standby period for a predetermined number of games (for example, 12 games) is set.
The main omen effect and the fake omen effect basically consist of a series of effects over multiple games in which the effect images (stages or characters that appear, etc.) are set in the same way, and the contents to be notified in the end are different. Thus, it is possible to attract the player's sense of expectation until the end.

Also, during the sign effect (this sign effect or fake sign effect) and the waiting period (or fake waiting period), the details will be described later, but the occurrence rate of the winning effect executed in each game is different from other normal games. Can be raised higher than in the state.
In particular, during the waiting period (or the fake waiting period), since the premonitory effects will occur after that, each winning effect that occurs in a state where the occurrence rate is increased is a so-called inciting effect for the occurrence of the pseudo-bonus state. As a result, the player's expectations are heightened.
In addition, as a stimulus effect, the appearance rate of a specific character increases during the winning effect, the color scheme of the character's dialogue image is different from other than the stimulus effect (for example, blue), and the background is changed. etc. will be performed.

In addition, in the main sign effect and the fake sign effect, it is notified whether or not the transition to the pseudo-bonus state is finally made. For example, a continuous effect (continuous effect) is executed from two games before). The continuous effect is executed by, for example, a battle effect consisting of an image in which the main character and the enemy character fight for a predetermined number of games (for example, 3 games).

In the continuous effect, a effect image is executed in which the main character and the enemy characters repeatedly attack and defend each game, and the effect of each game is carried over to the next game. For example, when the main character takes damage in a given game, an effect (for example, an effect of changing a meter indicating the amount of damage) is performed so that the damage is carried over to the next game.
Further, the offensive and defensive states of the main character and the enemy character in each game are set depending on whether or not the transition to the pseudo-bonus state has been determined in advance, and when the transition to the pseudo-bonus state is made, the main character is more likely to be in the transition than when the transition is not made. It is set so that there are many games in which characters attack.
That is, the continuous effect is a series of effects that are executed over (straddle) a plurality of games.
Also, in the continuous effect, a button effect may be executed in parallel.

Then, when the pseudo-bonus state is won (in the case of the present sign effect), an image in which the main character finally wins is displayed as an image notifying the pseudo-bonus state win, and the pseudo-bonus state is won. If not (in the case of the fake sign effect), an image in which the main character is finally defeated is displayed as an image notifying non-winning in the pseudo-bonus state.
Instead of the continuous effect, an effect that is completed only in the final game of the main portent effect and the fake portent effect may be executed, and the transition to the pseudo-bonus state may be notified based on the result of the effect.

Further, the present portent effect and the fake portent effect may be generated immediately when winning the rare role that triggers the transition to the pseudo-bonus state. In addition, the fake portent effect may be generated without fail or at a predetermined probability when a rare combination that triggers a shift to the pseudo-bonus state is won.
Further, the number of games of the main portent effect and the fake portent effect may be any number of games, or may be selectively determined from a plurality of numbers of games (for example, 15 to 20 games). Similarly, the waiting period may also be changed by selectively determining the number of games (for example, 10 to 15 games).

The number of games that can be selected may be set to be the same as the execution period of the real sign effect and the fake sign effect, but the number of games that is not selected in the fake sign effect may be selectable during the real sign effect. In this way, when the precursor effect is completed in a small number of games which is impossible in the fake precursor effect, or when the precursor effect continues to a large number of games which is impossible in the fake precursor effect, this precursor effect is determined. It is possible to improve the expectation of the player.

In addition, in the normal game state, there are a normal probability state and a high probability state in which the winning probability state to the pseudo-bonus state is different. The probability of winning the lottery to transition to the pseudo-bonus state is higher in the high-probability state than in the normal-probability state. , control is performed to shift from the normal-probability state to the high-probability state. On the other hand, as a predetermined fall condition, for example, control is performed to shift from the high probability state to the normal probability state with a probability of 5% when the replay hand is won, when the bell hand is won, and when the hand is lost.

The probability of winning in the pseudo-bonus state is set at, for example, a probability of 20% when winning a chance hand or a strong cherry hand in the normal probability state, and is set to 20% when winning a chance hand or strong cherry hand in the high probability state. It is set with a probability of 50%.
When the probability state changes from the normal probability state to the high probability state, the sub-control device 20 controls the main display 8 to notify that the probability state is the high probability state. When a stage that advances through grasslands is displayed, the background of the stage is changed from the daytime background to the evening background to notify the high probability state.

However, instead of ensuring that the stage is changed when the high probability state occurs, a stage change lottery is performed with a predetermined probability (for example, 30%) in the game during the high probability state, and the result of this change lottery is won. Control is performed to change the stage only when
In addition, even in the game during the normal probability state, a change lottery to the stage is performed with a predetermined probability (2%), and even if this change lottery is won, control is performed to change to the stage showing the high probability state. .

On the other hand, when staying in the stage consisting of the evening background, a lottery to change to the daytime background is also performed, and in the game during the normal probability state, the change lottery is won with a relatively high probability (for example, 20%), and the probability is high. In the game during the state, control is performed so that the change lottery is won with a relatively low probability (for example, 5%).
Therefore, even if the stage consists of the evening background, it does not necessarily mean that the player stays in the high probability state, and the stage consisting of the evening background only suggests the high probability state.

In addition, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is changed, or when the main controller 10 is reset, after moving to the advantageous section through the normal section, the normal game state in the normal probability state substantially A game can be started, but the normal game state may be started in a high probability state with a predetermined probability for each set value in the probability setting device 14 .
Also, the pseudo-bonus state may be won at different probabilities when the chance combination and the strong cherry combination are won.

・Transition processing from normal game state to CZ state (arrow c in FIG. 6)
In the normal game state, the main controller 10 performs lottery processing for transition to the CZ state based on winning of a predetermined rare combination. For example, transition processing to the CZ state is performed with a predetermined probability (for example, 10%) when a strong watermelon combination is won. The condition for transitioning to the CZ state is winning the transition lottery.

In addition, in the normal game state, the winning probability state of the CZ state may be changed by the main controller 10, for example, triggered by the winning of the weak cherry combination. In addition, the sub-controller 20 may perform notification control for the winning probability state. In the case of performing notification control, instead of directly informing each probability state, the player can change the display content of the main display 8 to indicate which state the probability state is at that time. It may be made to be predictable.
Further, in the normal game state, the probability of winning the CZ state when a predetermined rare combination is won may be changed according to the set value in the probability setting device 14 as setting means.

In addition, even if the lottery for transition to the CZ state is won, the CZ state standby state (delay period) is generated for a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 to 8 games) without immediately shifting to the CZ state. During this time, the transition to the CZ state is made to wait, and then the transition to the CZ state is made.
Also, during the CZ state standby state, control is performed such that the contents of the presentation on the main display 8 are different from those in other states, as in the above-described standby period of the pseudo-bonus state.

That is, the occurrence rate of the winning effect executed in each game is higher than during other normal game states, so that the winning effect becomes a so-called stimulus effect for the CZ state that will occur thereafter, increasing the player's expectation. It will happen.
In addition, as a stimulus effect, the appearance rate of a specific character increases during the winning effect, the color scheme of the character's dialogue image is different from other than the stimulus effect (for example, blue), and the background is changed. etc. will be performed.
Then, at the end of the game when the CZ state standby state ends, the main display 8 notifies that the game will shift to the CZ state.

In addition, in order to increase the player's expectation for the transition to the CZ state, the CZ state continues for a predetermined number of games (for example, two games) to notify that the transition to the CZ state will finally occur during the CZ state standby state. The effect may be executed on the main display 8.

In addition, even if a predetermined rare role (for example, a strong cherry role) is won, but the lottery for transition to the CZ state is not won, a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 to 8 games) are performed in the same manner as the delay period. In the interim, the control of the effect (so-called fanning effect) is performed so that the content of the effect on the main display 8 is different from the other states.
Therefore, when a predetermined rare combination (for example, a strong cherry combination) is won, the player's expectation is heightened for a predetermined period regardless of whether or not there is a transition to the CZ state.

It should be noted that the main display 8 may perform a continuous CZ state fake effect for a predetermined number of games (for example, 3 games) informing that the game will not finally shift to the CZ state. In this case, in the CZ state continuous production and the fake continuous production, the characters appearing are basically set in the same manner, and the contents to be finally notified are different, thereby attracting the player's expectation until the end. You may do so.
For example, as a CZ state continuous effect (or fake continuous effect), effect images may be executed in which characters challenge sports competitions throughout each game. In this case, during the continuous production (or fake continuous production), the sports competition is continuously executed through the game in between, and if the CZ state is won, the competition is finally successful (for example, scoring a goal in soccer). success) and the CZ state is not won, an effect image for failing the competition is executed.

In addition, during the CZ state standby state, the main display 8 executes a CZ state precursor effect (CZ main precursor effect or CZ fake precursor effect) similar to the precursor effect (main precursor effect or fake precursor effect). Alternatively, continuous production or continuous fake production may be executed at the final stage of the CZ state precursor production (CZ main precursor production or CZ fake precursor production).
In addition, the period during which the fanning effect is performed when a predetermined rare role (for example, a strong cherry role) is won may be any period during which a plurality of games are executed, and the number of games is determined based on the extraction of random numbers. Any one number of games may be determined, or a fixed number of games may be determined.

・Transition processing from normal game state to AT state (arrow g in FIG. 6)
In the normal game state, the main controller 10 performs lottery processing for shifting to the AT state as the first specific game state based on the winning of a predetermined rare combination. For example, when a strong cherry combination is won, the transition processing to the AT state is performed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1%). The condition for transitioning to the AT state is winning the transition lottery.
In addition, the transition to the AT state in the normal game state is performed on the condition that a predetermined rare combination is won, and a predetermined probability ( For example, 1%) may be used.

In the first embodiment, the transition to the AT state is executed mainly via a pseudo-bonus state in order to increase the player's expectation, so that the transition to the AT state is performed directly from the normal game state. The probability of shifting to the AT state is set to an extremely low probability.
In addition, depending on the set probability in the probability setting device 14, it may be possible to change the probability of directly shifting from the normal game state to the AT state, or only in the case of relatively high set values (for example, setting 4 to 6) It may be possible to win a lottery for transition from the normal game state directly to the AT state.
In addition, in the normal game state, when the lottery for transition to the AT state is won, the same predictive effect as when the above-described pseudo-bonus state occurs is executed, and the AT state is generated after the predictive effect is completed. there is

In addition, when a lottery for transition from the normal game state directly to the AT state is won, selection control of an indication performance different from that at the time of occurrence of the pseudo-bonus state may be performed. In this case, the selection rate of the precursor effect composed of characters and backgrounds which appear less frequently (or do not appear) in the fake precursor effect may be made higher than when the pseudo-bonus state occurs. Also, the precursor effect, which is not executed when the pseudo-bonus state occurs, may be executed only when the state is directly shifted to the AT state.

(CZ state)
In the CZ state, the push order navigation is not performed when the push order bell role is won, but the lottery process for transition to the pseudo-bonus state is performed at a higher probability in each game than in the normal game state. is also a game state in which it is easy to shift to a pseudo-bonus state.
Although the push order navigation is not performed when the push order bell role is won, the push order navigation may be executed when the push order bell role is won. Push order navigation may be executed with a predetermined probability (for example, 40%) when winning a role.

While staying in the CZ state, it is easier to shift to the pseudo-bonus state than while staying in the normal game state, so the CZ state is positioned as a chance zone in the flow of a series of games.
The maximum number of games that can be played in the CZ state is 10 games.
During the CZ state, control information regarding the CZ state is transmitted from the main controller 10 to the sub-controller 20, and under the control of the main controller 10 and the sub-controller 20, the main display 8 displays the CZ state. Various effects and the number of remaining games are displayed on the main display 8.

・Transition processing from CZ state to pseudo-bonus state (arrow e in FIG. 6)
In the CZ state, a pseudo-bonus state transition lottery process is performed in each game.
The winning probability of the pseudo-bonus state transition lottery process is set according to the winning combination of each game. The probability of winning in the pseudo-bonus state transition lottery process is, for example, 50% when winning a rare combination, 10% when winning a bell combination and a replay combination, and 5% when losing. The pseudo-bonus state transition lottery is performed for each game during the CZ state, but whether or not there is a transition to the pseudo-bonus state is determined in the final game of the CZ state, and when the transition to the pseudo-bonus state is notified in the final game. , the game state shifts to the pseudo-bonus state as in the normal game state.
Since the pseudo-bonus status transition lottery is executed when each winning combination is internally won, the pseudo-bonus status transition lottery is performed even if the symbol corresponding to the winning combination does not stop on the reel 4 (at the time of failure). be done.

It should be noted that the winning probability of the pseudo-bonus state transition lottery process for some or all of the winning combinations may be other than the above. In addition, the lottery process for transition to the pseudo-bonus state is performed when the bell combination is won, but the lottery process for transition to the pseudo-bonus state may be performed based on the winning of the symbol corresponding to the bell combination.

In addition, during the CZ state, a CZ effect in which a predetermined character appears is displayed on the main display 8 in order to enhance the interest of the game. In the CZ effect, for example, during the first several games (for example, seven games), a performance image in which the main character prepares for a battle is displayed, and during the last several games in the CZ state (for example, three games), an effect image is displayed. , an effect image is displayed in which the main character and the enemy character battle each other as a series of effects over (across) a plurality of games. Then, if the lottery for transition to the pseudo-bonus state is won, it is reported that the main character wins the final game and transitions to the pseudo-bonus state.

In addition, during the CZ state, the background during the battle preparation presentation and the content of the offense and defense during the battle presentation change according to the contents of the game won during that time, and the expectation for the transition to the pseudo-bonus state changes. is designed to give Also, the number of remaining games in the CZ state is displayed on the main display 8, and the number of remaining games is decremented each time the game is executed.
In addition, even during the preparation effect before the battle effect in the CZ effect, since the effect image in which the main character prepares for the battle is continuously executed throughout each game, the preparation effect also extends over (straddles) a plurality of games. A series of performances.

In addition, during the CZ state, it is possible to notify whether or not there is a transition to the CZ state without executing the battle effect. For example, when a pseudo bonus state is won in a predetermined game during the CZ state. , an effect may be executed to notify that the game will transition to a pseudo-bonus state during the game. In this case, when the pseudo-bonus state is not won in any game during the CZ state, the CZ state ends without performing the performance for notifying the shift to the pseudo-bonus state.

・Transition processing from CZ state to normal game state (arrow d in FIG. 6)
In the CZ state, when the lottery for transition to the pseudo-bonus state is not won, the state is shifted to the normal game state after the specified number of games are executed in the CZ state. At this time, in the CZ effect, it is notified that the main character is defeated and does not shift to the pseudo-bonus state.

In addition, at the time of transition from the CZ state to the normal game state, under the control of the main control device 10 and the sub-control device 20, notification of setting related information (setting suggestion information) that can suggest the setting value set by the probability setting device 14 You may notify by means (main display 8, speaker 9). For example, on the main display 8 and the sub display 17, a predetermined character out of a plurality of characters is displayed. Since the characters to be displayed are selected according to the selection probabilities preset according to the respective set values of the probability setting device 14, it is possible to predict the set values to some extent from the displayed characters.

(pseudo bonus state)
The pseudo-bonus state as the second specific game state provides both push-order navigation for the push-order bell role and color navigation for the color bell role as notification of an operation mode advantageous to the player in the game during the pseudo-bonus state. is executed, the game state is such that it is extremely easy to obtain medals.
Further, although the details will be described later, in the AT state, unlike the pseudo-bonus state, color navigation for the color bell role is not executed, and only push-order navigation for the push-order bell role is executed. This is a game state in which it is easier to obtain medals than in the AT state.

The pseudo-bonus state continues for a predetermined period (for example, 18 games to 20 games), and an AT state transition lottery is performed in a predetermined game executed during this period.
Therefore, if the lottery for shifting to the AT state is won during the pseudo-bonus state in which a large number of medals can be obtained, the AT state occurs after the pseudo-bonus state ends, so that the player can obtain a certain number of medals. At the same time, it becomes possible to execute the game for generating the next pseudo-bonus state, synergistically creating a state advantageous to the player.

It should be noted that the winning probability of the push order bell role and the winning probability of the colored bell role are values that increase the number of medals in a given period of time when any one of the navigation states continues for a given period of time. It is preferable to set the winning probability of the bell role (for example, about 57%) higher than the winning probability of the colored bell role (for example, about 30%).
In addition, the period during which the pseudo-bonus state continues is defined by the number of games that have been played, and the number of times either one of the push-order navigation and the color navigation, or both navigations is executed, is paid out. The number of medals (number of payouts), the number of medals actually increased due to the payout of medals (net increase in number), etc. may be used.

In addition, in the first game after transitioning to the pseudo-bonus state, under the control of the main control device 10, the period from the operation of the start lever 3 until the operation of the stop button 5 becomes valid is longer than in the normal game. During the period, after the reels 4 are reversely rotated, a specific symbol combination (“red 7A, red 7A, red 7A”) on the reels 4 is temporarily stopped and then forwardly rotated again. , the occurrence of a pseudo-bonus state is reported.

The reel effect period during which the reel effect is performed is set to, for example, 15 seconds. During this period, the operation of the stop button 5 is disabled, so even if the reels 4 are operating, the game cannot progress. there is
At the end of the reel performance period, a specific symbol combination (for example, "Red 7A, Red 7A, Red 7A") is temporarily stopped (automatically stopped). Although navigation is executed in the same way as in the AT state, it looks as if a so-called big bonus state (real bonus state) has occurred, and is differentiated from the AT state.

Further, when the reel presentation period ends, the reels 4 automatically start rotating in the normal direction, and the operation of the stop button 5 becomes valid. is possible in the same way as a normal game.
Further, during the reel effect, under the control of the sub-controller 20, the main display 8 displays an effect image corresponding to the reel effect to notify the occurrence of a pseudo-bonus state.

・Transition processing from pseudo-bonus state to AT state (arrow f in FIG. 6)
In the pseudo-bonus state, AT state transition lottery processing is performed in a predetermined number of games (1 to 3 games) executed at the end of the pseudo-bonus state.
In the first embodiment, the AT state transition lottery process is executed over the lottery game period set during the last three games in the pseudo-bonus state at the longest, and is executed in each game during the lottery game period. Whether or not to shift to the AT state is determined depending on the results of the competition lottery.
Then, when all the results of the lottery lottery in each game during the lottery game period are won, it is determined that the special condition is met, the transition to the AT state is decided, and after the pseudo-bonus state ends, the game state. will shift to the AT state.

That is, main controller 10 can determine whether or not to transition to the AT state in relation to the execution of a plurality of games during the lottery game period as a predetermined period, and is involved in the transition of the AT state in a plurality of games. When the result of the lottery satisfies a predetermined special condition, it is possible to decide to give a predetermined privilege.
In the first embodiment, the AT state transition lottery process is performed in a predetermined number of games executed at the end of the pseudo-bonus state. A period of a predetermined number of games for processing may be provided, and a game may be executed to determine whether or not to shift to the AT state after the pseudo-bonus state ends.

In addition, the competition lottery in each game executed during the lottery game period is executed separately from the role lottery, and the winning probability is not always constant, and the lottery mode is set so that the probability is different between each game. It is
For example, the odds of winning the competitive lottery are 50% for the first game during the lottery game period, 60% for the second game, and 70% for the third game.

It should be noted that the lottery mode may be other than the probabilities of each competition lottery described above as long as the state is shifted to the AT state with a predetermined probability.
Also, a plurality of lottery modes may be set, and any one of the lottery modes may be changed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.
For example, there is a lottery mode in which the odds of winning the competitive lottery for each of the three games during the lottery game period are all 50% and the competitive lottery is executed for each game. A lottery mode may be set in which the competition lottery for each game is executed at 50% in the game and at 100% in the third game, and one of the lottery modes may be switched. However, in this case, it is preferable that the total probability of shifting from the pseudo-bonus state to the AT state be the same regardless of the lottery mode.

Further, the change of the lottery mode may be made executable based on the player's operation, and the lottery mode may be selected according to the player's preference.
Further, the total probability of shifting from the pseudo-bonus state to the AT state may be changed according to the set value in the probability setting device 14 as setting means.

Also, the total probability of shifting from the pseudo-bonus state to the AT state may be set differently according to the lottery mode. A lottery mode with a low total probability of shifting to the AT state may be switched to a lottery mode with a high total probability, based on a predetermined condition that is established during the medium or pseudo-bonus state. Also, in this case, if the AT state is won in a lottery mode with a low total probability, a benefit that is more advantageous to the player than when the AT state is won in a lottery mode with a high total probability is provided. You may make it give. For example, when an AT state is won in a lottery mode with a low total probability, a plurality of AT state continuation rights are stored (stocked), or an AT state with a large number of continuations (higher AT state) is generated. may

During the lottery game period, a predetermined A continuous effect by the character is executed as the effect of .
The continuous effect during the pseudo-bonus state is different from the continuous effect executed during the above-mentioned main sign effect (or fake sign effect), and the content is such that the battle effect is completed for each game. ing.

That is, in the continuous effect executed during the main sign effect (or the fake sign effect), the main character fights against the enemy character as it is for three games, and the result of the battle is derived in the final game. However, in the continuous effect during the pseudo-bonus state, the battle effect is executed such that the result of the battle is derived for each game according to the battle lottery in each game.
In addition, in the battle effect in each game, the battle effect is executed based on the winning probability set for each game. It is possible to appear in different types corresponding to.

For example, in the first game during the continuous production, friendly character A appears in response to a battle lottery with a winning probability of 50%, and in the second game, a battle with a winning probability of 60%. An ally character B appears in response to a lottery, and in the third game, an ally character C (for example, a main character) appears in response to a battle lottery with a winning probability of 70%. .

Then, if the battle lottery in each game has been won, the friendly character that has appeared wins at the end of the game, and if the battle lottery has not been won, the friendly character that has appeared An effect such that the player is defeated at the end of the game is completely performed for each game. As a result, when the lottery lottery wins in all the games, all the characters on the team side win, and finally the transition to the AT state is notified.
On the other hand, if the match lottery is not won even once during the lottery game period, the lottery game period ends at that point, and the pseudo-bonus state also ends at that point. Therefore, the period of the pseudo-bonus state changes according to the result of the competition lottery.

During periods other than the period of the lottery game during the pseudo-bonus state, an effect during the pseudo-bonus state in which a predetermined character appears (pseudo-bonus effect) is displayed on the main display 8 or sub-display in order to enhance the interest of the game. is displayed on the device 17. In the pseudo-bonus effect, for example, an introductory image of each character that appears is displayed, and a predetermined music is output from the speaker 9 .

On the other hand, during the period of the lottery game in the pseudo-bonus state, the background during the battle presentation and the contents of the battle and defense during the battle presentation change according to each battle lottery, giving a change in expectations for the transition to the AT state. It's like
Also, the number of remaining games in the pseudo-bonus state is displayed on the main display 8, and the number of remaining games is decremented each time a game is executed.

In the first embodiment, the AT state transition lottery period in the pseudo-bonus state is set to the last three games in the pseudo-bonus state. Any game may be used as long as it is performed, for example, 4 games, 5 games, or the like.
In addition, the condition for shifting to the AT state is set when all of the lotteries in a plurality of games are won, but other conditions may be used, such as shifting to the AT state by winning once or twice. may be determined.

In addition, if the match lottery is not won even once during the lottery game period, the lottery game period (pseudo bonus state) ends at that point, but regardless of the lottery result in each game. All three games may be executed during the lottery game period. Also, in this case, if the lottery lottery for all the games is not won, the game may be shifted to the AT state as a special privilege. However, in this case, the condition is that the game that wins the competition lottery with a probability of 100% is not executed.

In addition, the AT state transition lottery during the pseudo-bonus state may be executed outside the above lottery game period, for example, in a normal operation mode (for example, an operation mode in which the left reel 4a is first stopped). When the reels 4 are stopped, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is stopped. is stopped, a specific replay combination in which a specific combination of symbols (for example, "Red 7A, Red 7A, Red 7A" is stopped) can be drawn, and a period other than the period of the lottery game during the pseudo-bonus state. If a specific replay combination is won in , the state may be shifted to the AT state unconditionally (100% probability).
In this case, when a specific replay combination is won, it is preferable that the main display 8 displays an image prompting the player to aim for an irregular operation mode and a specific symbol combination.

In addition, if a rare role (for example, a strong cherry role) is won during a period other than the lottery game period during the pseudo-bonus state, the right to shift to the AT state at that time with a predetermined probability (for example, 10%) may be given.
In addition, if a rare role (for example, a strong cherry role) is won in a period other than the period of the lottery game in the pseudo-bonus state, instead of granting the right to shift to the AT state, a predetermined probability (for example, 20 %), the right to win a competition lottery for a predetermined number of games (one game or two games) during the lottery game period may be granted at that time.
In this case, when a rare combination is won, it is preferable to execute a winning effect that can be completed in one game on the main display 8 .

Also, if the right to shift to AT state is granted when a rare role is won during a period other than the period of the lottery game during the pseudo-bonus state, in the game during the period of the lottery game, regardless of the competition lottery, all wins are guaranteed. It is preferable to perform a continuous effect such as
In addition, during the lottery game period, a draw lottery is executed separately from the match lottery, and if the match lottery is not won and the draw lottery is won, the match lottery will be invalidated and a new match will be started. A lottery game may be additionally executed during the lottery game period.
Further, when all the competition lotteries in the lottery game period are won, the lottery game period may be extended so that the lottery game period is not terminated until the competition lottery is not won. In this case, if the winning lottery for the extended game is won, the right to continue the AT state may be granted each time.

Further, the button effect may be executed during the battle effect of each game during the period of the lottery game in the pseudo-bonus state.
The button effect as the operation effect is first displayed on the main display 8 (or the sub-display 17) by displaying an image simulating an operation button prompting the user to operate the effect button 2d, or character information (for example, "PUSH") instructing the operation. etc., and after that, when the instructed effect button 2d (or upper effect button 2f) is operated, a series of displaying a predetermined image on the main display 8 (or sub display 17) For example, at the end of a game in which a battle effect is executed, an image imitating an operation button or an operation image is displayed, and after that, when the instructed effect button 2d is operated, it is determined in advance. This is an effect of displaying on the main display 8 an image notifying the result of the competition lottery.
In this case, it is preferable that the probability of executing the button effect is higher when the result of the competition lottery is winning than in the case of non-winning.

・Transition processing from the pseudo-bonus state to the normal game state (arrow b in FIG. 6)
In the pseudo-bonus state, when the right to shift to the AT state is not granted due to the failure of a special condition, i.e., when all the lotteries for each game during the period of the lottery game in the pseudo-bonus state are not won. , after the pseudo-bonus state is completed, the state is shifted to the normal game state.
In the first embodiment, if the competition lottery is not won even once in the game during the lottery game period, the non-establishment of the special condition is confirmed. When the match lottery is not won, the termination condition of the pseudo-bonus state is established, and the game state shifts to the normal game state from the next game.

Therefore, the period during which the pseudo-bonus state lasts changes according to the result of the competition lottery during the period of the lottery game.
For example, if the competition lottery in the 18th game, which is the first game during the lottery game period, is not won, the duration of the pseudo-bonus state will be 18 games, but the 20th game, which is the last game, will remain in the pseudo-bonus state. If it is not won for the first time, the duration will be 20 games.
In addition, since the push order navigation and color navigation are performed even in the game during the lottery game period, even if the special conditions are not finally satisfied in the pseudo-bonus state, the lottery lottery will not be disqualified and the lottery game will be played. As the period continues, the chances of obtaining medals increase, and the player is in an advantageous state accordingly.
In the game during the lottery game period, push order navigation for the push order bell role and color navigation for the color bell role can be executed, but in the game during the lottery game period, push order navigation or color navigation is performed Alternatively, pressing order navigation or color navigation may be performed only at a predetermined probability (for example, 50%).

In addition, at the time of transition from the pseudo-bonus state to the normal game state, under the control of the main control device 10 and the sub-control device 20, setting related information (setting suggestion information) that can suggest the setting value set by the probability setting device 14 Notification means (main display 8, sub-display 17, speaker 9) may be used for notification. For example, a predetermined character out of a plurality of characters is displayed on the main display 8 and the sub display 17, and the displayed character is selected according to the selection probability preset according to each setting value of the probability setting device 14. By making a selection by using the displayed character, it is possible to predict the set value to some extent.

(AT state)
The AT state is a game state in which it is easy to obtain medals by continuously performing push order navigation for the push order bell role for the relevant period as notification of an operation mode advantageous to the player in the game during the AT state. is.
However, unlike the pseudo-bonus state, color navigation for the color bell role is not executed during the AT state, and only push-order navigation is executed, so the amount of medals obtained is less than during the pseudo-bonus state. ing.

During the AT state, the continuation of a predetermined number of games (for example, 30 games) given at the initial transition of the AT state is managed as the remaining number of games for which the AT state can be continued, and the remaining number of games is subtracted for each game. The AT state is continued until the number of remaining games is exhausted.
Then, when the number of remaining games in the AT state is exhausted, the AT state ends.

During the AT state, control information regarding the AT state is transmitted from the main controller 10 to the sub-controller 20, and under the control of the sub-controller 20, images of various effects during the AT state are displayed on the main display 8. display is performed. Also, the number of remaining games during the AT state, the total number of medals obtained during a series of AT states, and the total number of games executed during the AT state are displayed on the main display 8 .

In addition, in the AT state, a continuation lottery process for the AT state is performed in a predetermined number of games (2 to 3 games) to be executed last in the AT state.
In the first embodiment, the continuation lottery process in the AT state is executed over the lottery game period set during the last three games in the AT state at the longest, and is executed in each game during the lottery game period. Whether or not to continue the AT state is determined depending on the results of the competition lottery.
Then, when the result of the competition lottery in each game during the lottery game period is two wins, it is determined that the special condition is established, the continuation of the AT state is decided, and the AT state being executed is ended. A new AT state will start later.
That is, main controller 10 can determine whether or not to give a predetermined benefit (continuation of AT state) in relation to the execution of a plurality of games during a lottery game period as a predetermined period. When the lottery result related to the granting of the predetermined privilege in the above satisfies a predetermined special condition, it is possible to decide to grant the predetermined privilege.

Also, in the new AT state, the continuation of the AT state itself is managed in the same manner as in the initial transition of the AT state, and the AT state ends when a predetermined number of games (for example, 30 times) are executed. However, in the predetermined number of games (2 to 3 games) executed at the end of the new AT state, the AT state continuation lottery process is performed in the same manner as in the initial transition.
Therefore, the AT state is repeatedly executed by establishment of a special condition in the continuation lottery process during each AT state.

Also, the match lottery in each game executed during the lottery game period in the AT state is set such that the probability of winning is not always constant, as in the pseudo-bonus state.
The winning probability of each competition lottery during the lottery game period during the AT state may be the same as during the pseudo-bonus state or may be different. In addition, a plurality of lottery modes for the lottery game period during the AT state may be set, and may be changed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, or may be changed based on the player's operation and selected according to the player's preference. can be

Further, as in the pseudo-bonus state, during the lottery game period in the AT state, the main display is displayed by the control of the sub-controller 20 based on the reception of the control information from the main controller 10 in response to the execution of the game. A continuous performance by the character is executed in the device 8. - 特許庁
As for the continuous performance during the AT state, as in the pseudo-bonus state, the battle performance is completed for each game. Allied characters (including the main character) who fight against the enemy character appear in different types corresponding to the winning probability.

Then, if the battle lottery in each game has been won, the friendly character that has appeared wins at the end of the game, and if the battle lottery has not been won, the friendly character that has appeared An effect such that the player is defeated at the end of the game is completely performed for each game.
However, in the continuation lottery process during the AT state, part of the conditions are set to be different from the transfer lottery process during the pseudo-bonus state. In contrast to the fact that the transition to the AT state is confirmed when all are won, in the AT state, if 2 games are won out of the results of the battle lottery in 3 games Continuation of the next AT state is determined.

Therefore, the AT state continuation condition is less difficult than the transition condition, which is the condition for entering the AT state. Even if the continuation of the next AT state is confirmed and the match lottery in the third game is not won, the continuation of the AT state is finally announced after deriving the result of losing the match effect in the game. and the state is changed to a new AT state.

In addition, in the first embodiment, when all the results of the battle lottery in each game executed during the lottery game period in the AT state are won, the next AT state continuation right is granted. , the continuation right of the AT state is given one after another.
That is, in the competition lottery during the lottery game period during the AT state, when the winning result is derived twice, the right to continue the next AT state is granted as a predetermined privilege, but the winning of the next AT state is granted three times. When the result is derived, the continuation right is stored (stocked) so as to continue the AT state for the subsequent times as the provision of another privilege in addition to the provision of the predetermined privilege.

If the AT state continuation right is stored (stocked), the AT state will continue unconditionally. It is preferable that the main display 8 displays an effect image capable of notifying that the continuation of the game is confirmed without performing the battle effect.

Also, even if the AT state continuation right is stored (stocked), instead of unconditionally fixing the AT state, normal continuation lottery processing is performed in the next AT state, and the special condition is not established. The AT state may be continued by using the stored information of the right to continue the AT state only when it becomes.
Therefore, in this case, the match lottery is also performed in the next game during the period of the lottery game in the AT state. From the next time onwards, the AT state continues with the use suspended.
Furthermore, the AT state continuation right granted by deriving the winning results three times can be stored (stocked) by the main controller 10. For example, when the winning results are derived three times in succession, , two continuation rights may be added and stored.
In this case, each time the AT state is continued using the stored information on the continuation right of the AT state, the stored information on the continuation right is subtracted.

During periods other than the period of the lottery game in the AT state, the main display 8 or the sub-display 17 displays an effect during the AT state in which a predetermined character appears in order to enhance the interest of the game. In the performance during the AT state, for example, an introductory image of each character appearing is displayed, and predetermined music is output from the speaker 9 .

On the other hand, during the lottery game period in the AT state, the background during the battle production and the contents of the battle production will change according to the type of the battle lottery, so that the expectations for the continuation of the AT state will change. It has become.

In the first embodiment, the AT state continuation lottery period is set to the last three games in the AT state. Any number of games may be used as long as the number of games is 4. For example, 4 games or 5 games may be used.
In addition, the special condition, which is the condition for the AT state to continue, is set when the competition lottery in a plurality of games is won twice, but other conditions may be used, for example, by winning once or three times It may decide that the AT state continues.
Also, in the event that the match-up lottery is not won even once during the lottery game period, the lottery game period (AT state) ends at that point. All three games in the game period may be executed. Also, in this case, if no prize is won in the competition lottery for all games, the next AT state may be continued as a special privilege. However, in this case, the condition is that the game that wins the competition lottery with a probability of 100% is not executed.

In addition, the next AT state continuation lottery during the AT state may be executed during a period other than the above-described lottery game period. If a specific replay combination is won in , the AT state may continue unconditionally (100% probability).

In addition, if a rare role (for example, a strong cherry role) is won during a period other than the lottery game period during the AT state, the right to continue the AT state at that time with a predetermined probability (for example, 10%) is granted. You may make it
In addition, when winning a rare role (for example, a strong cherry role) during a period other than the lottery game period during the AT state, instead of granting the right to continue the AT state, a predetermined probability (for example, 20% ), the right to win a competition lottery for a predetermined number of games (one to three games) during the lottery game period may be granted at that time.
In this case, when a rare combination is won, it is preferable to execute a winning effect that can be completed in one game on the main display 8 .
Further, similarly to the pseudo-bonus state, the button effect may be executed during the competition effect of each game during the lottery game period in the AT state.

In addition, when a predetermined rare role (for example, a weak cherry role, a weak watermelon role, a strong watermelon role, and a strong cherry role) is won during the AT state, a lottery for adding the number of games in the AT state is performed. When winning, a predetermined number of games corresponding to the rare combination that triggered the winning may be added (added) to the remaining number of games in the AT state during the execution.

Also, in the AT state, if a specific rare role (for example, a strong cherry role) is won, in addition to the above-mentioned additional lottery, the probability that the number of games will be added for a specific period (for example, 10 games) It may be possible to generate an additional specialized zone that is higher than the state.
The additional specialized zone occurs with a predetermined probability (for example, 10%) when a specific rare role (for example, a strong cherry role) is won, and in the additional specialized zone, rare roles with a low winning probability For example, all the combinations other than the replay combination are used as additional triggers, and the possibility that a large number of games will be given (added) as a predetermined privilege is increased.

In addition, in the special zone for addition, with a predetermined probability (for example, 15%) when a predetermined role (for example, rare role) is won, the right to continue the AT state is granted (stocked). good too. Further, a plurality of rights to continue the AT state may be granted (stocked) each time the above conditions are met.
In this case, in a state where the number of rights (stock number) for continuing the AT state remains, a special condition is unconditionally established in the continuation lottery process during the AT state.

In addition, in the battle lottery during the lottery game period during the AT state, when the winning result is derived three times, in addition to the grant of a predetermined privilege, the next AT state will be continued as the grant of another privilege. However, as another privilege, a predetermined number (for example, 20 times) is added to the number of remaining games in the AT state being executed at that time or the next AT state. The number of games may be added, or as another privilege, the above-mentioned additional special zone may be executed after the AT state being executed at that time ends.

In addition, during the lottery game period during the AT state, a draw lottery is executed separately from the battle lottery, and if the battle lottery is not won and the draw lottery is won, the battle lottery is invalidated. , a game in which a new competition lottery is performed may be additionally executed during the lottery game period.
Further, when all the competition lotteries in the lottery game period are won, the lottery game period may be extended so that the lottery game period is not terminated until the competition lottery is not won. In this case, if the winning lottery for the extended game is won, the right to continue the AT state may be granted each time.

・Transition processing from AT state to pseudo bonus state (arrow i in FIG. 6)
During the AT state, similarly to during the normal game state, the main controller 10 carries out a lottery process for shifting to the pseudo-bonus state in advance based on the winning of a predetermined rare combination as a specific lottery result. Alternatively, transition processing to the pseudo-bonus state is performed at a predetermined probability (for example, 20%) when a strong cherry combination is won.

When the lottery for transition to the pseudo-bonus state in the AT state is won, the AT state being executed is temporarily interrupted and the game state is shifted to the pseudo-bonus state.
Therefore, the number of remaining games in the AT state is suspended at the time of transition to the pseudo-bonus state, and when the AT state is restored again, the AT state is resumed based on the suspended remaining number of games.
Also, if the pseudo-bonus state is entered during the AT state, the pseudo-bonus state will be executed for a predetermined period (for example, 20 games) as described above, and the navigation state will be a state in which only push-order navigation is executed. Then, the state changes to a state in which both the push order navigation and the color navigation are executed, and the number of medals obtained increases accordingly.

However, when the state is shifted to the pseudo-bonus state during the AT state, unlike the case where the state is shifted to the pseudo-bonus state during the normal game state, the lottery process for shifting to the AT state is not performed, and a predetermined number of games are executed. If it is done, the pseudo-bonus state will end and the AT state will be restored.

Even when the state is shifted to the pseudo-bonus state during the AT state, a continuation lottery period similar to that described above may be provided, and an AT state lottery process for increasing the right to continue the AT state may be performed.
In addition, if the lottery for transition to the pseudo-bonus state is won during the AT state, the player is not immediately shifted to the pseudo-bonus state, but for a predetermined period of time (for example, between three games) in the same manner as described above (a battle presentation in which the main character wins). may be shifted to the pseudo-bonus state after executing
Further, even if a predetermined rare role is won during the AT state and the lottery for transition to the pseudo-bonus state is not won, a battle presentation (a battle presentation in which the main character side is defeated) may be executed.

・Transition processing from AT state to normal game state (arrow h in FIG. 6)
In the AT state, if the right to continue to the next AT state is not granted due to the failure of a special condition, that is, in the competition lottery of each game during the lottery game period in the AT state, two winning results are obtained. If not derived, after the end of the AT state, it shifts to the normal game state.
In the first embodiment, in the game during the period of the lottery game, if the match lottery is not won twice, the non-satisfaction of the special condition is confirmed. It is assumed that the condition for terminating the AT state is established at the time when a result of not winning the competition lottery is derived twice in any game, and the game state shifts to the normal game state from the next game.

Therefore, the continuation period of the AT state being executed will change according to the result of the competition lottery during the period of the lottery game.
For example, if the match lottery for the 28th game, which is the first game during the lottery game period, is not won, and the match lottery for the 29th game, which is the second game, is also not won, the AT state is established. The duration is 29 games, but if the competition lottery for the second game is won and the final game, ie, the 30th game, is not won, the duration is 30 games.

In addition, since the pushing order navigation is performed even in the game during the lottery game period, even if the special condition is not finally established in the continuous lottery process in the AT state, the non-winning of the match lottery is not derived twice. The longer the lottery game period lasts, the more chances of obtaining medals, and the more advantageous the player is.
In the game during the lottery game period, the pushing order navigation for the pushing order bell role is performed. , 50%) may be used for push order navigation.

When the AT state is shifted to the normal game state, the winning probability state of the pseudo-bonus state is controlled to be the normal probability state. At this time, the state may be shifted to the high probability state with a predetermined probability for each setting in the probability setting device 14 .
Further, in the case of shifting to the high-probability state after the end of the AT state, there is a possibility that the limit control by the above-described limiting means is performed during the high-probability state, but the limit control is not performed during the high-probability state. If so, the state is shifted to the normal probability state.

At the end of the AT state, an ending state is set for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds). During the ending state (ending period), the progress of the game is temporarily disabled. will be transferred.
During the ending state, under the control of the main controller 10 and the sub-controller 20, setting-related information capable of suggesting the set value set by the probability setting device 14 is notified by the notification means. For example, a predetermined image is displayed by the main display 8 and the sub-display 17 and a predetermined sound is output from the speaker 9 .
As described above, the gaming state is changed in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment.

[Transition of Game State in First Embodiment and Contents Displayed on Main Display]
Next, with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 7, the game state transition realized by the control of the main controller 10 and the sub controller 20 and the display on the main display 8 in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment. Regarding the contents, in particular, the transition of the game state when the game state shifts in the order of normal game state→pseudo-bonus state→AT state and the contents displayed on the main display 8 will be described.
FIG. 7 shows the correspondence between the transition of the game state from the normal game state to the pseudo-bonus state, the transition from the pseudo-bonus state to the AT state, and the changes in the display contents on the main display 8 during that period.
Specifically, under the control of the main controller 10, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state is determined with a predetermined probability (eg, 20%) when a predetermined combination (eg, chance combination) is won in the normal game state, After that, the game state shifts from the normal game state to the pseudo-bonus state as the game progresses, and furthermore, when the AT state transition lottery during the pseudo-bonus state is won and the state shifts to the AT state, it is displayed on the main display 8. It shows the navigation state and the effect content (effect image).
It should be noted that FIG. 7 shows the period after the continuous effect executed in the final stage of the present precursor effect during the normal game state, and the period before that is omitted.

In this embodiment, the main controller 10 performs control related to the lottery of various benefits and changes in various game states (including the time of change), and transmits control information related to the control from the main controller 10 to the sub-controller 20. Then, the sub-controller 20 performs control related to various corresponding displays.
It should be noted that the start point and execution period of effects not directly related to changes in the game state (for example, fake precursor effects, etc.) may be controlled by the sub-controller 20 based on the reception of control information from the main controller 10. , the sub-controller 20 may control itself without receiving control information from the main controller 10 . However, it is necessary to receive control information (for example, winning information for a rare combination) that triggers the effect.

First, as shown in FIG. 7, in the normal game state when the transition to the pseudo-bonus state has not been determined, when the pseudo-bonus state is won along with the winning of the chance combination, the present indication effect is performed as described above. However, in the final game (the second game shown in the figure) of the continuous effect executed in the final stage of this omen effect, an image in which the main character wins or an image informing the transition to a pseudo-bonus state is displayed. It will be displayed on the main display 8 .
It should be noted that the push order navigation and color navigation on the main display 8 are not executed during the normal game state.

Then, from the start of the third game (timing t0), the game state shifts from the normal game state to the pseudo-bonus state.
When the game state shifts to the pseudo-bonus state, the sub-controller 20 activates the push order navigation control and the color navigation control based on the control information from the main control device 10, and one of the push order bell roles is won. In this case, the pressing order navigation corresponding to the winning combination is executed, and if any of the colored bell winning combinations is won, the color navigation corresponding to that winning combination is executed.
Therefore, during the pseudo-bonus state, both push-order navigation and color navigation are executed, and medals can be obtained very easily.
Further, when the gaming state shifts to the pseudo-bonus state, the main control device 10 continuously outputs information to the management device side via the external output terminal 18 to notify that the state has shifted to the pseudo-bonus state.

Then, when the twentieth game is started, the AT state transition lottery period starts as described above, and a continuous effect (competition effect) is executed on the main display 8 as to whether or not to shift to the AT state. .
FIG. 7 exemplifies the case of shifting to the AT state. At the end of the first game, an effect image is displayed on the main display 8 to notify that the game will shift to the AT state.

Then, the game state shifts to the AT state from the start of the 23rd game (timing t4), and the effect image during the AT state is displayed on the main display 8 .
Further, when the game state shifts to the AT state, the sub control device 20 activates only the push order navigation control among the push order navigation and the color navigation based on the control information from the main control device 10, and activates the push order bell role. If any one of them wins the prize, control is performed so that the push order navigation corresponding to that role is executed.

Therefore, the color navigation control activated during the pseudo-bonus state is disabled by the transition to the AT state, and even if one of the color bell roles is won, the color navigation corresponding to that role is executed. Therefore, medals can be obtained easily in the AT state, but the amount of medals obtained is smaller than in the pseudo-bonus state because the color navigation is not performed.
However, since the pseudo-bonus state transition lottery is performed even in the game during the AT state, the next pseudo-bonus state transition lottery is performed while acquiring a certain amount of medals due to the transition of the AT state, and the player's It is possible to raise expectations.
Further, when the game state shifts to the AT state, the main control device 10 continuously outputs information to the management device side via the external output terminal 18 to notify that the game state has shifted to the AT state.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, when the pseudo-bonus state occurs, both the push order navigation and the color navigation are executed during the pseudo-bonus state.
That is, the main controller 10 executes (activates) the push order navigation and the color navigation by the sub-controller 20 as the first stop operation notification means and the second stop operation notification means, thereby making the first stop operation information advantageous to the player. This constitutes a second specific game state control means capable of generating a pseudo bonus state as the second specific game state.

Therefore, the occurrence of the pseudo-bonus state enables the player to acquire a large number of medals, thereby increasing the player's sense of expectation.
Also, in particular, by executing color navigation, it is possible to acquire a larger number of medals during the pseudo-bonus state, but on the other hand, it forces the player to perform an operation that requires a comparatively large amount of effort, namely, the eye-pushing operation aimed at special symbols. However, since the duration of the pseudo-bonus state is more limited than that of the AT state, a larger number of medals can be obtained in such a short period of time that the player does not feel dissatisfied.

Also, when the AT state occurs, only push-order navigation is executed during the AT state, so that the player can obtain a large number of medals, though fewer than during the pseudo-bonus state.
That is, the main control device 10 executes (activates) push-order navigation by the sub-control device 20 as the first stop operation notification means, thereby generating an AT state as a first specific game state advantageous to the player. It constitutes a possible first specific game state control means.

Therefore, the occurrence of the AT state enables the player to acquire a large number of medals, thereby increasing the player's sense of expectation.
Further, since the pressing order navigation does not require the player's effort as compared with the color navigation, even if the AT state continues for a long time, the player can obtain medals without feeling dissatisfied.

Further, during the pseudo-bonus state, the AT state transition lottery process is executed, and if the AT state transition lottery at that time is won, the AT state occurs after the pseudo-bonus state ends. be.
That is, the main controller 10 provides a first specific game state lottery means capable of executing a lottery for generating the AT state as the first specific game state in the game during the pseudo bonus state as the second specific game state. Configure.
Therefore, when the pseudo-bonus state occurs, it is possible not only to obtain a large number of medals, but also to raise expectations for the occurrence of the AT state.
In addition, when winning the lottery in the AT state, the expectation of the next occurrence of the pseudo-bonus state increases while acquiring a certain number of medals, so it is possible to synergistically increase the player's expectation. It becomes.

Further, during the pseudo-bonus state, for example, a continuous effect corresponding to the AT state transition lottery is executed.
That is, the sub control device 20 constitutes an effect control means capable of executing a continuous effect as a predetermined effect in the game during the pseudo-bonus state as the second specific game state.
Therefore, during the pseudo-bonus state, an effect is executed for the transition to the AT state, making it possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Note that the pushing order navigation may be of any kind as long as the player can recognize the pushing order of the reels 4 for establishing the winning pushing order bell combination. Any device can be used as long as it can recognize the type of the colored bell hand and the type of the reel 4 to be highlighted. may be used for notification.
Also, both the push order navigation and the color navigation are executed during the pseudo-bonus state, and only the push order navigation is executed during the AT state. For example, only color navigation may be performed during the pseudo-bonus state, and only push-order navigation may be performed during the AT state, or both push-order navigation and color navigation may be performed during the AT state, and the pseudo-bonus state is executed. Only the push order navigation may be executed during the operation.

Further, the main controller 10 may be provided with a function for generating a plurality of types of pseudo-bonus states.
Random numbers Any pseudo-bonus state may be selectively generated based on the result of the lottery.

Also, a first pseudo-bonus state in which only the push-order navigation is activated and a second pseudo-bonus state in which both the push-order navigation and the color-navigation are activated may be selectively generated in the same manner as described above. .
Furthermore, the AT state is changed so that the probability of shifting to the AT state differs between the first pseudo-bonus state in which only the push-order navigation is activated and the second pseudo-bonus state in which both the push-order navigation and the color navigation are activated. A state transition lottery may be performed. For example, the probability of shifting to the AT state is made higher when the second pseudo-bonus state occurs than when the first pseudo-bonus state occurs.
In this way, a pseudo-bonus state is generated in which the player's expectations for the amount of medals to be obtained and the transition of the AT state are different, thereby making it possible to further improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when the limiter function is provided in the above-mentioned advantageous section, it is determined in advance that the limiter will be reached during the AT state, and based on the result of the determination, the main display 8 executes a predetermined ending effect. The sub-controller 20 may be provided with the effect control means.
The ending effect is to display a effect image that is executed only when the limiter is reached, unlike the normal AT state effect image, and is an effect that enhances the player's sense of accomplishment.

At this time, the advance determination of the limiter based on the number of medals obtained is preferably based on the number of medals that can be obtained by winning the bell role in the push order. When the number of medals that can be obtained when the order bell is won reaches the limiter value, it is preferable to execute the preliminary determination of the limiter (determine the start of the ending effect).
This is because there is a possibility of a pseudo-bonus state in which color navigation is executed during the AT state. If a pseudo-bonus state does not occur in , a situation such as the limiter not being reached despite the execution of the ending effect will occur, but in order to prevent such a situation is.

Therefore, when the ending effect is executed, it is possible to surely reach the limiter, and the prior determination is made based on the bell combination with the relatively few medals won, so that the ending effect is performed. The execution period can be lengthened, and the player's sense of accomplishment can be enhanced.

In addition, in a game in which navigation is performed in either the AT state or the pseudo-bonus state in which the ending effect is being performed, if a stop operation mode different from the navigation that was performed is performed (if a prize is lost). Then, similarly to the end of the pseudo-bonus state described above, setting-related information (setting suggestion information) capable of suggesting the setting value set by the probability setting device 14 is provided by the reporting means (main display 8, sub-display 17, A speaker 9) may be used to notify.
In this way, when the ending effect is performed, it is possible to provide the player with another privilege such as providing useful information, and it is possible to increase the player's willingness to play. be.
Also, in this case, the number of notification of the setting-related information may be restricted to only one time, or when a plurality of times (for example, three times) of winnings are missed, the setting-related information may be notified.

In addition, when the color bell combination is won, one of four pressing orders other than the pressing order for stopping the left reel 4a first (for example, "5b→5a→5c", "5c→5b→5a", etc.). By operating the stop buttons 5a to 5c in the correct order of pressing (special order of pressing), a predetermined symbol combination (for example, "replay bell A, bell A") is stopped on the active line in the middle row. A predetermined number (for example, three) of medals may be paid out by stopping the combination of symbols.

For example, if the pressing order of "5b→5a→5c" is executed when winning the color bell role 1 with the winning symbol combination of "blank, bell A, bell A", "BAR, bell A, bell A" is executed. When winning the colored bell combination 2 with the winning symbol combination of ``5b→5c→5a'', if the pressing order of ``5b→5c→5a'' is executed, the colored bell role with the winning symbol combination of ``red 7A, bell A, and bell A'' If the pressing order of "5c→5a→5b" is executed when winning 3, "5c→5b→5a" when winning color bell combination 4 with "white 7, bell A, bell A" as the winning symbol combination. , three medals may be paid out each time the pressing order of "" is executed.

Then, the main controller 10 and the sub-controller 20 execute a special pressing order navigation for navigating a special pressing order in which three medals are paid out when one of the colored bell hands is won during the AT state. can be
In this way, even if the color bell is won during the AT state in which the color navigation is not executed, the special pressing order navigation is executed, and the medals to the extent that the current medal holding is maintained can be obtained, and the AT. By frequently winning the colored bell combination during the state, it is possible to prevent the number of medals acquired by the player from becoming small.
In addition, since it is possible to prevent the formation of a color bell combination (15-card combination) on the condition that the left reel 4a is stopped first, it is possible to prevent the amount of medals obtained during the AT state from becoming extremely large. It is possible to stabilize the amount of medals earned.

In the above case, it is preferable to execute the display mode of the special push-order navigation during the AT state in the same manner as the push-order navigation. , even when the special pressing order navigation is executed, it is possible to execute the navigation without any sense of incongruity.

Also, during the pseudo-bonus state, both push order navigation and color navigation are executed. It may be so arranged that only the push order navigation is executed in subsequent games.
Further, when the pseudo-bonus state is executed, the number of games in which both the push-order navigation and the color navigation are executed and the number of games in which only the push-order navigation is executed are determined, and the number of games in which the mode of navigation changes is determined. You may make it differ.

In addition, the main controller 10 and the sub-controller 20 are provided with relief means for specially executing the other navigation until the first navigation is executed at the start of a specific game state in which only one navigation is executed. You may do so.
For example, when the AT state in which only push-order navigation is executed is started, color-navigation is executed if the color-navigation role is won in the game until the first push-order navigation is executed.
In this way, it is possible to prevent the player from being forced to lend out the medals again due to the fact that the player cannot obtain the medals at the initial stage despite the occurrence of the specific game state and runs out of the medals on hand.

Further, the display modes of the push order navigation and the color navigation executed on the main display 8 may be clearly different.
For example, when the push order navigation is executed, an image indicating the push order is displayed at the bottom of the screen of the main display 8. An image showing a special pattern may be displayed in the part, or when executing the push order navigation, an image of a prescribed size showing the push order may be displayed in a prescribed part of the screen of the main display 8. When performing color navigation, an image showing a special pattern larger than the image showing the pressing order may be displayed on a predetermined portion of the screen of the main display 8 .
In this way, it is possible to prevent erroneous operations by the player, and in particular, even in the pseudo-bonus state, in which erroneous operations are more likely to occur due to the mixture of push-order navigation and color navigation, erroneous operations by the player are prevented. It becomes possible to do.

In addition, in a predetermined game in the AT state, if any of the push order bell combinations 1 to 6 is won, the player is allowed to select the push order at that time without executing the push order navigation. A guessing game may be executed.
In this case, in the pushing order guessing game, when the pushing order corresponding to the winning pushing order bell combination is operated, a prescribed number of games (for example, 10 games) may be added as a prescribed privilege. .

Further, in a predetermined game in which the winning bell role or the colored bell role is won in the pseudo-bonus state, a game is executed in which the player selects the winning bell role without executing the navigation, and the winning bell role is played. A predetermined benefit may be given when the player wins.
In this case, since the player does not know whether he has won the push-order bell role or the colored bell role, the options are further expanded, and the interest can be enhanced accordingly. .

In addition, in the present embodiment, when it is notified that the state will shift to the pseudo-bonus state, the state is immediately shifted to the pseudo-bonus state in the next game. Later, as a predetermined winning combination, for example, when a reel 4 other than the left reel 4a is stopped, a predetermined symbol combination mode (for example, "red 7A, red 7A, red 7A") is won. may be used as a trigger to shift to the pseudo-bonus state.

In this case, since there is a possibility that the player's medals will decrease during the preparation period from when the transition to the pseudo-bonus state is announced until the predetermined combination is won, there is a possibility that the decrease in medals is suppressed. A compensation function may be provided.
For example, if only the stop order of the first reel 4 is correct for the push-order bell role and the winning of the push-order bell role is missed, the push-order navigation is executed so as to facilitate the acquisition of medals in the next game. Alternatively, navigation may be limited to the next game after the so-called thimble bonus has stopped.
By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied.
The slot machine 1 in the first embodiment is configured as described above.

[Modification 1 of the first embodiment]
Next, Modification 1 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
In the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, the duration of the pseudo-bonus state is defined by a preset number of games (for example, 20 games). , the duration of the pseudo-bonus state is defined by the number of executions of color navigation.
Therefore, only the definition of the duration of the pseudo-bonus state is different from the above-described first embodiment, and the rest of the configuration is the same as that of the above-described first embodiment.

That is, when the pseudo-bonus state occurs, main controller 10 determines in advance the upper limit number of times of color navigation that will end the pseudo-bonus state, and the actual color navigation is performed for the determined upper limit number of color navigations. is executed, the pseudo-bonus state is terminated.
Therefore, the duration of the pseudo-bonus state changes depending on the winning state of the randomly drawn colored bell combination.
In addition, since the number of executions of push-order navigation is irrelevant to the duration of the pseudo-bonus state, if the number of executions of color navigation does not reach the upper limit and the duration of the pseudo-bonus state is prolonged, push-order navigation is more likely to be executed, and the period to earn medals will be extended accordingly.

Further, main controller 10 sets the upper limit number of times of color navigation during the pseudo-bonus state to any one of a plurality of preset upper-limit numbers (5, 10, 15) when the pseudo-bonus state occurs. or one is determined, and the duration of the pseudo-bonus state is changed according to the determined upper limit number of times.
The upper limit number of times of color navigation may be determined in any way. The upper limit number of times may be determined based on a predetermined random number lottery when the game is first started. In addition, depending on the set value of the probability setting device 14, the content of determination of the upper limit number of times of color navigation may be changed.

FIG. 8 shows effect images on the main display 8 at the start of the first game in which the pseudo-bonus state starts, during game execution, and after the game ends.
As described above, the main controller 10 determines the upper limit number of times of color navigation when the pseudo-bonus state occurs. Based on the information, a selection effect is executed on the main display 8 as a predetermined effect corresponding to the determination of the upper limit number of times of color navigation.

As shown in FIG. 8(a), when the first game in the pseudo-bonus state is started, the main portion of the screen of the main display 8 displays "color navigation x 5" corresponding to the maximum number of times of color navigation of 5 times. A first color navigation selection image 31a containing character information, a second color navigation selection image 31b containing character information of "color navigation x 10" corresponding to the upper limit number of color navigation of 10 times, and an upper limit number of color navigation. A third color navigation selection image 31c including character information of "color navigation x 15" corresponding to 15 times is displayed side by side in a substantially triangular shape.

In addition, on the upper part of the screen of the main display 8, a game content image 30 consisting of character information of "color navigation acquisition game" is displayed to notify that the selection effect of the maximum number of times of color navigation will be executed.
Also, although illustration is omitted, when one of the bell roles is won in the first game in the pseudo-bonus state, the corresponding navigation is displayed on the main display 8 in parallel with the selection effect.
Note that in the first game in the pseudo-bonus state, no navigation may be executed so as not to hinder the visibility of the selection effect.

During the execution of the first game, the surrounding frames of the selected images are sequentially light-emitting and moved at high speed, and at the end of the game, the high-speed light-emitting movement of the surrounding frames of the selected images is determined in advance by the main controller 10. It stops at the position of the selected image corresponding to the upper limit number of times of color navigation, and the determination result of the upper limit number of times of color navigation is notified.
Note that FIG. 8 illustrates a case where 10 times is determined as the upper limit number of times of color navigation, so the high-speed light emission movement of the enclosing frame stops at the position of the second color navigation selection image 31b. .

FIG. 8(b) shows an effect image on the main display 8 when the first game in the pseudo-bonus state is finished.
As shown in FIG. 8(b), when 10 times is determined as the upper limit number of times of color navigation, only the second color navigation selection image 31b is displayed substantially in the center of the screen after the high-speed light emission movement of the surrounding frame is stopped. Then, the upper limit number of times of color navigation for this time is notified.
Then, after a predetermined time (for example, two seconds) has passed since the end of the first game, as shown in FIG. It is displayed in the approximate center of the screen of the device 8 to inform in detail that the upper limit number of times of the current color navigation is 10 times.

When the next game is started in this state, the result notification image 32 is erased and the effect image during the pseudo-bonus state and various navigation are executed, and the determined remaining number of color navigation is displayed in a predetermined portion of the screen. will be displayed.

As described above, in the first modification of the first embodiment, when the pseudo-bonus state occurs, the upper limit number of times of color navigation that can be performed during the pseudo-bonus state is determined, and the pseudo-bonus state continues for the upper limit number of times. It will be done.
That is, when the main control device 10 as the second specific game state control means generates the pseudo bonus state as the second specific game state, the main control device 10 as the second stop operation notification means is color navigation (second 2 stop operation mode) can be determined, and the pseudo-bonus state can be terminated when the game corresponding to the upper-limit number of times is executed in the pseudo-bonus state.
Therefore, the number of games that can be continued in the pseudo-bonus state is not fixed, but variously changes, and various execution modes of the pseudo-bonus state are formed, making it possible to generate a highly interesting pseudo-bonus state. be.

In addition, the duration of the pseudo-bonus state is defined only by the number of executions of color navigation, and the number of executions of push-order navigation does not affect the duration, so the number of executions of color navigation does not increase during the pseudo-bonus state. If the game progresses during this time, there is a possibility that push-order navigation will be executed during that time, and the number of medals acquired during the pseudo-bonus state will increase accordingly, and medals will be awarded according to the manner in which navigation is executed. Thus, it is possible to execute a highly entertaining game that changes the player's expectations, such that the number of winnings changes.

Further, the sub-control device 20 as the effect control means executes the selection effect as a predetermined effect in the game during the pseudo-bonus state as the second specific game state. It is possible to increase
It should be noted that the duration of the pseudo-bonus state may be defined only by the number of executions of push-order navigation.
As described above, Modification 1 of the first embodiment is realized.

[Modification 2 of the first embodiment]
Next, Modification 2 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
In the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above, the duration of the AT state is defined by a preset number of games (for example, 30 games). The continuation period of the AT state is defined by the number of medals (net increase) obtained by the player during the AT state.

Furthermore, in the modification 2 of the first embodiment, the navigation state is also different from that of the first embodiment. It is possible to generate a type 1 navigation state in which only push order navigation is executed (activated) and a type 2 navigation state in which both push order navigation and color navigation are executed (activated) during the AT state. The configuration of is the same as that of the above-described first embodiment.

Therefore, when the type 1 navigation state is executed during the AT state, only the push order navigation is executed, and when the color bell role is won, the color navigation is not executed, and the increase in medals per unit game is relative. If type 2 navigation is executed during the AT state, both push order navigation and color navigation will be executed, and the increase in medals per unit game will be relatively large. It becomes.
However, in the modification 2 of the first embodiment, the condition for ending the AT state is set when the number of medals obtained by the player during the AT state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 200) as described above. Therefore, even if the amount of increase in medals per unit time is different, the number of medals obtained by the player for one occurrence of the AT state is the same.

Further, the type of navigation state in the AT state can be selected by the player, and as a predetermined operating means, for example, based on the operation of the bet button 2a by the player, the main controller 10 can select any type. I am trying to decide.

FIG. 9 shows an effect image on the main display 8 at the start of the first game when the AT state starts and during game execution.
As described above, the main controller 10 determines the type of navigation state when the AT state occurs. A selection effect corresponding to the determination of the type is executed on the main display 8. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 9(a), when the first game in the AT state is started, the main portion of the screen of the main display 8 displays "Type 1, push order navigation" for selecting the type 1 of the navigation state. and a second operation selection image 34b including text information of "Type 2, push order navigation + color navigation" for selecting and operating the type 2 navigation state. , are displayed side by side.

Also, on the upper right side of the screen of the main display 8, a remaining number of medals image 33 that informs the number of medals that can be obtained during the AT state is displayed.
In the first game during the AT state, numerical information of the initial number of medals "200" is displayed as the remaining medal number image 33, and each time medals are obtained during the AT state, a numerical value corresponding to the number of obtained medals is displayed. information will be subtracted.
In addition, at the bottom of the screen of the main display 8, a game selection instruction image 35a consisting of character information of "select game type" is displayed to prompt selection of the type of navigation state (game) in the AT state. .

Also, although illustration is omitted, when the winning of the push order bell combination is won in the first game in the AT state, the corresponding push order navigation is displayed on the main display 8 in parallel with the selection effect. However, as far as the first game in the AT state is concerned, it is preferable not to execute the color navigation when the color bell combination is won even if the type 2 is selected thereafter.
In the first game in the pseudo-bonus state, no navigation may be executed.

Then, during execution of the first game, the surrounding frame of the first operation selection image 34a emits light as an initial state, and the player is notified that the first operation selection image 34a is valid at that time. By alternately switching operation selection images that emit light each time the bet button 2a is operated, the player can select the type of navigation state desired by the player.
After that, when the game is ended (the last reel 4 is stopped) in a state in which the operation selection image corresponding to the type of navigation state desired by the player is illuminated, the navigation corresponding to the illuminated operation selection image is displayed. A state type will be selected.

Note that FIG. 9 illustrates the case where the type 1 navigation state is selected, so after the game ends, only the first operation selection image 34a is displayed in the substantially central portion of the screen, as shown in FIG. 9B. , and the type of navigation state selected this time is notified.
In addition, after the game is over, a game selection result image 35b consisting of text information of "Determine game type 1" is displayed at the bottom of the screen to notify that type 1 of the navigation state has been selected this time. Become.

When the next game is started in this state, the first operation selection image 34a and the game selection result image 35b are erased, and either the effect image in the AT state or the selected navigation is executed, and medals are awarded. The number of remaining medals image 33 is subtracted and displayed according to the acquisition of .

As described above, in the second modification of the first embodiment, when an AT state occurs, the type of navigation state to be executed during the AT state is determined by the player's selection, and the selected type determines the AT state. The state will be executed.
That is, in the slot machine 1 of Modification 2 of the first embodiment, when the AT state as the first specific game state occurs, in addition to activating the push order navigation (first stop operation notification means), It is to provide a selection means with which the player can select whether to activate the navigation (second stop operation notification means).
As a result, for example, when the type 1 navigation state is selected, the amount of medals acquired per unit game is reduced, but an AT state occurs in which the duration is longer, and the type 2 navigation state is generated. When the navigation state is selected, an AT state is generated in which the continuation period is shortened, but the amount of medals obtained per unit game is increased.

Therefore, it is possible to generate an AT state according to the taste of the player, thereby enhancing the satisfaction of the player.
In addition, depending on the navigation state of the AT state selected, the manner in which medals are obtained and the period during which medals are earned during the AT state will change in various ways, making it possible to improve the interest in the game by executing a wider variety of game modes. It becomes.

It should be noted that the slot machine 1 of Modification 2 may be provided with the functions of Modification 1 of the first embodiment described above.
For example, the duration of the pseudo-bonus state may be defined by the number of executions of color navigation, and the type of navigation state may be selectable when the AT state occurs.

Further, the main control device 10 may be provided with a periodical privilege granting means for executing a game capable of periodically granting a privilege according to the progress of the game in the AT state. For example, a lottery may be performed to add a predetermined number of games to the number of remaining games in the AT state every 20 games.
In this way, when Type 1 is selected, many medals cannot be obtained in a short period of time, but the duration of the AT state is relatively long, so more chances of additional lottery can be obtained. , it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the addition of the number of games.

On the other hand, when type 2 is selected, the duration of the AT state is relatively short, and the opportunity for additional lottery is reduced. It is possible to increase
Therefore, both types have merits and demerits, and the game contents are worthy of selection by the player.
As described above, Modification 2 of the first embodiment is realized.

<Second embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment of the invention will be described.
The slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment of the present invention differs from the above-described first embodiment only in part in the configuration and control of the slot machine 1, and the rest is the same as in the first embodiment. Only the points different from the above-described first embodiment will be described below.

First, in the slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the types of symbols on the reels 4 are different from those of the above-described first embodiment. , and the types of symbols are, for example, "replay", "watermelon", "cherry", "bell", "BAR", "7" and the like.
The symbols "replay" and "bell" are arranged on the respective reels 4a to 4c in such a way that they do not need to be pressed, and the symbols "cherry", "watermelon", "BAR" and "7" are placed on predetermined reels 4. It is arranged so that it is necessary to press the eyes.
Incidentally, the reels 4 requiring spot pressing in the symbols "cherry", "watermelon", "BAR", and "7" may be all the reels 4 or some of the reels 4 may be.
The form of the reel 4 is not limited to this, and for example, the number of patterns on the peripheral surface may be other than 20.

The combination of the winning combination in the second embodiment includes a small winning combination, a replay winning combination, and a bonus winning combination, and the small winning combination includes a push order bell combination, a watermelon combination, and a cherry combination.
As in the first embodiment, one of six push orders (for example, "5a→5b→5c", "5c→5b→5a", etc.) is selected for the push order bell role. By operating the stop buttons 5a to 5c according to (specific pressing order), the corresponding combination of symbols ("bell, bell, bell") is stop-displayed on the activated line. Six pressing order bell combinations 1 6 are provided.

Incidentally, when winning the push-order bell combination, regardless of whether the stop button 5 is operated second or third, if only the stop button 5 operated first follows a specific push order, it corresponds to the push-order bell combination. The stop control of the reels 4 may be performed so as to stop the combination of symbols. Further, the number of pushing order bells is not limited to six, and three pushing order bells 1 to 3 may be provided.
Further, unlike the above-described first embodiment, the second embodiment does not have a colored bell hand. You may make it provide.

As for the watermelon role and the cherry role, strong/weak watermelon roles and strong/weak cherry roles are provided as in the first embodiment, and the winning symbol combinations are the same as those described above.
As for the replay combination, a normal replay combination and a chance replay combination (chance combination) are provided in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above, and the winning symbol combinations are the same.
It should be noted that the benefits (the number of medals, etc.) given when the small winning combination and the replay winning combination are won are the same as in the first embodiment.

The bonus combination is a combination that shifts the game state to a bonus state described later by winning a prize, and when the bonus combination is won, the reels 4 are controlled to stop so as to allow the symbol combination of "7, 7, 7" on the activated line. is performed, and when the symbol combination of "7, 7, 7" stops on the activated line and a bonus combination is won, the game state shifts to the bonus state.
It should be noted that, unlike the start of the pseudo-bonus state that accompanies the winning of a predetermined role, no game value such as the payout of medals is given when the bonus role is won, and the right to win the bonus role is retained until the bonus role is won. maintained.

[Game flow in the gaming machine of the second embodiment]
Next, the game flow of the slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a game state in the slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment.
The main control device 10 and the sub-control device 20 can control the slot machine 1 in a plurality of game states, various processes in each game state, control of transition between game states (hereinafter simply referred to as "transition"), etc. is performed as follows.

As shown in FIG. 10, the game of the slot machine 1 of the second embodiment consists of a plurality of game states such as a normal game state, a bonus state, and an AT state. The main control device 10 and the sub-control device 20 are controllable so as to shift from one game state to another game state based on establishment of a predetermined transition condition.

Below, each game state (normal game state, bonus state, AT state) executed under the control of the main control device 10 and the sub-control device 20, transition processing between game states, and various effects generated along with the transition processing etc. will be described in detail for each game state.

Hereinafter, unless otherwise specified, the point of transition from each game state to another game state is basically after the third reel stop operation of the game in which the transition condition is established (or after the payout of medals is completed). is. However, it is not limited to this, and the next game may be shifted after the transition condition is met.

(Normal game state)
The normal game state is a game state in which the main controller 10 of the slot machine 1 stays when it is reset, and is a disadvantageous state for the player.
As shown in FIG. 10, the main controller 10 performs lottery processing for transition to the bonus state and the AT state while staying in the normal game state. Depending on the specification of the slot machine 1 or the like, the normal game state may not be directly shifted to the AT state.

During the normal game state, as in the first embodiment, based on the lottery result of the winning combination, etc., the main display 8 or the sub-display 17 displays an individual effect including a winning effect that is completed in one game with a predetermined probability. executed.

In addition, in the normal game state, there are a normal probability state and a high probability state in which winning probability states for the AT state are different. The probability of winning the lottery to transition to the AT state is higher in the high probability state than in the normal probability state. , control is performed to shift from the normal probability state to the high probability state. On the other hand, as a predetermined fall condition, for example, control is performed to shift from the high probability state to the normal probability state with a probability of 5% when the replay combination is won, when the push-order bell combination is won, and when the combination is lost.
In addition, in response to the change of the probability state, stage change processing is performed in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above, and a part of the high probability state is changed to a stage suggesting the high probability state.

・Transition processing from normal game state to bonus state (arrow a in FIG. 10)
In the normal game state, a bonus state (privilege) can be provided as a special game state based on the fact that the main control device 10 determines whether or not to grant a privilege becomes a predetermined special determination result. and

More specifically, the main controller 10 performs stop control to allow a special symbol combination ("7.7.7") on the reels 4 based on the winning of the bonus combination as a special lottery result, and the player When a special combination of symbols is led to the reel 4 based on the operation of (1), it is determined that a special condition is established, and the game state is shifted to a bonus state as a special game state advantageous to the player.
Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, the pseudo-bonus state can be generated. ) can be generated.

Also in the second embodiment, a pseudo-bonus state may be generated in addition to the bonus state.
Also, the bonus role may be won simultaneously with the winning of a predetermined rare role (for example, a strong cherry role) (double winning), or may be won independently of other roles. , both winning patterns of double winning and single winning may be provided.
In addition, since the bonus combination gives the player an opportunity to win a large number of medals, it is possible to set the winning probability lower than that of the minor combination and the replay combination (for example, set the probability to about 1/250). preferable.
Also, the probability of winning a bonus combination may be changed in a plurality of stages according to the setting value of the probability setting device 14. FIG.

In addition, when a bonus combination is won in the normal game state, a continuous effect over a predetermined number of games that is executed immediately before the transition to the pseudo-bonus state of the first embodiment is executed on the main display 8, for example. , to increase the player's expectations.
Then, when the continuous performance is executed, a performance image in which the main character wins as a result of the battle performance is displayed, and an image is displayed to inform the player that the bonus role has finally been won. The main display 8 displays an image prompting the user to stop the special symbol combination.
However, since it is possible to derive a special symbol combination even in the game during the continuous effect, if the special symbol combination is derived in the game during the continuous effect, the continuous effect will end at that point. Become.

Further, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, even in a game in which a bonus combination has not been won, an effect similar to the continuous effect is executed on the main display 8. For example, a bonus combination and a predetermined rare combination can be simultaneously won. In this case, when a predetermined rare combination that has not been won as a bonus combination is won, a continuous effect is executed in which the main character is finally defeated.

・Transition processing from normal game state to AT state (arrow c in FIG. 10)
In the normal game state, the main controller 10 performs a lottery process for shifting to the AT state as a specific game state based on the winning of a predetermined rare combination. For example, when a strong cherry combination is won, the transition processing to the AT state is performed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1%). The condition for transitioning to the AT state is winning the transition lottery.
In addition, in the game in the high probability state, control is performed to increase the lottery probability of transition to the AT state. ) to perform transition processing to the AT state.
In addition, the transition to the AT state in the normal game state is performed on the condition that a predetermined rare combination is won, and a predetermined probability ( For example, 1%) may be used.

In the second embodiment, the transition to the AT state is executed mainly via the bonus state in order to increase the player's sense of expectation. The probability of transitioning to the state is set to a very low probability.
In addition, depending on the set probability in the probability setting device 14, it may be possible to change the probability of directly shifting from the normal game state to the AT state, or only in the case of relatively high set values (for example, setting 4 to 6) It may be possible to win a lottery for transition from the normal game state directly to the AT state.

In addition, in the normal game state, when the lottery for transition to the AT state is won, an indication effect (including continuous effect) is executed after the waiting period has elapsed, as in the case of the occurrence of the pseudo-bonus state in the first embodiment. , the AT state is generated after the end of the sign effect.
Further, when a predetermined rare combination (for example, a strong cherry combination) is won and the AT state is not won, the same fake precursor effect as when the pseudo-bonus state of the first embodiment occurs is executed. It's becoming

In addition, when winning the lottery for transition from the normal game state directly to the AT state, it is possible to immediately execute the continuous performance without executing the sign performance, and to shift to the AT state after the continuous performance is executed. good.
Also, as in the case of transition to the pseudo-bonus state in the first embodiment, a CZ state that allows transition to the AT state may be provided.

(bonus state)
The bonus state, which is a special game state, is a state in which the main control device 10 controls the lottery for a winning combination more favorably to the player than in the normal game state.
That is, in the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, a pseudo-bonus state is generated as a state advantageous to the player. A bonus state, which is a bonus, is generated.

In the bonus state, the game continues until a predetermined number of games (for example, 40 times) are executed, during which the lottery control for the role is changed. I try to raise it higher than the game inside.
Also in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the main control device as the specific stop control means, when any one of the pushing order bell combinations 1 to 6 is won, Only when the stop operation is performed according to the pressing order (specific stop mode) corresponding to the bell combination, stop control is performed such that the corresponding pressing order bell combination wins.

Control advantageous to the player during the bonus state may be other than the above. For example, the probability of winning a predetermined rare role may be made higher than in the game during the normal game state, or a replay role may be won. By setting the probability to be lower than that of the game in the normal game state, the chances of winning the winning combination of the order of pressing the bell may be increased accordingly. Also, the winning probability of the bell combination in the order of pressing may not be increased.

Also, the number of medals to be paid out in the event that the bell combination of the pressing order is won may be set differently between the bonus state and the other game states.
For example, six medals are paid out if the push-order bell role is won during the normal game state, but 15 medals are paid out if the push-order bell role is won during the bonus state. can be

During the bonus state, based on the control information from the main controller 10, the sub-controller 20 serving as specific operation notification means performs push-order navigation for the above-described push-order bell combination as notification of an operation mode advantageous to the player. By executing this, a medal can be obtained easily.
However, the push order navigation is not executed during the entire period of the bonus state, and the push order navigation is executed in the first half of the bonus state in which a predetermined number of games (for example, 20 times) are executed as the first period. After that, the push order navigation is disabled during a predetermined number of games (for example, 20 times) in the latter half of the second period.

Therefore, in the game from the start of the bonus state to the execution of a predetermined number of games, if any of the bell combinations 1 to 6 of the push order bell combination is won, the winning combination of the bell combination of the push order corresponds to the winning combination. In the game after the specified number of push order navigation is executed after the specific push order is reported and the predetermined number of games are executed, even if any of the push order bell roles 1 to 6 is won, the winning push order bell role is played. The corresponding specific pressing order is not notified and the pressing order navigation is not executed.

Further, in the second half of the bonus state, the AT state transition lottery process is performed by the main controller 10 in an advantageous manner for the player, and the AT state is won with a predetermined probability (for example, 5%) for each game. control is performed.
It should be noted that the winning probability of the AT state may be any as long as it is advantageous for the player to shift to the AT state. is preferably a high value.

Also, in the game during the bonus state, if a rare combination is won, the AT state may be won with a higher probability than if other combinations (for example, a push-order bell combination) are won. For example, when winning a strong cherry combination, control may be performed so that the AT state is won with a probability of 25%.
Further, the lottery for shifting to the AT state may not be performed during the normal game state, and may be performed only during the bonus state.
Also, in the first half of the bonus state, the AT state transition lottery may be performed with a lower probability (for example, 1%) than in the second half, or the AT state transition lottery may not be performed in the first half. .

Then, as will be described later, when the AT state shift lottery in the bonus state is won, the game state shifts to the AT state after the bonus state ends. Various productions based on the AT state transition lottery are executed on the main display 8, for example, by the sub control device 20 as.
When the bonus state is generated, the lamp 11 emits light in a predetermined manner to notify that the bonus state is in effect, and the speaker 9 outputs a predetermined sound effect to notify that the bonus state is in effect.

First, in the first half of the bonus state, as an effect during the bonus state, for example, an effect image that introduces the characters that appear is displayed, and if the role of the push order bell is won, the push order navigation is displayed on the main display 8. is executed in
Then, when shifting to the second half of the bonus state, the main display 8 executes an effect during the high-probability state for informing the player that the lottery for transition to the AT state is being performed with a high probability.
For example, an effect image in which the main character and the enemy character face each other is displayed as a preliminary effect of the battle effect to be executed later, so as to heighten the expectation of the player.
Further, when the transition to the second half of the bonus state occurs, the light emission mode of the lamp 11 is changed from the light emission mode of the bonus state to the light emission mode for notifying that the high probability state is in progress, and the sound effect from the speaker 9 is also the sound effect sound of the bonus state. Changed to a sound effect during high probability state.

In addition, in the pre-production, which is the production during the high-probability state, an expectation-increasing production is executed. By changing to a higher stage among the images set in the stages, it is notified that the main character wins in the subsequent fighting performance, that is, the possibility of shifting to the AT state increases.
The expectation-increasing effect is executed with a predetermined probability for each game, and when the AT state transition lottery is won, it is executed with a higher probability than when the lottery is not won, and the image of the main character is actually displayed. When the mode changes to a higher stage, the probability of shifting to the AT state increases.

In addition, during several games (for example, between three games) before the end of the bonus state, which is the final stage of the second half of the bonus state, a continuous effect is performed in the same manner as during the premonitory effect of the pseudo-bonus state in the first embodiment described above. executed.
The continuous effect (competition effect) executed at the end of the second half of the bonus state is executed based on the result of the AT state transition lottery that has already been executed, and if the AT state transition lottery is won, In the battle production, it is reported that the main character finally wins and shifts to the AT state, and if the AT state transition lottery is not won, the main character is finally defeated in the battle production and AT. It will be notified that the state will not be changed.

Therefore, the bonus state is executed for a preset period (for example, 40 games) regardless of whether or not the AT state transition lottery executed during the bonus state is won, and when shifting to the AT state. However, we will have to wait until this period has passed before moving on.

Further, when the gaming state is shifted to the bonus state, information indicating the bonus state is output from the external output terminal 18 .
However, even if the player enters the bonus state, the period during which the player can obtain a large number of medals is only the first half of the execution of the push order navigation. It will end with the end of the first half of.

Therefore, on the amusement arcade side, a calling device (not shown) of the island facility notifies that the slot machine 1 is in the bonus state by means of a lamp, an image display device, or the like based on the output of the information indicating the bonus state. Even in this case, the notification ends when the bonus state shifts to the second half, and the notification is switched to the same notification as during the normal game state.

In the second embodiment, in the latter half of the bonus state, the main display 8 displays the effect image in which the main character and the enemy character face each other. An image similar to the suggested image (stage) may be displayed.
That is, in the second half of the bonus state, since the push order navigation is not executed, the state of obtaining medals is substantially the same as during the normal game state. Alternatively, the player may be notified accurately in accordance with the state of winning medals.

In the slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, similarly to the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, a color bell combination is provided, and color navigation corresponding to the color bell combination is executed in the first half of the bonus state. Alternatively, both push order navigation and color navigation may be executed in the first half of the bonus state, and only push order navigation may be executed in the latter half.

・Transition processing from bonus state to AT state (arrow e in FIG. 10)
The bonus state ends when a predetermined end condition is satisfied.
The condition for ending the bonus state may be any condition. For example, it may be the case that the number of medals paid out during the bonus state exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 100) or the number of games played during the bonus state exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 100). , 40 times). Also, if the player is not notified in advance of the fulfillment of the conditions for ending the bonus state without informing the number of medals to be paid out or the number of games during the bonus state, the bonus state can be achieved. Since the number of games in the continuous performance executed at the end of the state cannot be recognized in advance, it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation.
At the end of the bonus state, if the lottery for shifting to the AT state executed during the bonus state is won, the game state is shifted from the bonus state to the AT state.
As described above, at the end of the bonus state, the continuous effect is executed for a predetermined number of games. After the final game in the bonus state is completed, an effect image is displayed, an image notifying the shift to the AT state is displayed on the main display 8, and the game state shifts to the AT state from the next game. Become.

・Transition processing from bonus state to normal game state (arrow b in FIG. 10)
When the AT state shift lottery executed during the bonus state is not won at the end of the bonus state, the game state shifts from the bonus state to the normal game state after the specified number of games are executed during the bonus state. It will happen.
At this time, after the final game in the bonus state is finished, the effect image in which the main character is defeated as a result of the continuous effect and the image informing that the AT state is not changed are displayed on the main display 8, and the next game is started. The game state shifts to the normal game state.

It should be noted that, during the transition from the bonus state to the normal game state, the setting related information (setting suggestive information) may be notified by notification means (main display 8, sub-display 17, speaker 9). For example, a predetermined character out of a plurality of characters is displayed on the main display 8 and the sub display 17, and the displayed character is selected according to the selection probability preset according to each setting value of the probability setting device 14. By selecting the setting value by using the displayed character, the set value may be predicted to some extent.

Also, the bonus state is terminated when a preset number of games have been played, and the bonus state is terminated when the number of medals paid out during the bonus state reaches a specified number. Alternatively, the game may be ended based on fulfillment of either one of the execution of the specified number of games and the payout of the specified number of medals.
Further, when the bonus state is terminated when the number of medals paid out during the bonus state reaches the specified number, it is preferable to continue the first half of the bonus state for a fixed number of games.
In this case, in the second half of the bonus state, the bonus state ends when the total number of medals paid out due to accidental winnings of the bell role reaches the prescribed number, so the continuation game in the second half is finished. The number can be changed for each bonus state, and the possibility of transition to the AT state will change.

(AT state)
The AT state is a game state in which it is easy to obtain medals by continuously performing push order navigation for the push order bell role for the relevant period as notification of an operation mode advantageous to the player in the game during the AT state. is.
However, unlike the bonus state, the lottery control for the combination is the same as in the normal game state, so the lottery control for the push order bell combination targeted for the push order navigation is executed in the same manner as in the normal game state.

During the AT state, as in the first embodiment described above, the continuation of a predetermined number of games (for example, 30 games) given at the time of initial transition to the AT state is managed as the remaining number of games for which the AT state can be continued. Then, the number of remaining games is decremented for each game, and the AT state is continued until the number of remaining games is exhausted.
Then, when the number of remaining games in the AT state is exhausted, the AT state ends.

During the AT state, control information regarding the AT state is transmitted from the main controller 10 to the sub-controller 20, and under the control of the sub-controller 20, images of various effects during the AT state are displayed on the main display 8. display is performed. Also, the number of remaining games during the AT state, the total number of medals obtained during a series of AT states, and the total number of games executed during the AT state are displayed on the main display 8 .

Further, the AT state continuation lottery process is the same as in the first embodiment described above, and the AT state continuation lottery process is performed in a predetermined number of games (2 to 3 games) executed last in the AT state.
Then, when the result of the competition lottery in each game during the lottery game period is two wins, it is determined that the continuation condition is established, the continuation of the AT state is determined, and after the end of the AT state being executed. A new AT state will begin.

Also, in the new AT state, the continuation of the AT state itself is managed in the same manner as in the initial transition of the AT state, and the AT state ends when a predetermined number of games (for example, 30 times) are executed. However, in the predetermined number of games (2 to 3 games) executed at the end of the new AT state, the AT state continuation lottery process is performed in the same manner as in the initial transition.
Therefore, the AT state is repeatedly executed by satisfying the continuation condition in the continuation lottery process during each AT state.
In addition, as in the first embodiment, the odds of winning the match-up lottery in each game executed during the lottery game period in the AT state are always set to be non-constant.

It should be noted that the odds of winning each competition lottery during the lottery game period in the AT state may be made the same. In addition, a plurality of lottery modes for the lottery game period during the AT state may be set, and may be changed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, or may be changed based on the player's operation and selected according to the player's preference. can be

Further, as in the first embodiment described above, even during the lottery game period in the AT state, the control of the sub-controller 20 based on the reception of the control information from the main controller 10 corresponding to the execution of the game, A continuous performance by the characters is executed on the main display device 8 .
Concerning the continuous production during the AT state, the battle production is completed for each game, the battle production is executed based on the probability of winning set for each game, and the ally who fights against the enemy character for each game. The side characters (including the main character) will appear in different types corresponding to the winning probability.

Then, if the battle lottery in each game has been won, the friendly character that has appeared wins at the end of the game, and if the battle lottery has not been won, the friendly character that has appeared An effect such that the player is defeated at the end of the game is completely performed for each game.
Then, when two games are won out of the result of the competition lottery in the three games, the continuation of the next AT state is decided.

During periods other than the period of the lottery game in the AT state, the main display 8 or the sub-display 17 displays an effect during the AT state in which a predetermined character appears in order to enhance the interest of the game. In the performance during the AT state, for example, an introductory image of each character appearing is displayed, and predetermined music is output from the speaker 9 .

On the other hand, during the lottery game period in the AT state, the background during the battle production and the contents of the battle production will change according to the type of the battle lottery, so that the expectations for the continuation of the AT state will change. It has become.
The execution control of push order navigation during the AT state may be different from that during the bonus state. For example, if the push order bell role is won during the bonus state, a predetermined probability (for example, 100%) is given. , and if you win the push order bell role during the AT state, by executing the push order navigation with a lower probability than during the bonus state (for example, 60%), during the bonus state and AT The number of medals that can be obtained may change during the state.

・Transition processing from AT state to bonus state (arrow f in FIG. 10)
Even in the AT state, as in the normal game state, a bonus state is set as a special game state based on the fact that the lottery result by the main control device 10 as to whether or not to grant a privilege is a predetermined special lottery result. (Benefits) can be granted.

Therefore, when a bonus combination is won as a result of a lottery for a combination by the main controller 10 in a game in the AT state, stop control is performed to allow a special combination of symbols ("7.7.7") on the reels 4. When a special symbol combination is drawn to the reels 4 based on the operation of the player, the game state is shifted to a bonus state as a special game state advantageous to the player.
If a bonus combination is won during the AT state, it is preferable to temporarily stop (disable) execution of the push order navigation until the game state shifts to the bonus state.

Then, when the lottery for transition to the bonus state in the AT state is won, the AT state being executed is temporarily interrupted, and the game state shifts to the bonus state.
Therefore, the number of remaining games in the AT state is suspended when shifting to the bonus state, and when returning to the AT state, the AT state is resumed based on the suspended remaining number of games (arrow e in FIG. 10). Become.

However, when shifting to the bonus state during the AT state, unlike when shifting to the bonus state during the normal game state, the AT state transition lottery process is not performed, and a predetermined number of games are executed. In this case, the bonus state ends and the AT state is restored.

Even when the player enters the bonus state during the AT state, a continuation lottery period similar to that described above may be provided, and AT state lottery processing may be performed to increase the right to continue the AT state.
In addition, if the lottery for transition to the bonus state is won during the AT state, a battle effect (a battle in which the main character wins) is performed for a predetermined period of time (for example, between three games) without notifying that the state will immediately shift to the bonus state. You may notify that it will shift to a bonus state after the performance) is executed. However, in this case as well, if a special symbol combination is drawn onto the reels 4 during the battle effect, the battle effect is stopped and the state shifts to the bonus state.
In addition, even when a rare role that may be won in duplicate with a bonus role is won during the AT state and the bonus role is not won, a battle effect (a battle effect in which the main character loses) is executed. good too.

Further, when the AT state is shifted to the bonus state, the pushing order navigation may be executed during the entire period of the bonus state.
That is, when the normal game state is shifted to the bonus state, the push order navigation is executed only in the first half of the bonus state, but when the AT state is shifted to the bonus state, the first half of the bonus state and the first half of the bonus state are executed. The push order navigation may be executed in both the latter half.
In this way, it is possible to increase the number of acquired medals when the AT state is shifted to the bonus state, so that the total number of acquired medals is further increased when the AT state and the bonus state occur consecutively. As a result, it is possible to greatly increase the player's sense of expectation.
Further, when the AT state is shifted to the bonus state, a predetermined number of games (for example, 10) may be added to the remaining number of games in the AT state.

・Transition processing from AT state to normal game state (arrow d in FIG. 10)
In the AT state, if the continuation condition of the AT state is not satisfied and the right to continue to the next AT state is not granted, that is, in the competition lottery of each game during the lottery game period in the AT state, winning twice When the result is not derived, after the end of the AT state, it shifts to the normal game state.
In the second embodiment as well, in the game during the lottery game period, if the match lottery is not won twice, the non-satisfaction of the special condition is confirmed. It is assumed that the condition for terminating the AT state is established at the time when a result of not winning the competition lottery is derived twice in any game, and the game state shifts to the normal game state from the next game.
Therefore, the continuation period of the AT state being executed will change according to the result of the competition lottery during the period of the lottery game.

In addition, since the pushing order navigation is performed even in the game during the lottery game period, even if the special condition is not finally established in the continuous lottery process in the AT state, the non-winning of the match lottery is not derived twice. The longer the lottery game period lasts, the more chances of obtaining medals, and the more advantageous the player is.
In the game during the lottery game period, the pushing order navigation for the pushing order bell role is performed. , 50%) may be used for push order navigation.

When the AT state is shifted to the normal game state, the winning probability state in the AT state is controlled to be the normal probability state. At this time, the state may be shifted to the high probability state with a predetermined probability for each setting in the probability setting device 14 .
In addition, in the case of transitioning to a high probability state after the end of the AT state, there is a possibility that limit control (limiter control) by the above-described limiting means is performed during the high probability state, but the limit during the high probability state When the control is performed, it is shifted to the normal probability state.

At the end of the AT state, an ending state is set for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds). During the ending state (ending period), the progress of the game is temporarily disabled. will be transferred.
During the ending state, under the control of the main controller 10 and the sub-controller 20, setting-related information capable of suggesting the set value set by the probability setting device 14 is notified by the notification means. For example, a predetermined image is displayed by the main display 8 and the sub-display 17 and a predetermined sound is output from the speaker 9 .
As described above, the game state transition is performed in the slot machine 1 of the second embodiment.

[Transition of game state in the second embodiment and content displayed on the main display]
Next, with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 11, the game state transition realized by the control of the main controller 10 and the sub controller 20 and the display on the main display 8 in the slot machine 1 of the second embodiment. Regarding the contents, especially the transition of the game state when the game state shifts in the order of the normal game state→bonus state→AT state and the display contents on the main display 8 will be described.

FIG. 11 shows the correspondence relationship between the transition of the game state from the normal game state to the bonus state, the transition from the bonus state to the AT state, and changes in the display contents on the main display 8 during the transition.
Specifically, under the control of the main controller 10, when a bonus combination is won in the normal game state and a special symbol combination stops on the reels 4 in the subsequent game, the game state changes from the normal game state to the bonus state. It shows the navigation state displayed on the main display 8 and the content of the effect (effect image) when the state is shifted to the AT state by winning the AT state transition lottery during the bonus state.
Note that FIG. 11 shows the period after winning the bonus combination during the normal game state, and omits the period before that.

Also in the second embodiment, the main controller 10 performs control related to lottery of various benefits and change of various game states (including the time of change), and control information related to the control is transmitted from the main controller 10 to the sub-controller. 20 to control various displays that the sub-controller 20 supports.
It should be noted that the start point and execution period of effects not directly related to changes in the game state (for example, fake precursor effects, etc.) may be controlled by the sub-controller 20 based on the reception of control information from the main controller 10. , the sub-controller 20 may control itself without receiving control information from the main controller 10 . However, it is necessary to receive control information (for example, winning information for a rare combination) that triggers the effect.

First, as shown in FIG. 11, in the normal game state when the transition to the bonus state has not been determined, if a bonus combination is won, a continuous effect is executed on the main display 8 as described above. Then, in the final game (the first game in the figure) of this continuous effect, the main display 8 displays an image in which the main character wins and an image informing the transition to the pseudo-bonus state.
It should be noted that the push order navigation on the main display 8 is not executed during the normal game state.

Then, in the second game, a stop promotion effect is executed on the main display 8 to prompt the player to stop the special symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination. is stopped on the reel 4, the main display 8 displays text information such as "Congratulations on the big bonus" or a predetermined character image as an image to notify the occurrence of the bonus state.
Note that the winning state of the bonus combination is held unless it shifts to the bonus state, and the stop control of the reels 4 capable of stopping the special symbol combination is performed while the holding state continues.
However, in the holding state, if control is performed to give priority to the winning of another combination (for example, replay combination), when the other combination is won, the special symbol combination cannot be stopped even in the holding state.

Then, when the special symbol combination is stopped on the reels 4 in the second game, the game state shifts from the normal game state to the bonus state from the start of the third game (timing t5). .
When the game state shifts to the bonus state, first the first half of the bonus state is started, and based on the control information from the main control unit 10, the sub control unit 20 activates the push order navigation control, and the push order bell role is played. When one wins, control is performed so that the push order navigation corresponding to that role is executed.
Therefore, in the first half of the bonus state, the pushing order navigation is continuously executed, and medals can be obtained very easily.
Further, when the gaming state shifts to the bonus state, the main control device 10 continuously outputs information to the management device side via the external output terminal 18 to notify that the game state has shifted to the bonus state.

The first half of the bonus state is set until a predetermined number of games (for example, 20 times) are executed, and if any of the bell hands of the push order is won during this time, the push order navigation corresponding to that role is performed. is performed on the main display 8 and the navigation lamps 12.
In addition, in the first half of the bonus state, as described above, as an effect during the bonus state, for example, an effect image introducing the characters that appear is displayed on the main display 8 together with the push order navigation.

Then, when the 33rd game is started (timing t6), the game shifts to the second half of the bonus state, the control of the push order navigation is disabled, and one of the push order bell roles is won. Even in this case, the corresponding push order navigation will not be executed.
Further, when the transition to the second half of the bonus state occurs, the AT state transition lottery is executed with a high probability, and the player is notified that the AT state transition lottery is being performed with a high probability. As a production during the state, a production image in which the main character and the enemy character face each other is displayed on the main display 8 as a preliminary production of the battle production.

When the bonus state shifts to the second half, the light emission mode of the lamp 11 is changed from the light emission mode of the bonus state to the light emission mode for informing the high probability state, and the sound effect from the speaker 9 is changed from the sound effect sound of the bonus state. Changed to sound effect during high probability state.
Further, due to the transition of the game state to the second half of the bonus state, the output information from the external output terminal 18 is changed from the information indicating the bonus state to the information indicating the normal game state.

Then, when the 40th game, which is part of the second half of the bonus state, starts (timing t7), a continuous effect (competition effect) based on the AT state transition lottery executed during the high probability state is performed. It will be executed in the main display 8 . The continuous effect is executed over the 40th to 42nd games.
FIG. 11 exemplifies the transition to the AT state, so after the end of the final game in the bonus state, the main display 8 displays an image in which the main character wins and an image informing the transition to the AT state. It will be done.
When the 42nd game ends, the conditions for ending the bonus state are established, and the current bonus state ends.

Then, the game state shifts to the AT state from the start of the 43rd game (timing t8), and the effect image during the AT state is displayed on the main display 8 .
Further, when the gaming state shifts to the AT state, the sub control device 20 activates the control of push order navigation based on the control information from the main control device 10, and if any of the push order bell roles are won, , the state is controlled so that the push order navigation corresponding to the role is executed.

Therefore, the push-order navigation control disabled in the second half of the bonus state is enabled again by the transition to the AT state.
Further, when the game state shifts to the AT state, the main control device 10 continuously outputs information to the management device side via the external output terminal 18 to notify that the game state has shifted to the AT state.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, the main control device 10, when winning any one of the push-order bell combinations 1 to 6, wins. Only when the stop operation is performed in a specific pressing order corresponding to the pressing order bell combination, control is performed to win the winning pressing order bell combination.
That is, the main controller 10 wins the winning push-order bell combination as a specific stop mode in which a predetermined privilege can be granted based on the stop operation in a specific push order as a predetermined stop operation mode by the player. This constitutes a specific stop control means capable of deriving the combination to the variable display means.

Further, based on the control information from the main controller 10, the sub-controller 20 displays a specific pressing order for winning the winning pressing order bell combination on the main display 8 in the first half of the bonus state or during the AT state. , and the navigation lamp 12 is used for notification.
That is, the sub-control device 20 constitutes stop operation notification means capable of recognizably notifying the player of a specific push order as a predetermined stop operation mode in a game in which the winning push order bell combination can be won. .

Further, when the bonus state occurs, the push order navigation is executed in the first half of the bonus state.
That is, the main controller 10 executes (activates) push order navigation by the sub-controller 20 as stop operation notification means in the first half of the bonus state as the first period of the special game state. It constitutes

Therefore, since the push order navigation is performed only for a predetermined period during the bonus state, it is possible to generate a novel bonus state that has not existed in the past, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, in the second half of the bonus state, the lottery for transition to the AT state is executed at a higher probability than in the normal game state.
That is, the main controller 10 as a lottery means generates an AT state as a specific privilege based on the execution of the game in the second half of the bonus state as a second period different from the first period during the special game state. lottery can be executed.

Therefore, in the second half of the bonus state, the lottery for the AT state is executed, so that the player's sense of expectation can be heightened.
Also, in the second half of the bonus state, the lottery in the AT state is executed at a higher probability than in the normal game state, so it is possible to further increase the player's sense of expectation.

In addition, in the second half of the bonus state, an effect during the high-probability state and a continuous effect are executed.
That is, the sub control device 20 constitutes effect control means capable of executing a predetermined effect in the game in the latter half of the bonus state as the second period during the special game state.
Therefore, in the latter half of the bonus state, it is possible to execute a highly entertaining game that effectively heightens the player's sense of expectation.

Also, in the second half of the bonus state, the push order navigation is not executed.
That is, the main controller 10 as the notification control means does not execute (disables) the push order navigation by the sub-controller 20 as the stop operation notification means in the second half of the bonus state as the second period of the special game state. ).

Therefore, in the second half of the bonus state, the push order navigation is not executed, and the push order navigation is executed only in the first half, thereby generating a bonus state in which profits are well-balanced between the game parlor and the player. It becomes possible.
In addition, since the AT state lottery is performed even if the push order navigation is not executed, it is possible to generate a state advantageous to the player when the bonus state occurs, thereby increasing the player's sense of expectation. It becomes possible.

Also, in the latter half of the bonus state, if the AT state transition lottery is won, the AT state will occur after the bonus state ends.
That is, when the AT state transition lottery result as a specific privilege is derived by the main controller 10 as a lottery means, after the bonus state as a special game state ends, a specific game state advantageous to the player is obtained. It enables the generation of the AT state.
Therefore, when the bonus state is generated, the possibility of the AT state being generated also increases, so that the player's sense of expectation can be greatly increased.

In addition, in the first half of the bonus state, for example, an effect to introduce the characters appearing is executed, while in the latter half of the bonus state, a high-probability state effect or a continuous effect is executed. .
That is, the sub control device 20 as the effect control means can execute different effects between the first half (first period) and the latter half (second period) of the bonus state.
Therefore, an appropriate performance is executed for various controls that change during the bonus state, and it is possible to execute a highly entertaining performance that keeps the player from getting bored throughout the bonus state.

Note that each of the first half and the second half of the bonus state may be set to any number of games as long as it is within the continuation period of the bonus state.
Also, the bonus state is terminated when the number of games to be executed reaches a predetermined number. It may be terminated.
In this case, if the number of medals acquired or paid out in the first half of the bonus state satisfies the end condition of the bonus state, the bonus state ends in the middle of the first half without shifting to the second half. It is preferable to set the number of games in the first half so that the end condition based on the number of medals is not satisfied in the first half.

In addition, a plurality of bonus states with different durations may be generated. For example, a regular bonus state with a duration of 20 games as a condition of winning a regular bonus role, and a duration of 40 games with a big bonus state. A big bonus state conditional on winning a bonus combination may also be generated.
In this case, during the entire period during the regular bonus state, the push order navigation is executed, and during a predetermined period (for example, 20 games) during the normal game state immediately after the end of the regular bonus state, even if the state is the normal probability state. Nevertheless, as in the second half of the big bonus state, an effect during the high probability state (fake high probability effect) may be executed.

In this way, even if the regular bonus state occurs, the number of medals obtained is substantially the same as in the big bonus state, but the big bonus state is more advantageous to the player in the AT state transition lottery. Therefore, it is possible to generate a well-balanced special game state, and furthermore, since the fake high certainty performance is executed even in the regular bonus state, it is possible to make the player have a certain degree of expectation. .
Further, in the regular bonus state, as in the above-described bonus state, the first half and the second half may be divided into the first half and the second half, and the push order navigation and the lottery control may be performed. A different value may be set for the bonus state.

Further, the main controller 10 may perform control to differentiate between the execution mode of the bonus state occurring during the normal game state and the execution mode of the bonus state occurring during the AT state.
For example, when the bonus state occurs during the normal game state, as described above, it is divided into the first half and the second half, and the push order navigation is executed only in the first half, but if the bonus state occurs during the AT state. , the push order navigation may be executed during the entire period of the bonus state, or the first half may be extended.

That is, when the bonus state as the special game state occurs during the AT state as the specific game state, the main controller 10 as the notification control means executes push order navigation in the second half (second period). On the other hand, if the bonus state occurs outside of the AT state, control is performed so that the push order navigation is not executed in the second half (disabling the stop operation notification means). .
Therefore, when the AT state and the bonus state occur in succession, push-order navigation is executed during the entire period of the bonus state, and there is an extremely high expectation that a large number of medals can be obtained synergistically. It is possible to realize a game with a high

Conversely, when the bonus state occurs during the AT state, the first half may be shortened, or the push order navigation may not be executed during the entire period of the bonus state.
In this way, when the AT state and the bonus state occur, the period during which the right to continue the AT state is drawn for a longer period of time increases the possibility that the AT state will continue, and the player's expectations are high. can be further enhanced.

In addition, when executing the control for differentiating the execution mode of the bonus state that occurs during the normal game state from the execution mode of the bonus state that occurs during the AT state, the execution probability of the push order navigation is made different. good too.
For example, when the bonus state occurs during the normal game state, if the push order bell combination is won, the push order navigation is always executed, but if the bonus state occurs during the AT state, The push order navigation may be executed with a predetermined probability (for example, 60%) when the push order bell combination is won.

By doing so, it is possible to suppress the amount of medals obtained when the AT state and the bonus state occur in succession. Also, the execution probability of the push order navigation during the AT state is set lower than that during the bonus state that occurs during the normal game state, and the push order during the bonus state that occurs during the AT state has the same execution probability as this value. If the navigation is executed, even if the AT state is shifted to the bonus state, the push order navigation is executed with the same execution probability, and the bonus state can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable. of.

Further, when the ending effect is executed by prior determination of the limiter, the push order navigation may be executed in the entire period in the bonus state that occurs during the ending effect.
In this way, it is possible to prevent the player from having a dissatisfied feeling that there is a period during which the push order navigation is not executed even though the ending effect is being executed. .

Also, a so-called freeze state may be provided in which the progress of the game is temporarily interrupted during the game in the bonus state.
For example, after the end of the final game in the first half, the progress of the game is interrupted for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). The main display 8 or the like may display an effect image for informing what is to be done.

Further, when executing the game, it is possible to set 1 bet in addition to 3 bets, and in a predetermined game in the bonus state, a game is executed in which only a predetermined line (for example, the middle line) set for 1 bet is valid. In the game, by stopping (so-called JAC removal) the symbol that disables the withdrawal stop control on a predetermined line and deriving the winning result that a predetermined number (for example, 14) medals are paid out, during the bonus state The number of payout medals may be adjustable.
In this way, when the bonus state is ended according to the number of medals paid out during the bonus state, it is possible to acquire the maximum number of medals by reducing the number of games for adjusting the number of paid-out medals. be.
The slot machine 1 in the second embodiment is configured as described above.

[Modification 1 of Second Embodiment]
Next, Modification 1 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
In the slot machine 1 of the second embodiment described above, the bonus state is fixedly provided with the first half in which the push order navigation is executed and the second half in which the push order navigation is not executed. In Modification 1, the periods of the first half and the second half of the bonus state can be changed.
Therefore, only the setting of the first half and the second half in the bonus state is different from the above-described second embodiment, and the rest of the configuration is the same as that of the above-described second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 12, in Modification 1 of the second embodiment, as bonus states generated by main controller 10, bonus 1 state and bonus 2 state can be generated.
However, the duration of the bonus state is the same between the bonus 1 state and the bonus 2 state, and the combination lottery state is also controlled to be the same.
The difference between the bonus 1 state and the bonus 2 state is the ratio between the first half and the second half, and main controller 10 changes the switching timing between the first half and the latter half. , the first half ends when 20 games have been played from the start (timing t9), whereas in the bonus 2 state, the first half ends when 25 games have been played from the start (timing t10). It has become.
Therefore, since the push order navigation during the bonus state is executed only in the first half as described above, the first half in which the push order navigation is executed is set to be longer than the bonus 1 state (during the acquisition number). Also, the bonus 2 state (large number of acquired medals) will increase the number of acquired medals.

On the other hand, the AT state transition lottery during the bonus state is executed with a high probability in the latter half as described above, so the bonus 1 state is longer than the bonus 2 state because the latter half is set longer. The probability of shifting to the AT state increases.
In addition, in the second half of the bonus 1 state and the bonus 2 state, similarly to the slot machine 1 of the second embodiment described above, there is a high probability of notifying that the AT state transition lottery is being performed in a high probability state. The production in the state is executed.
Since the advantage to the player is set so that the longer the first half, the higher the advantage, the bonus 2 state is more advantageous even if the lottery period of the AT state is shortened. It is a thing.

Selection of whether to generate the bonus 1 state or the bonus 2 state is controlled by the main controller 10 when a bonus combination is won. is in the high probability state, control is performed so that the probability of selecting the bonus 2 state is higher than in the case of the normal probability state.
For example, in the normal probability state, the bonus 2 state is selected with a predetermined probability (for example, 40%), whereas in the high probability state, the probability is higher than the predetermined probability. (for example, 60%) is controlled so that the bonus 2 state is selected.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 according to Modification 1 of the second embodiment, when the bonus state is generated, the length of the first half in which the push order navigation during the bonus state is activated can be changed. It is done.
That is, the main controller 10 constitutes change control means capable of changing the length of the first half as the first period during the bonus state as the special game state.
As a result, more diverse bonus states are generated, the expectations of the player can be changed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Note that the ratio between the first half and the second half when generating bonus states with different execution modes may be other than the above, and any value may be used as long as the player's advantage changes due to the occurrence of different bonus states. good.
In addition, in the bonus state in which the period of the first half is relatively short, the first half may not occur, that is, the entire period of the bonus state may be the latter half in which the AT state is drawn with a high probability. In the bonus state in which the period of is relatively long, the second half may not be generated, that is, the entire period of the bonus state may be the first half in which push-order navigation is executed.

Also, based on the winning of the same bonus combination, bonus states with different execution modes are generated, but bonus combinations may be set for each bonus state with different execution modes.

As a condition for selecting a bonus state with a different execution mode, the probability state at the time when the bonus combination is won is used. When the number of games played or the number of games played after the end of the previous AT state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 300 times), a bonus state with a high degree of advantage may be generated. .

Moreover, regardless of the probability state of the lottery in the AT state, a bonus state with a different execution mode may be selectively generated with a predetermined probability.
In addition, it is also possible to change the selection rate when selecting a bonus state with a different execution mode according to the probability set value in the probability setting device 14. For example, in the case of a relatively high probability set value, However, control may be performed so that a bonus state with a higher degree of advantage is selected than in the case of a low probability set value.

Also, it may be possible to select a bonus state with a different execution mode based on the player's selection operation. However, in this case, it is preferable to equalize the advantages in each bonus state.

Further, the execution probability of the push order navigation may be changed for each bonus state with a different execution mode. For example, in the first half of the bonus 1 state, the push order navigation is executed with a predetermined probability (for example, 70%) when the bell role of the push order is won, but in the first half of the bonus 2 state, the bell role of the push order is won. The push order navigation may be executed with a predetermined probability (for example, 100%) of time.

Also, when the bonus state is generated during the normal game state, the bonus 1 state and the bonus 2 state are selectively generated as described above, but when the bonus state is generated during the AT state, , As a bonus state of an execution mode different from the bonus 1 state and the bonus 2 state, the push order navigation is executed in the entire period, that is, a bonus state is generated in which the push order navigation is executed (activated) even in the latter half. You can let it run.

In addition, when a bonus combination is won, the mode of execution of the bonus state is determined. When a predetermined game is executed in the first half of the bonus state, a lottery is conducted to determine whether the first half is to be continued or not, and the result of the lottery is determined. You may make it determine whether to continue the first half based on. In this case, it is preferable to perform the lottery so that the bonus state with a high degree of advantage has a higher probability of continuing the first half than the bonus state with a low degree of advantage.

Also, by making the lottery for the AT state in the latter half of the bonus state much higher than during the normal game state, the bonus state with a longer period in the latter half may be set to have a higher advantage. good.
As described above, the slot machine 1 of Modification 1 of the second embodiment is configured.

[Effect at Start of Bonus 1 State in Modification 1 of Second Embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 13, an effect executed on the main display 8 when the bonus 1 state is started in Modification 1 of the second embodiment will be described.
FIG. 13 shows effect images on the main display 8 that are executed during the execution of a game that can stop the special symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination on the reels 4 after the bonus combination is won, and after the game is over. ing.

First, as shown in FIG. 13(a), when a game in which a special symbol combination can be stopped is executed, variable display on the reels 4 as variable display means is started, and also on the main display 8. , the image variation display by the image pattern is started.
The image variation display is, for example, each of the image reels 40a to 40c, each of which has the same image pattern as the pattern and pattern arrangement displayed on the reels 4a to 4c, is displayed on the main screen of the main display 8 from top to bottom. This is done by scrolling to

Therefore, the image variable display is performed on the main display 8 corresponding to the variable display on the reels 4a to 4c.
The scrolling speed (moving speed of the image pattern) of the image variation display may be any value, but it is preferable that the speed is high enough to prevent the player from distinguishing the image pattern.
After that, when the reel 4 can be stopped, the stop operation of the stop button 5 becomes effective, and the corresponding reel 4 is stopped in response to the stop button 5 being stopped.

FIG. 13(b) shows the stop mode of the reels 4 and the main display when all the reels 4 are stopped by the stop operation of the stop button 5 and the special symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped on the reels 4. 8 shows an effect image.
As shown in FIG. 13(b), at the end of the game, when 7 symbols 50 are stopped on each of the reels 4a to 4c as a special symbol combination, the image fluctuation display by the image symbols on the main display 8 also stops. Then, on the main display 8 as well, the bonus 1 symbol combination image 40d corresponding to the special symbol combination on the reels 4 stops.

Since FIG. 13 shows the case where the bonus 1 state occurs, the "BAR, BAR, BAR" image symbol corresponding to the bonus 1 state is stopped as the bonus 1 symbol combination image 40d.
At this time, the image symbols of "BAR, BAR, BAR" are individually stopped corresponding to the stop of each of the reels 4a to 4c.
Also, above the bonus 1 symbol combination image 40d, a bonus 1 notification image 40e including character information of "regular bonus" for notifying the occurrence of the bonus 1 state is displayed.
In a game in which the special symbol combination can be stopped, if the special symbol combination is not stopped on the reels 4 due to a player's stop operation error, etc., a lost symbol combination image different from the bonus 1 symbol combination image 40d is displayed. is displayed.
Any image other than the bonus 1-symbol combination image 40d may be used as the lost symbol combination. For example, when the 7 symbols 50 cannot be stopped only on the right reel 4c, the lost symbol "BAR BAR-" A combined image may be displayed.

"BAR BAR BAR" in the bonus 1 symbol combination image 40d and "regular bonus" in the bonus 1 notification image 40e are generally symbol combinations corresponding to low-advantage bonus states among the bonus states and their values. Therefore, by displaying the bonus 1 symbol combination image 40d and the bonus 1 notification image 40e, it is possible for the player to recognize that a bonus 1 state with a low advantage has occurred. be.

Thus, when generating the bonus state, main controller 10 determines whether to generate the bonus 1 state or the bonus 2 state. 4, a bonus 1 symbol combination image 40d and a bonus 1 notification image 40e for notifying the occurrence of the bonus 1 state are displayed.
Therefore, the player can play the game during the bonus 1 state while surely recognizing the occurrence of the bonus 1 state.

Then, when the next game is executed, the gaming state shifts to the bonus 1 state, and the bonus 1 symbol combination image 40d and the bonus 1 notification image 40e on the main display 8 are erased. , the number of remaining games in the first half of the bonus 1 state (for example, 20), etc. are displayed.
As described above, the effect at the start of the bonus 1 state in Modification 1 of the second embodiment is executed.

[Effect at Start of Bonus 2 State in Modification 1 of Second Embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 14, an effect executed on the main display 8 when the bonus 2 state is started in Modification 1 of the second embodiment will be described.
FIG. 14 shows effect images on the main display 8 that are executed during the execution of a game that can stop the special symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination on the reels 4 after the bonus combination is won, and after the game is over. ing.

First, as shown in FIG. 14(a), when the game in which the special symbol combination can be stopped is executed, the reel 4 as the variation display means changes, as in the case of the above-described bonus 1 state. When the display is started, the image reels 40a to 40c also start the image changing display on the main display device 8 as well.

Next, FIG. 14(b) shows the stop mode of the reels 4 when all the reels 4 are stopped by the stop operation of the stop button 5 and the special symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped on the reels 4. It shows the effect image on the main display device 8 .
As shown in FIG. 14(b), at the end of the game, when 7 symbols 50 are stopped on each of the reels 4a to 4c as a special symbol combination, the image fluctuation display by the image symbols on the main display 8 also stops. Then, on the main display 8 as well, the bonus 2-symbol combination image 41b corresponding to the special symbol combination on the reels 4 stops.

Since FIG. 14 shows the case where the bonus 2 state occurs, the image symbols "7.7.7" corresponding to the bonus 2 state are stopped as the bonus 2 symbol combination image 41b.
At this time, the image symbols "7, 7, 7" are individually stopped corresponding to the stop of each of the reels 4a to 4c.
In addition, a bonus 2 notification image 41a including character information of "big bonus" for notifying the occurrence of the bonus 2 state is displayed above the bonus 2 symbol combination image 41b.
In a game in which the special symbol combination can be stopped, if the special symbol combination is not stopped on the reels 4 due to a player's mistake in the stop operation or the like, a lost symbol combination image different from the bonus 2 symbol combination image 41b is displayed. will be displayed.
Any image other than the bonus 2-symbol combination image 41b can be used as the above-mentioned lost symbol combination. A combined image may be displayed.

"7.7.7" in the bonus 2 symbol combination image 41b and "big bonus" in the bonus 2 notification image 41a are generally symbol combinations and their values corresponding to bonus states with a high degree of advantage among the bonus states. By notifying the bonus 2 symbol combination image 41b and the bonus 2 notification image 41a, it is possible for the player to recognize that the bonus 2 state with a high degree of advantage has occurred. be.

Thus, when the bonus state is to be generated, the main controller 10 determines whether to generate the bonus 1 state or the bonus 2 state. 4, a bonus 2 symbol combination image 41b and a bonus 2 notification image 41a for notifying the occurrence of the bonus 2 state are displayed.
Therefore, the player can play the game during the bonus 2 state while surely recognizing the occurrence of the bonus 2 state.

Then, when the next game is executed, the gaming state shifts to the bonus 2 state, and the bonus 2 symbol combination image 41b and the bonus 2 notification image 41a on the main display 8 are erased. , the number of remaining games in the first half of the bonus 2 state (for example, 25), etc. are displayed.

It should be noted that although the execution mode of the bonus state is notified by the execution of the image variation display on the main display 8, it may be notified by other effects on the main display 8, such as roulette effects, battle effects, and the like. , the execution mode of the bonus state may be notified.
Further, after stopping the special symbol combination on the reels 4, the progress of the game is temporarily stopped and the reels 4 are moved again, so-called reel performance is executed, and the symbols stopped on the effective line at the end of the reel performance. (For example, "7" or "BAR") may indicate the mode of execution of the bonus state.

Further, when the occurrence of the bonus 2 state is determined in advance, the bonus 1 symbol combination image 40d for reporting the bonus 1 state and the bonus 1 notification image 40e are once displayed, and then, in the predetermined game executed in the first half, A so-called promotion effect may be executed in which a predetermined image for notifying the bonus 2 state is displayed.
As described above, the effect at the start of the bonus 2 state in Modification 1 of the second embodiment is executed.

[Modification 2 of Second Embodiment]
Next, Modification 2 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
In the slot machine 1 according to Modification 2 of the second embodiment, similarly to Modification 1 of the second embodiment described above, the periods of the first half and the second half of the bonus state can be changed, and in the latter half The contents of the effect to be executed are different from those in the first modified example.
Furthermore, in Modification 2 of the second embodiment, in addition to the bonus 1 state in which the number of acquired medals is medium and the bonus 2 state in which the number of acquired medals is the largest, the period of the first half of the bonus state is the shortest number of acquired medals. can generate 3 minimum bonus states.
Therefore, only the effect executed in the latter half of the bonus state is different from the modified example 1 of the second embodiment, and the rest of the configuration is the same as the modified example 1.

First, FIG. 15A is a diagram comparing the first half and the second half of the bonus state in the bonus 1 state in which the number of acquired medals is medium and the bonus state 2 in which the number of acquired medals is the maximum.
As shown in FIG. 15(a), in the modification 2 of the second embodiment, the main controller 10 selectively selects the bonus 1 state and the bonus 2 state as the bonus state based on the winning of the same bonus combination. It is possible to occur.
However, the duration of the bonus state controlled by the main controller 10 is set to be the same for the bonus 1 state and the bonus 2 state, and the timings t11 to t13a shown in the figure are controlled as the bonus state.

In the bonus 1 state and the bonus 2 state, the ratio between the first half and the second half is different. The first half ends when 20 games have been played from the start (timing t12a), whereas in the bonus 2 state, the first half ends when 25 games have been played from the start (timing t12b). It's becoming
Therefore, since the push order navigation during the bonus state is executed only in the first half as described above, the first half in which the push order navigation is executed is set to be longer than the bonus 1 state (during the acquisition number). Also, the bonus 2 state (large number of acquired medals) will increase the number of acquired medals.

On the other hand, the second half in which the AT state transition lottery during the bonus state is executed with a high probability is set between timings t12a to t13a in the bonus 1 state and between timings t12b to t13a in the bonus 2 state. Become.
Therefore, the probability of shifting to the AT state is higher in the bonus 1 state than in the bonus 2 state because the second half is set longer.

In addition, in the second half of the bonus 1 state and the bonus 2 state, similarly to the slot machine 1 of the second embodiment described above, there is a high probability of notifying that the AT state transition lottery is being performed in a high probability state. An effect (high probability effect) during the state is executed.
In addition, in the bonus 2 state, the length of the first half is longer than that in the standard bonus 1 state, so the end of the effect during the high probability state is actually the latter half of the time (for 5 games). It is designed to be carried over later than the time when the part ends.

Specifically, in the bonus 2 state, between timings t12b and t13b, which is the period until the same number of games (20 games) are executed between timings t12a and t13a in the bonus 1 state. In , the production in the high probability state is to be executed.
However, even in the bonus 2 state, the second half ends at the timing t13a, so during the timing t13a to t13b (extended section), the production during the high probability state is performed, but in reality the normal game state, the AT state transition lottery will be executed in the normal probability state.

In addition, since the advantage to the player is set so that the longer the first half, the higher the advantage, as in the first modification of the second embodiment, the lottery period in the AT state is shortened. Even so, the bonus 2 state is more advantageous than the bonus 1 state.

The selection of whether to generate the bonus 1 state or the bonus 2 state is also controlled by the main controller 10 when the bonus combination is won, as in the first modification of the second embodiment described above. As establishment, when the lottery probability state of the AT state in the normal game state is the high probability state, control is performed so that the probability of selecting the bonus 2 state is higher than in the case of the normal probability state. .
For example, in the normal probability state, the bonus 2 state is selected with a predetermined probability (for example, 20%), whereas in the high probability state, the probability is higher than the predetermined probability. (for example, 30%) is controlled so that the bonus 2 state is selected.

Then, when the lottery for shifting to the AT state is not won in the bonus 2 state, the continuous performance is terminated at the end of the extension section (timing t13b), and the performance in the normal game state is restored from the next game. becomes.
On the other hand, when the lottery for shifting to AT state is won in the bonus state 2, the continuous effect ends at the end of the extension section (timing t13b), and the game state shifts to AT state from the next game.
Therefore, when extending the performance in the high-probability state, the shift timing of the AT state is also changed to a timing later than the reference bonus state corresponding to the extension of the performance.
When shifting to the AT state, the shift to the AT state may be made at the end of the original bonus state (timing t13a).

Next, FIG. 15B is a diagram comparing the first half and the second half of the bonus state in the bonus 1 state in which the number of acquired medals is medium and the bonus 3 state in which the number of acquired medals is the smallest.
In the modification 2 of the second embodiment, the main controller 10 can selectively generate the bonus 3 state in addition to the bonus 1 state and the bonus 2 state as the bonus state based on the winning of the same bonus combination. there is
However, as described above, the duration of the bonus state controlled by the main controller 10 is set to be the same for the bonus 1 state, the bonus 2 state and the bonus 3 state. controlled.

As shown in FIG. 15(b), the bonus 1 state and the bonus 3 state have different ratios between the first half and the second half, and the main controller 10 can change the switching timing between the first half and the latter half. For example, in the bonus 1 state, the first half ends when 20 games have been executed from the start (timing t12a), whereas in the bonus 3 state, the first half ends when 15 games have been executed from the start (timing t12c). The first half ends with.
Therefore, since the push order navigation in the bonus state is executed only in the first half as described above, the first half in which the push order navigation is executed is set shorter than the bonus 3 state (small number of acquisitions). Also, the number of medals obtained increases in the bonus 1 state (among the number of medals obtained).

On the other hand, the second half in which the AT state transition lottery during the bonus state is executed with a high probability is set between timings t12a to t13a in the bonus 1 state and between timings t12c to t13a in the bonus 3 state. Become.
Therefore, the probability of shifting to the AT state is higher in the bonus 3 state than in the bonus 1 state because the latter half is set longer.

In addition, in the latter half of the bonus 1 state and the bonus 3 state, similarly to the slot machine 1 of the second embodiment described above, there is a high probability of notifying that the AT state transition lottery is being performed in a high probability state. An effect (high probability effect) during the state is executed.
In addition, in the bonus 3 state, the length of the first half is shorter than in the standard bonus 1 state. It is designed to move up earlier than the end of the part.

Specifically, in the bonus 3 state, between timings t12c and t13c, which is the period until the same number of games (20 games) are executed between timings t12a and t13a in the bonus 1 state. In , the production in the high probability state is to be executed.
However, even in the bonus 3 state, the second half will continue until the timing t13a. Since the player stays in the second half of the bonus state, the AT state transition lottery is executed in a high probability state.

As in the first modification of the second embodiment, the advantage to the player is set so that the longer the first half, the higher the advantage. The advantage is higher than the state.

The selection of which of the bonus 1 state, bonus 2 state, and bonus 3 state is generated is controlled by the main controller 10 when the bonus combination is won, as in the first modification of the second embodiment. When the lottery probability state of the AT state in the normal game state is a high probability state as the establishment of a predetermined condition, control is performed so that the probability of selecting a bonus state with a higher degree of advantage is increased.
For example, in the normal probability state, bonus 2 state (large number of acquisitions: high advantage) < bonus 1 state (medium number of acquisitions: medium advantage) < bonus 3 state (small number of acquisitions: low advantage) The bonus state is selected so that the relationship of is formed, whereas in the case of a high probability state, the relationship of bonus 3 state < bonus 1 state < bonus 2 state is formed. A bonus state is selected.

Then, when the AT state shift lottery is not won in the bonus 3 state, the continuous performance ends at the end of the shortened section (timing t13c), and the performance in the normal game state is restored from the next game. becomes.
However, since the AT state transition lottery is executed with a high probability even in the shortened section, if the AT state is won in the shortened section, the continuous effect will not be performed after the end of the game in which the original bonus state ends. , it is notified that the state will shift to the AT state, and the game state will shift to the AT state from the next game.

On the other hand, when the AT state transition lottery is won in the bonus 3 state, the continuous effect is executed so as to end at the end of the shortened section (timing t13c), and after the end of the game in which the shortened section ends, the AT The transition to the state is notified, and thereafter, the notification is continued until the end of the original bonus state (timing t13a), and the game state shifts to the AT state from the next game.
That is, even when shifting to the AT state, since the shortened section is still in the bonus state, the game is shifted to the AT state after waiting for the game to progress until the end of the original bonus state.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 according to the modified example 2 of the second embodiment, even when a bonus state with a different execution mode occurs, effects are produced so that the length of the second half of the bonus state is apparently the same. control.
That is, the sub-control device 20 as the effect control means is such that the length of the latter half as the second period during the bonus state as the special game state is shorter than the predetermined bonus state (bonus 1 state) that serves as a reference. In this case, it has a function (means) for extending the effect corresponding to the latter half after the end of the bonus state.
On the other hand, when the length of the latter half as the second period in the bonus state as the special game state is longer than the predetermined standard bonus state (bonus 1 state), an effect corresponding to the latter half is produced. It has a function (means) for shortening the end time of the bonus state.

Therefore, even if a bonus state occurs in which the length of the second half is shortened or extended compared to the standard bonus state, the production in the high probability state is executed for the same period as the standard bonus state. As a result, the AT state transition lottery period is not shortened or lengthened for the player, so that the player will not feel distrust or lower his expectations. .
In addition, even if the effect during the high probability state is extended or shortened, the lottery period for transition to the AT state is not always fixed. can be prevented from occurring.

The period (the number of games) for shortening or extending the second half may be other than those described above, and four or more types of bonus states with different periods in the second half may be provided in addition to the three types described above. In this case, an extended section or a shortened section of the high-probability state presentation may be provided for the period during which the latter half is shortened or extended.

In addition, a plurality of bonus hands are provided, and the length of the entire bonus state period is set to be different each time the bonus hand is established. Different ratios may be used.
Further, when outputting information indicating the bonus state from the external output terminal 18, it is preferable not to output the information during the extended section and the shortened section.

When the bonus state is terminated by the number of medals paid out during the bonus state (specified number of medals), the bonus state is actually terminated by paying out the same specified number of medals in each bonus state. In terms of appearance, the specified number of medals may be changed for each type of bonus state, and an effect during the high probability state may be executed according to the changed specified number of medals.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16, in the slot machine 1 of Modified Example 2 of the second embodiment, a case of changing the execution mode of the push order navigation in the first half will be described.
In the slot machine 1 according to Modification 2 of the second embodiment, bonus 1 state to bonus 3 state with different lengths of the first half can be generated. , it may be a section in which the push order navigation is not executed.

First, FIG. 16(a) shows that, in the slot machine 1 according to Modification 2 of the second embodiment, under the control of the main controller 10, a predetermined period during the first half of a predetermined bonus state (for example, bonus 2 state) 3 shows a case where a section without push order navigation is provided to disable the push order navigation.
The interval without push order navigation is set while a predetermined number of games (for example, one or two times) are executed.

As shown in FIG. 16(a), the first half is the time (timing t16) until a predetermined number of games (for example, 25 games) are executed in the entire section (timings t14 to t17) of the bonus 2 state. In the first half, basically, push order navigation is executed when the push order bell combination is won.
Then, a predetermined period (timings t15a to t15b) in the middle of the first half is set as a section without push order navigation in which push order navigation is not executed.
Therefore, during this interval without push order navigation, push order navigation is not executed even if the winning combination of the push order bell is won.

The interval without push order navigation is set based on the point in time when the first half of each bonus state ends. The time when the game is executed), the time when the first half of the bonus 1 state ends (when the game is played 20 times), or both, the interval without push order navigation is set.
Therefore, the start time (timing t15a) of the section without push order navigation shown in FIG. The first half of the game ends (when 20 games have been played).

Further, in the period without push order navigation, for example, a continuation determination effect is executed on the main display 8 as to whether or not the first half of the bonus state will continue under the control of the sub control device 20 .
For example, the continuation decision effect is executed by the roulette game, and when the result of the roulette game is continued, the first half is continued after that, and when the result of discontinuation (end) is derived. After that, the first half ends without continuing and shifts to the second half.
In the case where a section without push order navigation is provided in the middle of the first half, it is a condition that the type of the bonus state (the length of the first half) is not notified when the bonus state starts.

The result of the continuation determination effect is determined according to the type of bonus state being executed at that time point. As shown in FIG. At (timing t15b), the result that the first half is continued is derived, and the state returns to the state where the push order navigation is executed again from the next game.
On the other hand, at the end of the first half of the bonus 1 state and at the end of the first half of the bonus 3 state, the continuation determination effect is executed, the result of the end of each first half is derived, and the push order navigation is executed. The second half will continue without returning to the state where Therefore, in this case, in the bonus 1 state and the bonus 3 state, the continuation determination effect is performed in the latter half.

As described above, during a predetermined period in the middle of the first half of the bonus state, a zone without push order navigation is provided, and the continuation determination effect is executed in this zone without push order navigation, and the push order navigation is performed according to the result of the continuation determination effect. is activated again, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, it is possible to enhance the player's sense of satisfaction and accomplishment as compared with the case where the length of the first half of the bonus state is first notified.
Furthermore, during the continuation decision effect, even if the player wins the push order bell role, the push order navigation on the main display 8 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the user cannot recognize the user.

Further, for example, even at the beginning of the second half in the bonus 1 state or the bonus 3 state, since the continuation determination effect that derives the result that the first half is finished is executed, even if the first half is finished, the game can be played. It is possible to extend the expectation of the player and improve the interest of the game.

The section without push order navigation may be any period as long as the continuation decision effect can be executed, and the continuation decision effect may be any effect as long as the player can be notified of the continuation of the first half. .

Next, FIG. 16(b) shows that in the slot machine 1 according to Modification 2 of the second embodiment, under the control of the main controller 10, the first half of a predetermined bonus state (for example, the bonus 2 state) is initially predetermined. In the period, a case is shown in which a section without push-order navigation is provided to disable the push-order navigation.
The interval without push order navigation is set while a predetermined number of games (eg, 1 to 2 times) are executed, as described above.

As shown in FIG. 16(b), the first half is defined as the time (timing t16) until a predetermined number of games (for example, 25 games) are executed in the entire section (timings t14 to t17) of the bonus 2 state. In the first half, basically, push order navigation is executed when the push order bell combination is won.
Then, a predetermined period (timings t14 to t15c) at the beginning of the first half is set as a section without push order navigation in which push order navigation is not executed.
Therefore, during this interval without push order navigation, push order navigation is not executed even if the winning combination of the push order bell is won.

The interval without push-order navigation is set at the beginning of the first half of all bonus states. A first half determination effect that determines the duration (length) of is executed.
The first half determination effect is executed by, for example, a roulette game, and the duration of the first half of the current bonus state is derived by the roulette game. Therefore, the roulette game informs the type of the current bonus state.

The result of the first half determination effect is determined according to the type of bonus state being executed at that time. As shown in FIG. At the time point (timing t15c), the duration of the first half (25 games) is notified from the roulette game, and the state shifts to the state in which push order navigation is executed from the next game.
On the other hand, in the bonus 1 state and the bonus 3 state as well, the first half determination effect is executed in the initial push order non-navigation section of the first half, and the duration of each of the first half is notified.

As described above, in the predetermined period at the beginning of the first half of the bonus state, a zone without push order navigation is provided, and the first half determination effect is executed in this zone without push order navigation. Since the continuation period of the part is notified, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, since the duration is reliably notified at the beginning of the first half, the player can proceed with the game while accurately recognizing the type of the bonus state of this time.
Furthermore, during the first half determination effect, even if the role of the push order bell is won, the push order navigation on the main display 8 is not executed. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the duration cannot be accurately recognized.

The interval without push order navigation may be any period as long as the first half decision effect can be executed, and the first half decision effect can be any effect as long as the player can be notified of the duration of the first half. good.
As described above, the slot machine 1 of Modification 2 of the second embodiment is configured.

[Modification 3 of Second Embodiment]
Next, Modification 3 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
In the slot machine 1 of the second embodiment described above, when the lottery for shifting to the AT state is won in the second half of the bonus state, the game is shifted to the AT state after the bonus state ends.
Therefore, even if the AT state transition lottery is won, the push order navigation is not executed until the latter half of the bonus state, in which the push order navigation is not executed, has passed.

On the other hand, in the slot machine 1 according to Modified Example 3 of the second embodiment, when the AT state transition lottery is won in the second half of the bonus state, the pushing order navigation is executed without waiting for the end of the bonus state. I have to.
Therefore, the mode of execution of the push order navigation when winning the AT state transition lottery in the second half of the bonus state is different from that of the second embodiment, and the rest of the configuration is the same as that of the second embodiment. .

In FIG. 17, a predetermined bonus state (for example, bonus 1 state) occurs, and in the second half, a predetermined rare combination (for example, chance combination) is won, and the winning is used as an opportunity to enter the AT state transition lottery. It is a timing chart showing the navigation state and effect state when winning.
As shown in FIG. 17, when the bonus state occurs and the first half period (timings t18 to t19) in which the push order navigation is activated ends, the next game shifts to the second half and the push order navigation is disabled. be mobilized.

Then, when a predetermined rare combination is won at the time of execution of a predetermined game in the second half (timing t20), and the AT state transition lottery is also won at that time, the main display 8 is displayed under the control of the sub-controller 20. A continuous effect is executed as to whether or not to shift to the AT state.
The continuous effect is executed for a predetermined number of games (for example, three games), and after the end of the final game of the continuous effect, a result is derived to inform the transition to the AT state, and from the start of the next game (timing t21) the main controller A fake AT state is started by the control of .

The fake AT state is a state in which the AT state appears to occur in the second half of the bonus state. Also, an effect similar to that in the normal AT state is executed.
Therefore, even though the actual game state is the latter half of the bonus state, the player shifts to the AT state from the end of the continuous effect (timing t21).

Then, when the actual bonus state ends and the next game starts (timing t22), the gaming state shifts to the AT state (real AT state). Since it has occurred, the state is shifted to the real AT state when the fake AT state ends.
In addition, since the execution of push-order navigation and the effect on the main display 8 are continued during the transition from the end of the fake AT state to the actual AT state, it appears that a series of AT states occur during this period. It will be in a state where

In addition, since the duration of the fake AT state (timings t21 to t22) is set independently of the specified number of games (duration) of the AT state (main AT state), the duration of the fake AT state can be The specific game state that is advantageous for the player is extended.
That is, the earlier the fake AT state occurs in the bonus state, the longer the duration of the specific game state, and the more advantageous the player is.
It should be noted that, at the start of the fake AT state, it is preferable to notify the number of games for which the specific game state is extended, and the number of remaining games in the AT state on the main display 8 is displayed as the game for the extension. It is preferable to use a value obtained by adding numbers.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 according to the modified example 3 of the second embodiment, if the AT state transition lottery is won in the second half of the bonus state, a fake game that pretends to be in the AT state is played in the second half of the bonus state. Since the AT state is generated, it is possible to generate the AT state without any discomfort.
Further, when the fake AT state occurs, the period in which the player is advantageous is extended accordingly, so that the player's sense of expectation can be heightened.

In the second half of the bonus state, even if a rare role is won and the AT state transition lottery is not won, a continuous effect is executed to finally inform that the transition to the fake AT state will not occur. good too.
Further, even if a rare role is won in the second half of the bonus state and the AT state transition lottery is also won, a pattern may be provided in which the state is not shifted to the fake AT state. In this case, as in the second embodiment, the continuous performance is executed at the final stage of the bonus state, and after the continuous performance is completed, that is, after the bonus state is completed, the AT state is entered.

In addition, when a pattern that does not shift to the fake AT state is provided, whether to generate the fake AT state or shift to the AT state after the bonus state ends is performed by executing a distribution lottery when a rare role is won. You may make it distribute.
Further, when a rare combination is won in the second half of the bonus state, a waiting period may be set or an indication effect may be executed.
As described above, the slot machine 1 of Modification 3 of the second embodiment is configured.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment of the invention will be described.
The slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment of the present invention differs from the above-described first embodiment only in part in the configuration and control of the slot machine 1, and the rest is the same as in the first embodiment. Only the points different from the above-described first embodiment will be described below.

[Game Flow Regarding Bonus State and RT State in Gaming Machine in Third Embodiment]
First, referring to FIG. 18, the flow of the game regarding the bonus state and the RT state in the slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment will be described.
In the slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment, it is possible to execute a 2-bet game in which the game is executed by spending two medals and a 3-bet game in which the game is executed by spending three medals. shows the flow of games during execution of a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 18, main controller 10 controls three gaming states, a non-RT state (RT0), an RT state (RT1), and a bonus state, as gaming states during execution of a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game. It is possible.
In the slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, a bonus state, which is a so-called real bonus, can be generated. The bonus A state occurs only in a 2-bet game, and the bonus B state occurs only in a 3-bet game.

The non-RT state (RT0) is a non-RT (non-replay time) gaming state in which a winning state of a replay combination is executed with a normal probability, and the initial state of the slot machine 1 is controlled to non-RT.
When a 2-bet game is executed in a non-RT state (RT0), a bonus A combination is drawn with a predetermined probability, and when a 3-bet game is executed, a bonus B combination is drawn with a predetermined probability. When the A hand is won, the winning state of the bonus A hand is maintained, and when the bonus B hand is won, the winning state of the bonus B hand is maintained, and the game state shifts to the RT state (RT1) (Fig. 18(a). arrow a2).

The RT state (RT1) is a game state of RT (replay time) in which a winning state of a replay combination is executed with a high probability. ).
When the 2-bet game is executed in the RT state (RT1) in which the winning state of the bonus A hand is maintained, a predetermined symbol combination (for example, "red 7, white 7, blue 7") that wins the bonus A hand is selected. When the 3-bet game is executed in the RT state (RT1) in which the winning state of the bonus B combination is maintained, a predetermined symbol combination (for example, "Red 7, Blue 7, White 7") becomes possible, and when a predetermined symbol combination stops on the reels 4, the game state shifts to a bonus state (arrow a3 in FIG. 18(a)).

The bonus state is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the winning state of a predetermined combination (for example, a bell combination) is higher than in the non-RT state.
Then, by executing the game in the bonus state, by fulfillment of a predetermined condition for ending the bonus state (for example, by fulfillment of winning eight times in a predetermined winning combination or execution of 12 games). , the gaming state shifts to the non-RT state (arrow a1 in FIG. 18(a)).
The three gaming states of non-RT state (RT0), RT state (RT1), and bonus state are shifted only in a 2-bet game for the bonus A hand, and in a 3-bet game for the bonus B hand. only be migrated.
Therefore, for example, when a 3-bet game is executed after winning the bonus A hand in a 2-bet game and shifting to the RT state, the gaming state transition processing is not performed, and the RT state is maintained. A 3-bet game is executed, and a prize lottery and the like, which will be described later, are executed.
As described above, the gaming state control relating to the bonus state and the RT state is executed in the slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment.

[Game flow of 3-bet game on gaming machine in the third embodiment]
Next, the game flow of the 3-bet game on the slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
In the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment, as described above, it is possible to execute a 2-bet game in which the game is executed by spending two medals, and a 3-bet game in which the game is executed by spending three medals. However, FIG. 19 shows the game flow when the 3-bet game is executed.

As shown in FIG. 19, the 3-bet game in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment has a plurality of game states such as the normal game state, the CZ state, the pseudo-bonus state, and the AT state, as in the first embodiment. executed in any The main controller 10 can be controlled to shift from one game state to another game state based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition.

As the pseudo-bonus state, a blue 7 pseudo-bonus state with a duration of 20 games and a red 7 pseudo-bonus state with a duration of 30 games are set, and controlled to any of the pseudo-bonus states.
A special zone is set in the AT state, and control is possible in the special zone for a predetermined period when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the AT state.

In addition, since the 3-bet game is a game related to the transition of the four game states of the normal game state, the CZ state, the pseudo-bonus state, and the AT state, when the 3-bet game is executed, the 2-bet game The transition processing of the three related game states of non-RT state (RT0), RT state (RT1), and bonus state is not performed, and the game state at that time is maintained.
Therefore, for example, when a 3-bet game is executed during the RT state in which the winning state of the bonus A hand is maintained, the normal game state changes to the CZ state, the CZ state changes to the pseudo-bonus state, etc. while the RT state is maintained. transition will take place.

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment, based on the execution of the 3-bet game, transition control between the normal section, which is the section in which the aforementioned push order navigation cannot be performed, and the advantageous section, which is the section in which the push order navigation can be executed, is performed. In the initial state of the slot machine 1, the slot machine 1 is controlled in the normal section, and when a 3-bet game is executed in the normal section, when a predetermined transition condition is established (for example, winning any combination), the advantageous section is set. transition to

Also, during the advantageous section, at the end of the CZ state that did not transition to the pseudo-bonus state, at the end of the pseudo-bonus state that did not transition to the AT state, and at the end of the AT state, transition to the normal section done.
Also, in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment, similarly to the above-described first embodiment, limiting means (a so-called limiter) for limiting the number of medals that can be acquired during the advantageous section is provided.
In addition, the transition from the advantageous section to the normal section may be other than the above, and may be made to transition to the normal section at the end of all pseudo-bonus states, at the end of the CZ state, at the end of the AT state You may make it continue an advantageous area in each part.

(Normal game state)
The normal game state in the third embodiment is a game state in which the main controller 10 of the slot machine 1 is reset, as in the first embodiment described above, and is a disadvantageous state for the player. be.
By executing a 3-bet game (hereinafter referred to as a game) during the normal game state, when a predetermined combination (for example, a rare combination) is won, a lottery for transition to the pseudo-bonus state is performed, and the normal game state is changed to the pseudo-bonus state with a predetermined probability. A transition to the bonus state is performed (arrow a2 in FIG. 19).
Further, when the number of games executed during the normal game state reaches a predetermined number (the number of ceiling games), the normal game state is shifted to the pseudo-bonus state (arrow a2 in FIG. 19).

Similarly, by executing the game during the normal game state, when a predetermined combination (for example, a rare combination) is won, a lottery for transition to the CZ state is performed, and a transition from the normal game state to the CZ state is performed with a predetermined probability. (Arrow c2 in FIG. 19).
Similarly, by executing the game during the normal game state, when a predetermined combination (for example, a rare combination) is won, a lottery for transition to the AT state is performed, and a transition from the normal game state to the AT state is performed with a predetermined probability. (Arrow g2 in FIG. 19).

Although the details will be described later, the probability of transition from the normal game state to the pseudo bonus state, CZ state, or AT state is set to a different value for each lottery trigger role, and the difficulty of transition to each game state is different. It's like
In addition, in the normal game state, a normal probability state and a high probability state are set, and in each game, the transition probability to the pseudo-bonus state, CZ state, and AT state is higher than the normal probability state. is controlled to increase

In addition, although the details will be described later, in the game in the normal game state, a pseudo-game (pseudo game) is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the above benefits (CZ state, pseudo-bonus state, AT state) are executed based on the pseudo-game ) transfer lottery will be held.
In addition, the above-mentioned high probability state is reflected even in the pseudo-game, and control is performed so that the provision of benefits is increased even in the pseudo-game.
Also, as in the first embodiment described above, when the transition to the pseudo-bonus state, CZ state, or AT state is determined, a waiting period may be set before transition to each game state, or an indication effect or continuous effect ( A battle effect) may be executed on the main display 8.

(CZ state)
In the CZ state in the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the lottery process for transition to the pseudo-bonus state is performed at a higher probability in each game (3-bet game) than in the normal game state. This is a game state in which transition to a pseudo-bonus state is easier than during stay in the game state.
In the CZ state, the pushing order navigation is performed when the pressing order bell combination is won, but the pushing order navigation may not be performed during the CZ state.

Further, the CZ state continues for 5 to 15 games, and if the transition condition to the pseudo-bonus state is met during that time, the gaming state shifts from the CZ state to the pseudo-bonus state (arrow e2 in FIG. 19).
On the other hand, when the specified number of games are executed without satisfying the transition condition to the pseudo-bonus state during the CZ state, the game state shifts from the CZ state to the normal game state (arrow d2 in FIG. 19).

(pseudo bonus state)
In the pseudo-bonus state in the third embodiment, medals can be obtained by executing push-order navigation for the push-order bell role as notification of an operation mode advantageous to the player in the game during the pseudo-bonus state. It is an easy game state.
In the pseudo-bonus state, a blue 7 pseudo-bonus state and a red 7 pseudo-bonus state having different durations (number of games) are set. In the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state, 20 games are set as the prescribed number of games. , 30 games are set as the prescribed number of games in the red 7 pseudo-bonus state.

Further, when the pseudo-bonus state is entered, a pseudo-game is executed in the first game, and when the player stops the reels 4 by operating the stop button 5 as stop operation means during the pseudo-game, the display window 6 On a predetermined line, a pattern combination of "red 7, red 7, red 7" is displayed when shifting to the red 7 pseudo-bonus state, and "blue 7, blue 7, red 7" is displayed when shifting to the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state. The pattern combination of "Blue 7" is always pseudo-stopped, and a reel effect is executed to inform transition of each pseudo-bonus state.

Then, by operating the start lever 3 again after that, the first game in each pseudo-bonus state is restarted.
Therefore, the symbol combination of "Red 7/Red 7/Red 7" and "Blue 7/Blue 7/Blue 7" is a symbol combination that informs of determination or transition of any of the pseudo-bonus states.

Then, although the details will be described later, an AT state transition lottery is performed based on the occurrence of the pseudo-bonus state, and if the AT state transition lottery is won, the game state shifts to the AT state after the pseudo-bonus state ends (Fig. 19 arrow f2), and if the AT state shift lottery is not won, the game state shifts to the normal game state after the pseudo bonus state ends (arrow b2 in FIG. 19).
The pseudo-bonus state may be terminated when the number of medals paid out during the pseudo-bonus state (including missed medals) reaches a predetermined number in addition to the prescribed number of games.

(AT state)
The AT state in the third embodiment is a game in which medals can be easily obtained by performing push order navigation for the push order bell role as notification of an operation mode advantageous to the player in the game during the AT state. state.
During the AT state, a predetermined number of games (for example, 50 games) given at the time of initial transition to the AT state are managed as the remaining number of games for which the AT state can be continued, and the remaining number of games is managed each time the game is executed. , and the AT state is continued until the remaining number of games is exhausted.
Then, when the number of remaining games in the AT state is exhausted, the AT state ends, and the game state shifts from the CZ state to the normal game state (arrow h2 in FIG. 19).

In addition, when the state is shifted to the AT state, a pseudo-game is executed in the first game, and when the player stops the reels 4 by operating the stop button 5 during the pseudo-game, "White The symbol combination of 7, white 7, white 7" is always stopped in a pseudo manner, and a reel effect is executed to inform the transition to the AT state.
Then, by operating the start lever 3 again after that, the first game in the AT state is resumed.
Therefore, the symbol combination of "white 7, white 7, white 7" is a symbol combination that notifies determination and transition of the AT state.

In addition, even in the game during the AT state, a lottery process for shifting to the pseudo-bonus state is performed, and when the condition for shifting to the pseudo-bonus state is satisfied, the AT state is temporarily interrupted and the game state is changed to the pseudo-bonus state. state (arrow i2 in FIG. 19).
When the AT state is shifted to the pseudo-bonus state, the gaming state is returned to the AT state after the pseudo-bonus state ends (arrow f2 in FIG. 19), and the AT state is restarted from the point of interruption. Become.

Further, in the third embodiment, when a specific condition is satisfied in a game in the AT state, a special zone is generated for a predetermined period (5 to 15 games). A lottery for transition to the pseudo-bonus state is executed during the period.
In the special zone, the push order navigation is performed when the bell combination is won, but the push order navigation may not be performed in the special zone.
As described above, the control of the gaming state during execution of the 3-bet game is executed in the slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment.

[Lottery Table Used for Winning Payout and Winning Lottery in Main Control Device in Third Embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the payout for a combination and the lottery for a combination in the main controller of the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described.

The combination of the winning combination in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment includes a small winning combination, a replay winning combination, and a bonus winning combination. There are a bonus A role and a bonus B role. The replay role also includes a cherry role.

As in the first embodiment, one of six push orders (for example, "5a→5b→5c", "5c→5b→5a", etc.) is selected for the push order bell role. By operating the stop buttons 5a to 5c according to (specific pressing order), the corresponding combination of symbols ("bell, bell, bell") is stop-displayed on the activated line. Six pressing order bell combinations 1 6 are provided.
In addition, the common bell combination is a combination in which the combination of corresponding symbols ("bell, bell, bell") stops on the activated line regardless of the pressing order.
Note that the push-order bell combination and the common bell combination are configured so that none of the reels 4 need to be clicked.

Also, when winning the push-order bell combination, regardless of whether the stop button 5 is operated second or third, if only the stop button 5 operated first follows a specific push order, it corresponds to the push-order bell combination. The stop control of the reels 4 may be performed so as to stop the combination of symbols. Further, the number of pushing order bells is not limited to six, and three pushing order bells 1 to 3 may be provided.
When the bell combination wins in a specific pressing order and when the common bell combination wins, as shown in FIG. Ten medals are paid out in the game. In addition, when the bell combination wins (drops) out of the specific pressing order, one medal is paid out in both the 2-bet game and the 3-bet game.

The replay combination is a small combination in which the winning symbol combination is "replay, replay, replay", and is configured so that all the reels 4 do not need to be pressed.
When the replay combination is won, as shown in FIG. 20(a), the next game can be played with the same number of bets (replay).

The watermelon combination is a small combination in which the winning combination of symbols is "watermelon, watermelon, watermelon", and is a so-called rare combination that requires the operator to press the "watermelon" symbol on any of the reels 4. FIG.
When the watermelon combination wins, two medals are paid out in the two-bet game, and three medals are paid out in the three-bet game, as shown in FIG. 20(a).
The cherry combination is a winning combination of symbols "cherry, replay, replay", and is a so-called rare combination that requires pressing of the symbol "cherry" on any of the left reels 4a.
Since the cherry combination is set as a kind of replay combination, as shown in FIG. 20(a), it is possible to play (replay) with the same number of bets in the next game as in the case of the replay combination.

The bonus hand is a hand that shifts the game state to a bonus state by winning a prize, and is won only in a 2-bet game, and control is performed to allow a symbol combination of "red 7, white 7, blue 7" on the effective line by winning. A bonus A hand to be played and a bonus B hand to be won only in a 3-bet game and controlled to permit a symbol combination of ``red 7, blue 7, and white 7'' on an effective line by winning are set. .
Also, no medals are paid out when each bonus combination is won, and the winning right of each bonus combination is maintained (carried over) until the corresponding bonus combination is won.

All the lines in the display window 6 may be set as effective lines, or only the middle line may be set as the effective line. In addition, the upper right diagonal line is set as an effective line, and when the above-described symbol combinations stop on other lines, the combination of symbols stopped on the upper right diagonal line is determined as a winning symbol combination. may

Next, with reference to FIGS. 20(b) and (c), the winning probability of each combination in the 2-bet game and the 3-bet game will be described.
20(b) and 20(c) both show the case where the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is setting 1. FIG.

First, FIG. 20(b) shows the winning probabilities of each combination during the execution of the 2-bet game, while the bonus combination is not carried over (non-RT state), while the bonus combination is carried over (RT state), and during the bonus state. is shown.
The lottery for each combination is performed by random number lottery for the combination lottery by the main controller 10. In FIGS. The numbers of winning values (winning) are shown respectively.

As shown in FIG. 20(b), when the 2-bet game is executed, each of the bell hands 1 to 6 in the pressing order is drawn with a probability of 7280/65535 both during the non-carrying of the bonus hand and during the carry-over of the bonus hand. During the bonus state, the lottery is drawn with a probability of 10/65535.

In addition, during execution of the 2-bet game, the common bell combination is drawn with a probability of 1760/65535 both during the non-carry-over of the bonus combination and during the carry-over of the bonus combination, and with a probability of 10/65535 during the bonus state. be selected by lottery.

Further, when the 2-bet game is executed, the watermelon role is drawn with a probability of 1000/65535 both during the non-carrying of the bonus role and during the carry-over of the bonus role, and with a probability of 55446/65535 during the bonus state. be done.

In addition, when the 2-bet game is executed, the cherry hand is drawn with a probability of 1200/65535 when the bonus hand is not carried over, and is drawn with a probability of 1500/65535 when the bonus hand is carried over, and is in the bonus state. , the lottery is drawn with a probability of 10/65535.

In addition, when the 2-bet game is executed, the bonus A hand is drawn with a probability of 6553/65535 while the bonus hand is not carried over, and the probability of 0/65535 is drawn during both the carryover of the bonus hand and the bonus state. None) will be selected by lottery.
On the other hand, the bonus B combination is drawn with a probability of 0/65535 (no win) during both the non-carryover of the bonus combination, the carryover of the bonus combination, and the bonus state.
Therefore, in the 2-bet game, only the bonus A combination is won.

In addition, during the execution of the 2-bet game, the replay combination is drawn with a probability of 8870/65535 while the bonus combination is not carried over, and is drawn with a probability of 9070/65535 while the bonus combination is carried over, and is in the bonus state. , the lottery is drawn with a probability of 10/65535.

In addition, when the 2-bet game is executed, the probability of winning none of the above-mentioned hands is 2473/65535 when the bonus hand is not carried over, and the probability is 8526/65535 when the bonus hand is carried over. , during the bonus state, the probability is 10000/65535.

Next, FIG. 20(c) shows the winning probabilities of each combination when the 3-bet game is executed in the non-carry-over of the bonus combination, the carry-over of the bonus combination, and the bonus state.

As shown in FIG. 20(c), when the 3-bet game is executed, the pressing order of the bell hands 1 to 6, the common bell hand, the watermelon hand, the cherry hand, the replay hand, and the loser are the same as when the 2-bet game is executed. Since the probabilities are the same, the explanation here is omitted.

Further, when the 3-bet game is executed, the bonus A hand is drawn with a probability of 0/65535 (no winning) during the non-carrying of the bonus hand, the handover of the bonus hand and the bonus state.
On the other hand, the bonus B hand is drawn with a probability of 6553/65535 while the bonus hand is not carried over, and is drawn with a probability of 0/65535 (no winning) both during the carry over of the bonus hand and in the bonus state.
Therefore, in the 3-bet game, only the bonus B combination is won.

With the above probability, the lottery for each role during the execution of the 2-bet game and the 3-bet game is performed while the bonus combination is not carried over (non-RT state), while the bonus combination is carried over (RT state), and during the bonus state. done. Therefore, the probability of winning the replay combination is higher when the bonus combination is carried over than when the bonus combination is not carried over.
Also, the winning probability of the pushing order bell combinations 1 to 6 is relatively high when the bonus combination is not carried over and when the bonus combination is carried over.

Therefore, for example, when a 3-bet game in which a pseudo-bonus state or an AT state can be expected to occur is executed during the carry-over of the bonus hand, the replay hand is won with a relatively high probability, and furthermore, the pseudo-bonus state. When push order navigation is performed in the AT or AT state, medals are increased at a predetermined rate.

The higher the set value in the probability setting device 14, the lower the probability of winning the replay combination and the higher the probability of winning the cherry combination. The winning probability of each combination may be common for all set values.
Also, the winning probability of each combination for each game state is not limited to the above. For example, the probability of winning a common bell role and a role other than a losing role (losing) during the bonus state is set to be the same as during the non-bonus state, the winning probability of the common bell in the bonus state is increased, and the winning probability of the winning role (losing) is increased. Concerning, the winning probability in the non-bonus state may be lowered.
As described above, the combination payout and the lottery for the combination are realized by the main controller in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment.

[Arrangement of reels in the third embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the arrangement of the reels 4 exemplified as the variable display means in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described.
The reels 4 are composed of a left reel 4a, a middle reel 4b, and a right reel 4c in the same manner as in the above-described first embodiment. are displayed, and the arrangement of each pattern is different.

First, as shown in FIG. 21(a), the left reel 4a has "replay", "bell", "blue 7", "red 7", "watermelon", and "replay" in the order of array numbers 0 to 19. , "Bell", "White 7", "Bell", "Watermelon", "Replay", "Bell", "BAR", "Cherry", "Watermelon", "Replay", "Bell", "Blank" , “Bell” and “Watermelon” are represented.

Further, as shown in FIG. 21(b), on the middle reel 4b, "Blank", "Watermelon", "Blue 7", "Bell", "Replay", and "Cherry" are arranged in the order of array numbers 0 to 19. , "Watermelon", "Red 7", "Bell", "Replay", "White 7", "Watermelon", "White 7", "Bell", "Replay", "Cherry", "Watermelon", "BAR , "Bell", and "Replay" are shown.

Also, as shown in FIG. 21(c), the right reel 4c has "watermelon", "red 7", "blue 7", "bell", "replay", and "BAR" in the order of array numbers 0 to 19. , "replay", "blank", "bell", "replay", "watermelon", "cherry", "white 7", "bell", "replay", "watermelon", "replay", "blank" , "Bell" and "Replay" are represented.

Since the symbols are arranged as described above, the intervals between the symbols of "Bell" and "Replay" are within the pull-in range (4 frames) for the stop control of the symbols. While there is no need to press for the "replay" pattern, the intervals between each pattern of "red 7", "blue 7", "white 7", "cherry", and "watermelon" are Since the predetermined reel 4 is larger than the pull-in range for the stop control of the symbols, it is necessary to aim at the symbols corresponding to the winning line.
The pattern arrangement of the reels 4 in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment is set as described above.

[Lottery table used when determining the number of ceiling games in the main controller in the third embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the lottery for the ceiling game number when the 3-bet game is executed in the normal game state in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described.
The main controller 10 selects the ceiling game number in the subsequent normal game state when the advantageous interval transition condition is established (for example, winning a predetermined bell combination) in the normal interval in the normal game state. .

When the number of 3-bet games in the normal game state reaches the ceiling number of games selected and set, a privilege such as a pseudo-bonus state or an AT state is provided.
Therefore, the pseudo-bonus state and the AT state can be obtained not only when winning a transition lottery when winning a predetermined role (for example, a rare role) in the normal gaming state, but also when the number of games equal to the number of ceiling games is executed. It is supposed to occur.

In addition, main controller 10 is designed to determine any number of games from 128 games, 256 games, 512 games, and 768 games as the number of ceiling games. In practice, selection control is performed based on the type of combination that established the advantageous interval transition condition and the set value in the probability setting device 14 .

FIG. 22 shows an internal lottery table used for lottery for the number of ceiling games when the normal section shifts to the advantageous section.
The ceiling game number lottery is performed by random number lottery for the ceiling game number lottery by the main controller 10. In FIG. It shows the number of random numbers for winning.

First, FIG. 22(a) shows a case in which a combination other than a rare combination (for example, a bell combination in push order) is won when the advantageous interval transition condition is satisfied.
As shown in FIG. 22(a), when a hand other than a rare hand is won and the condition for transitioning to an advantageous section is established, if the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 1, the probability is 48/256. 128 games are selected as the number of ceiling games, 256 games are selected with a probability of 16/256, 512 games are selected with a probability of 64/256, and 768 games are selected with a probability of 128/256.

Similarly, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 2, 128 games are selected as the ceiling number of games with a probability of 32/256, 256 games are selected with a probability of 96/256, and 256 games are selected with a probability of 96/256. 512 games are selected, and 768 games are selected with a probability of 32/256.

Similarly, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 3, 128 games are selected as the ceiling number of games with a probability of 64/256, 256 games are selected with a probability of 16/256, and 256 games are selected with a probability of 48/256. 512 games are selected, and 768 games are selected with a probability of 128/256.

Similarly, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 4, 128 games are selected as the ceiling number of games with a probability of 32/256, 256 games are selected with a probability of 128/256, and 256 games are selected with a probability of 64/256. 512 games are selected, and 768 games are selected with a probability of 32/256.

Similarly, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 5, 128 games are selected as the ceiling number of games with a probability of 76/256, 256 games are selected with a probability of 32/256, and 256 games are selected with a probability of 64/256. 512 games are selected, and 768 games are selected with a probability of 84/256.

Similarly, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 6, 128 games are selected as the number of ceiling games with a probability of 32/256, 256 games are selected with a probability of 160/256, and 256 games are selected with a probability of 48/256. 512 games are selected, and 768 games are selected with a probability of 16/256.

Next, FIG. 22(b) shows a case where a rare combination (for example, a cherry combination) is won when the advantageous section transition condition is satisfied.
As shown in FIG. 22(b), when a rare combination is won and the advantageous interval transition condition is established, if the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 1, the number of ceiling games is 192/256. , 256 games are selected with a probability of 64/256, 512 games are selected with a probability of 0/256, and 768 games are selected with a probability of 0/256.

Similarly, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 2, 128 games are selected as the top number of games with a probability of 128/256, 256 games are selected with a probability of 128/256, and 256 games are selected with a probability of 0/256. 512 games are selected, and 768 games are selected with a probability of 0/256.

Similarly, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 3, 128 games are selected as the ceiling number of games with a probability of 192/256, 256 games are selected with a probability of 64/256, and 256 games are selected with a probability of 0/256. 512 games are selected, and 768 games are selected with a probability of 0/256.

Similarly, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 4, 128 games are selected as the number of top games with a probability of 128/256, 256 games are selected with a probability of 128/256, and 0/256. 512 games are selected, and 768 games are selected with a probability of 0/256.

Similarly, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 5, 128 games are selected as the ceiling number of games with a probability of 192/256, 256 games are selected with a probability of 64/256, and 256 games are selected with a probability of 0/256. 512 games are selected, and 768 games are selected with a probability of 0/256.

Similarly, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 6, 128 games are selected as the ceiling number of games with a probability of 128/256, 256 games are selected with a probability of 128/256, and 0/256. 512 games are selected, and 768 games are selected with a probability of 0/256.

Since the number of ceiling games is determined as described above, when the favorable section transition condition is satisfied by winning a rare role, a smaller number of ceiling games is selected than when winning a role other than a rare role. The possibility increases, and furthermore, if the rare combination is won, the relatively large number of games such as 512 games and 768 games will not be selected.
Also, the higher the set value in the probability setting device 14, the higher the probability that a smaller number of ceiling games will be selected.
As described above, the lottery for the number of ceiling games is executed in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment.

[Lottery Table Used for Determining Privilege when the Number of Ceiling Games is Reached in the Main Controller in the Third Embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the lottery for the privilege given when the number of games reaches the ceiling will be described.

The main controller 10 gives a privilege when the number of 3-bet games in the normal gaming state reaches the ceiling game number selected and set. A bonus state, a blue 7 pseudo-bonus state, and an AT state are set, and one of these benefits is selected and given.

In addition, when determining a privilege to be given when the number of ceiling games is reached, main controller 10 performs selection control based on the type of combination that has established the advantageous interval transition condition and the number of ceiling games that has been determined. ing.

FIG. 23 shows an internal lottery table used for a privilege lottery when shifting from a normal section to an advantageous section.
The lottery for the privilege is performed by lottery of random numbers for the privilege lottery by the main controller 10. In FIG. shows the number of
In addition, the timing for performing the lottery for the privilege may be at the time when the number of ceiling games is won, other than at the time when the normal section shifts to the advantageous section (at the start of the game).

First, FIG. 23(a) shows a case where a combination other than a rare combination (for example, a bell combination for pushing order) is won when the advantageous interval transition condition is satisfied.
As shown in FIG. 23(a), when winning a combination other than a rare combination and the condition for transitioning to the advantageous zone is established, and 128 times is selected as the number of ceiling games, the probability of red is 216/256. 7 pseudo-bonus state is selected, blue 7 pseudo-bonus state is selected with a probability of 32/256, and AT state is selected with a probability of 8/256.

Similarly, when 256 is selected as the number of ceiling games, the red 7 pseudo-bonus state is selected with a probability of 192/256, the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state is selected with a probability of 48/256, and the probability is 16/256. The AT state is selected with .

Similarly, when 512 times are selected as the number of ceiling games, the red 7 pseudo-bonus state is selected with a probability of 128/256, the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state is selected with a probability of 104/256, and the probability is 24/256. The AT state is selected with .

Similarly, when 768 is selected as the number of ceiling games, the red 7 pseudo-bonus state is selected with a probability of 64/256, the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state is selected with a probability of 160/256, and the probability is 32/256. The AT state is selected with .

Next, FIG. 23(b) shows a case where a rare combination (for example, a cherry combination) is won when the advantageous section transition condition is satisfied. When the rare combination is won, the ceiling game numbers of 512 times and 768 times are not selected, so only the ceiling game numbers of 128 times and 256 times are items.
As shown in FIG. 23(b), when a rare combination is won and the advantageous interval transition condition is satisfied, and 128 times is selected as the number of ceiling games, the probability of red 7 pseudo bonus is 96/256. A state is chosen, with a probability of 96/256 to choose the Blue 7 pseudo-bonus state, and a probability of 64/256 to choose the AT state.

Similarly, when 256 is selected as the number of ceiling games, the red 7 pseudo-bonus state is selected with a probability of 86/256, the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state is selected with a probability of 85/256, and the probability of 85/256 is selected. The AT state is selected with .

As described above, since the benefits given when the number of ceiling games is reached are determined, the higher the ceiling number is determined, the higher the probability that red 7 pseudo-bonus state → blue 7 pseudo-bonus state → AT state will be selected in order. it will be higher.
Although the details will be described later, since the advantage to the player increases in the order of red 7 pseudo-bonus state → blue 7 pseudo-bonus state → AT state, the higher the number of ceilings determined, the more advantageous the benefits are. It will be selected.

In addition, when the condition for transitioning to the advantageous section is established by winning the rare role, the probability of selecting a benefit with a high degree of advantage is higher than when winning a role other than the rare role.
As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment, the lottery for the privilege is executed when the ceiling game number is reached.

Next, a pseudo game (pseudo game) as a second game, which is a feature of the slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment, will be described.
In the slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment, under the control of the main controller 10, it is possible to form a game execution mode in which multiple game results are derived in one game.

Specifically, in the normal game as the first game, the start lever 3 is operated to rotate the reels 4, and the stop button 5 is operated to stop the spinning reels 4, thereby obtaining one game result. is derived, but in a game in which a pseudo-game as the second game is executed, first, the start lever 3 is operated to rotate the reel 4, and the stop button 5 is operated to pseudo-stop the spinning reel 4 ( In this state (no bet number set), the reels 4 are rotated again by the second operation of the start lever 3, and the second operation of the stop button 5 is performed. It is possible to execute a game (so-called reel performance) in which the re-rotating reels 4 are stopped (permanently stopped).

Therefore, the period from the first operation of the start lever 3 to the actual stop of the reels 4 is regarded as one game, and the pseudo-stop of the reels 4 is performed during this period, thereby completing one game (setting the number of bets for one game ), multiple game results are derived.
However, even if the combination of symbols corresponding to the win of the role is stopped due to the result of the pseudo game (pseudo win), medals are not paid out like in the normal game.

That is, the main controller 10 stops each reel 4 that is displayed in a variable manner by operating each stop button 5 (a plurality of stop operation means), and the symbol combination formed by stopping each reel 4 is , a normal game as a first game capable of imparting a predetermined game value (e.g., payout of a predetermined number of medals) when a predetermined symbol combination is achieved, and a game start condition such as operation of the start lever 3 (game It comprises a first game control means that can be executed based on the establishment of the start condition).
A pseudo game as a second game in which each reel 4 displayed in a variable manner is stopped by operating each stop button 5, and a predetermined game value cannot be given even when a predetermined symbol combination is achieved. is provided based on the establishment of a predetermined game start condition.

In the third embodiment, the period from the first operation of the start lever 3 to the pseudo stop of the reel 4 is called a pseudo game, and the period from the re-rotation of the reel 4 to the real stop is called the main game. is called Also, the lottery result of the combination drawn when the start lever 3 is operated for the first time is adopted at the time of the final stop.
In the pseudo game, when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning of the predetermined combination is pseudo-stopped, a prize lottery as described later is executed in the same way as when the normal game (including the main game) is stopped. .
However, the lottery for the privilege related to the pseudo-game is performed not when each symbol is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo-game, but when each symbol to be pseudo-stopped is determined in advance before the pseudo-game is executed.
It should be noted that the lottery of benefits related to the pseudo-game may be performed at the time when each symbol is pseudo-stopped.

That is, when the symbol combination formed by the pseudo-stop of each reel 4 in the pseudo-game as the second game becomes a specific symbol combination such as a symbol combination corresponding to winning of a rare role, for example. In addition, there is provided a privilege granting means capable of imparting a privilege (pseudo-bonus state, etc.).

When the reel 4 is pseudo-stopped, the fact that the reel 4 is not yet stopped may be notified by moving the reel 4 up and down in small increments in order to distinguish it from the actual stop. Also, the number of pseudo-games executed during a normal game, that is, the pseudo-stopping of the reels 4 may be three or more if performed a plurality of times.

In addition, the main control device 10 determines in advance the result of the pseudo-game derived when the reels 4 are pseudo-stopped before executing the game in which the pseudo-game is executed, and executes the pseudo-game based on the determined result. I have to.
Also, the result of the pseudo-game derived when the reels 4 are pseudo-stopped is determined based on the results of a plurality of normal games executed before the game in which the pseudo-game is executed.

Specifically, when a common bell combination is won as a predetermined combination by executing a normal game, the stop result of one reel 4 (left reel 4a) in the pseudo-game is determined, and then the common bell combination is determined. When winning, determine the stop result of another reel 4 (middle reel 4b) in the pseudo-game, and when the next common bell combination is won, another reel 4 (right reel 4c) in the pseudo-game The stop result is determined, and the result of one pseudo-game is determined by winning a common bell combination three times in total.
And, when the result of this pseudo-game is determined, the lottery for the privilege is performed.

Therefore, the pseudo-game is not executed until the common bell combination is won three times, and the pseudo-game is executed during the next game after the common bell combination is won three times.
Then, when the pseudo-game ends, the result of a new pseudo-game for the execution of the next pseudo-game is determined when the subsequent common bell combination is won.
That is, the main control device 10 is provided with stop symbol determination means capable of determining, for each reel 4, symbols (symbol rows) to be stopped on each reel 4 in the pseudo game as the second game.
In addition, the main controller 10 as a stop symbol determination means can determine a stop symbol of one of the reels 4 in relation to execution of one normal game (first game). When all the stop symbols in 4 are determined, a pseudo game can be executed.

In addition, in the pseudo-game, when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning of the replay role is pseudo-stopped, the pseudo-game is executed again, and the same operation is performed until the symbol combination other than the symbol combination corresponding to the winning of the replay role is pseudo-stopped. The process is repeated.

After the start of the game in which the pseudo-game can be executed, if the operation for pseudo-stopping the reels 4 is not performed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the reels 4 are automatically pseudo-stopped. Alternatively, if the operation to rotate the reel 4 again is not performed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the reel 4 is pseudo-stopped, the reel 4 may be automatically rotated again.
Also, in a game in which a pseudo-game can be executed, the first pseudo-game is executed and then the main game is executed. good too.

Furthermore, in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment, the result of the above-described pseudo-game determined in advance is announced (announced) in advance by the control of the main controller 10 and the sub-controller 20, as shown in FIG. It is possible to execute the advance notice production.

[Presentation effect of pseudo-game on the main display in the third embodiment]
FIG. 24 shows an effect image on the main display 8 when a notice effect is executed to notify (notice) the result of the pseudo game in advance when the 3-bet game is executed.
The notice effect is executed using a notice reel image for informing (notifying) the result of the pseudo-game in advance and a result derivation reel image for executing the pre-presentation for determining the result of the pseudo-game.

The result derivation reel image corresponds to one of the reels 4a to 4c, and has an image configuration in which all symbols are arranged vertically so that the pattern arrangement can be recognized, and a common bell combination is won. At times, it is possible to select and notify one of the symbol rows.

The notice reel image has an image configuration capable of displaying nine symbols stopped and displayed in the display window 6 corresponding to the reels 4a to 4c. It is possible to give advance notice of a pattern row (preview pattern) determined for each game.

FIG. 24 shows a state in which the announcement effect is being executed when the common bell combination has already been won once in the normal game and the common bell combination has been won for the second time.
First, as shown in FIG. 24(a), the common bell combination has already been won once. It is displayed on the left notice reel image 50a of 50.

That is, the result of the left reel 4a in the pseudo game is determined in advance by winning the first common bell combination in the normal game after the previous pseudo game is executed, and the previously determined result is the left notice. This is notified by the reel image 50a. In the symbol sequence predetermined this time, as shown in the figure, "Bell, BAR, Cherry" corresponding to the arrangement numbers 11 to 13 of the left reel 4a is displayed as the left notice reel image 50a.
In this state, only the result of the left reel 4a in the pseudo-game is still pre-determined, and the results of the other reels 4 are not pre-determined, so the middle notice reel image 50b and the right notice reel image 50c The area is blank.

After the first common bell win is won, the state waits for the next common bell win, and as shown in FIG. A middle result derivation reel image 51a used when winning a combination is displayed.
The middle result deriving reel image 51a is composed of image symbols having the same pattern arrangement as the middle reel 4b, and it is notified in advance that the result of the middle reel 4b by the pseudo game is determined by winning the next common bell combination. It will happen.

Then, when the second common bell combination is won, a frame image 51b is displayed on the intermediate result deriving reel image 51a, as shown in FIG. 24(a).
This frame image 51b is configured so that three symbol rows can be specifically displayed within the frame, and after repeating scrolling from top to bottom at a predetermined speed on the medium result derivation reel image 51a as shown in the figure, By deriving and displaying a predetermined pattern row in the frame when scrolling is stopped, a preliminary effect can be executed.

Next, FIG. 24(b) shows, after winning the common bell combination twice, the intermediate result deriving reel image 51a in the preliminary effect on the middle result deriving reel image 51a described above, when the frame image 51b stops. shows a case where the sequence numbers 4 to 6 of are derived and displayed.
In the preliminary effect on the intermediate result deriving reel image 51a, when the frame image 51b is stopped and the array numbers 4 to 6 of the intermediate result deriving reel image 51a are derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 24B, the middle reel 4b is displayed. "Replay Cherry Watermelon" corresponding to the array numbers 4 to 6 of the above is displayed as the middle notice reel image 50b as a result of the advance effect.

That is, by winning the common bell combination twice, the result of the middle reel 4b in the pseudo-game is determined in advance, and the result determined in advance is the middle notice reel image 50b consisting of "replay, cherry, watermelon". You will be notified.

After the winning of the second common bell combination, the system waits for the next common bell combination to be won in the same manner as the first time. As shown in FIG. The right result derivation reel image 52 used when winning the third common bell combination is displayed.
Then, when the third common bell combination is won, the result of the right reel 4c in the pseudo-game is determined in advance in the same manner as described above, and the pre-production is executed on the right result derivation reel image 52. As a result of the determination, the right notice reel image 50c is displayed.

In addition, when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning of the replay combination is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo-game, the pseudo-game is executed again. The advance notice effect for the re-lottery is not executed.

As described above, the result of the left reel 4a in the pseudo-game (pseudo stop result) is determined in advance by winning one common bell combination, and the pre-determined result is notified in advance by the left notice reel image 50a. , Similarly, by winning the common bell combination twice, the result of the middle reel 4b in the pseudo game is determined in advance, and this predetermined result is notified in advance by the middle notice reel image 50b. By winning the common bell combination, the result of the right reel 4c in the pseudo-game is determined in advance, and this predetermined result is notified in advance by the right notice reel image 50c.

As a result, by winning a common bell combination three times in total, the pseudo stop results of the respective reels 4a to 4c in the pseudo game are determined in advance, and all the pseudo stop results are notified in advance by the notice reel images 50a to 50c. This is what happens.
That is, the sub-controller 20 is a notifying means capable of notifying the pseudo stop symbols (symbol row) of the reels 4 determined by the main controller 10 for a predetermined pseudo-game before the predetermined pseudo-game is executed. It is prepared.
Then, in the next game after winning the third common bell combination, a pseudo-game is executed in the first half of the game, and the operation of the stop button 5 by the player causes the predetermined reels 4a to 4c. The pseudo stop result is derived and displayed (pseudo stop).

It should be noted that, in the main control device 10, when deriving and displaying the pseudo stop result when the stop button 5 is operated during the pseudo game, control is performed so as not to set the pull-in range for the stop control of the symbols described above. When the player performs a stop operation on all the reels 4 at any timing, predetermined symbols are drawn in and the reels 4 are pseudo-stopped.

In addition, the result of the pseudo-game is determined in the same manner as the result of the main game, and although the details will be described later, the lottery related to the granting of benefits is also performed so that the lottery will have the same tendency as the lottery of the main game. .
Therefore, as a result of the pseudo-game (pseudo-stop result), for example, if the same symbol combination as the winning cherry combination in the main game is derived, it is determined that the cherry role wins even in the pseudo-game. Then, a lottery for the corresponding privilege is carried out.

In other words, since the pseudo game and the main game are played a plurality of times in one game, it is possible to raise the player's expectation accordingly.
In addition, since the result of the pseudo-game is notified in advance, it is possible to increase the player's expectation over a long period before the pseudo-game is started.

In addition, since the result of the pseudo-game is determined in advance by winning a common bell role in the normal game, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the result of the normal game and increase the interest of the game. It can be improved.
In addition, since the right to execute one pseudo-game is granted by winning the common bell role a plurality of times, the pseudo-game is not yet executed even though the common bell role has been won a predetermined number of times. In , it is possible to increase the player's desire to play, and the operation rate of the gaming machine is improved accordingly, so that the gaming parlor side can also obtain merits.

In addition, the main controller 10 performs control related to awarding of benefits by associating the normal game (including the main game) and the pseudo-game with each other.
For example, when a high-probability state occurs based on the result of a normal game, lottery control of benefits based on the high-probability state is performed even in the pseudo-game.
Therefore, in the advance notice effect, if the intermediate result that can win a rare role is derived, before the final pseudo-game is executed, the player expects a high probability state in this game. It is possible to form a game progress in which the order is reversed.

In other words, conventionally, for example, in a game after transitioning to a high-probability state, the game progresses in such a way as to expect winning of a rare role. After that, it becomes possible to form a game progress expected from the transition to the high-probability state, and it is possible to realize a novel and highly interesting game that has never existed before.

The result of the pseudo-game may be determined in advance at the start of the game in which each common bell combination is won, or at the end of the game.
In addition, the determination of the result of the pseudo-game is already determined before the execution of the game in which the pseudo-game is executed, so it is performed in advance before the start of the game, and the determination result is used in the subsequent period. However, it may be determined at the start of the game in which the pseudo-game is actually executed or at the end of the pseudo-game (at the time of pseudo-stop).
As described above, the pseudo-game advance notice effect is executed on the main display device in the third embodiment.

[Lottery table used when executing a pseudo-game in the main control device in the third embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the control when the result of the pseudo-game is determined in advance by the main controller 10 in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described.
As described above, the result of the pseudo-game is pre-determined based on the winning of the common bell combination during the execution of the 3-bet game in the advantageous section before the execution of the pseudo-game, but this pre-determination control is always fixed. By using a plurality of pseudo-game tables instead of being executed systematically, the control is such that the pre-determined content changes for each pseudo-game table.

Specifically, the main controller 10 uses one of six pseudo-game tables, namely a weak table, a strong table, a serious table, a special 1 table, a special 2 table, and a special 3 table, as the pseudo game table. are used to pre-determine the results of the pseudo-game.
And, in each pseudo-game table, control is performed such that the pre-determined content of the pseudo-game related to the lottery of the privilege is changed.
For example, when the result of the pseudo-game is pre-determined by the strong table, control is performed so that the probability that the result corresponding to the rare hand is derived is higher than when it is performed by the weak table. of.

That is, the results of the pseudo-game with different advantages for the player are determined in advance for each pseudo-game table.
The pseudo-game table is determined by lottery in the main control device 10 each time the pseudo-game is executed, and the determined pseudo-game table is used to pre-determine the result of the next pseudo-game.

Furthermore, the main controller 10 sets a plurality of pseudo-game LVs (pseudo-game levels), and refers to the pseudo-game LV at that time when determining the pseudo-game table.
The pseudo game LV is a control state that affects the result of the pseudo game controlled by the main control device 10, and can be changed in four stages from 1 to 4, and the selection probability of the pseudo game table for each stage. are different.

Basically, it is set so that the higher the stage, the higher the probability that a pseudo-game table that is advantageous to the player will be selected. In this state, the pseudo-game result is derived advantageously for the player, such as the probability that the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined rare combination in the pseudo-game will be pseudo-stopped.
That is, the main controller 10 corresponds to the rare combination as the second specific symbol combination in the state (second state) controlled by LV4 rather than in the state (first state) controlled by LV1. The pseudo-game is controlled so that the probability that the symbol combination is derived increases.
Therefore, first, the pseudo-game LV at that time is determined, the current pseudo-game table is determined based on the determined pseudo-game LV, and the result of the pseudo-game is pre-determined using the determined pseudo-game table. It is done.

In addition, the pseudo-game LV is set to LV1, which is the initial value at the time of transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, and after that, the promotion lottery of the pseudo-game LV is performed as described later for each winning of the bell role during the pseudo-game. When the promotion lottery is won, the pseudo-game LV at that time is promoted to the pseudo-game LV of the next stage.
In addition, the pseudo-game LV is not demoted during the advantageous section, and until the transition from the advantageous section to the normal section due to the end of the AT state, unless promotion is performed, the pseudo-game LV at that time Although it is maintained, it may be demoted during the advantageous section when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

FIG. 25 is a pseudo-game table when the first common bell combination is won after the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, and when the first common bell combination is won after the previous pseudo-game is completed in the main controller 10. It shows a pseudo-game table determination table used when determining.

The lottery for the pseudo-game table is performed by lottery of random numbers for the pseudo-game table lottery by the main control device 10. In FIG. Indicates the number of random values, if determined.

As shown in FIG. 25, when the pseudo game LV is LV1, the weak table is selected with a probability of 192/256, the strong table is selected with a probability of 32/256, and the serious table is selected with a probability of 32/256. , the special 1 table is selected with a probability of 0/256, the special 2 table is selected with a probability of 0/256, and the special 3 table is selected with a probability of 0/256.

Also, when the pseudo-game LV is LV2, the weak table is selected with a probability of 136/256, the strong table is selected with a probability of 64/256, the serious table is selected with a probability of 32/256, and the probability of 8/256 is The special 1 table is selected with a probability of 8/256, the special 2 table is selected with a probability of 8/256, and the special 3 table is selected with a probability of 8/256.

In addition, when the pseudo-game LV is LV3, a weak table is selected with a probability of 48/256, a strong table is selected with a probability of 128/256, a serious table is selected with a probability of 32/256, and a probability of 16/256 is selected. The special 1 table is selected with a probability of 16/256, the special 2 table is selected with a probability of 16/256, and the special 3 table is selected with a probability of 16/256.

Also, if the pseudo-game LV is LV4, the weak table is selected with a probability of 0/256, the strong table is selected with a probability of 0/256, the Gachi table is selected with a probability of 32/256, and the 74/256 The special 1 table is selected with a probability of 75/256, the special 2 table is selected with a probability of 75/256, and the special 3 table is selected with a probability of 75/256.

Since the pseudo-game table is determined as described above, the higher the pseudo-game LV, the higher the probability of selection in the order of weak table → strong table → serious table → special 1 table → special 2 table → special 3 table. It becomes a trend.
Therefore, the pseudo-game table changes according to the pseudo-game LV, and it is possible to derive the result of the highly interesting pseudo-game.
Also, the higher the pseudo-game LV, the higher the probability that a pseudo-game table advantageous to the player will be selected, so it is possible to increase the player's expectation.

Although the details will be described later, the advantage to the player is basically higher in the order of weak table → strong table → serious table → special 1 table → special 2 table → special 3 table, so the pseudo game LV is high. The higher the number, the higher the probability that a pseudo-game table with a higher degree of advantage will be selected.
Also, the initial value of the pseudo-game LV is LV1, but it may be other than that. For example, if the winning combination at the time of transition to the advantageous section is a rare combination, the initial value of the pseudo-game LV is higher than LV1. may be set as
As described above, the pseudo game table selection process in the third embodiment is executed.

[Lottery table used when promoting the pseudo-game LV in the main control device in the third embodiment]
Next, referring to FIG. 26, the control when the pseudo-game LV is promoted by the main controller 10 in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described.

As described above, the pseudo-game LV is referred to when determining the pseudo-game table. When the symbol combination corresponding to the winning of the bell role in the game is pseudo-stopped, a lottery is executed to upgrade the pseudo-game LV stage to a higher stage.
For example, the pseudo-game LV is set to LV1 as an initial state due to the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, but when the pseudo-game is executed in this state and wins the bell role (pseudo-winning), the pseudo-game A promotion lottery for the game LV is performed, and when the promotion to the next higher stage is determined by winning the promotion lottery, the pseudo-game LV is promoted to LV2, and after that, a pseudo-game table that is more advantageous to the player is decided. It becomes a state where it is easy to be

FIG. 26 shows a pseudo-game LV lottery table used in the main controller 10 to promote the pseudo-game LV when winning the bell role during the pseudo-game executed during the normal game state.

The pseudo-game LV promotion lottery is performed by the main control device 10 by random number lottery for the pseudo-game LV lottery, and in FIG. It shows the number of random values when it is decided to promote and maintain .

First, FIG. 26(a) shows a case where the set value in the probability setting device 14 is any one of settings 1 to 3. FIG.
As shown in FIG. 26 (a), when the pseudo-game LV at that time (current) is LV1, when winning the bell role during the pseudo-game, it is maintained at LV1 with a probability of 222/256, and a probability of 32/256 A promotion lottery is held so that a player is promoted to LV2 with a probability of 1/256, promoted to LV3, and promoted to LV4 with a probability of 1/256.

Also, if the pseudo-game LV at that time (current) is LV2, when the bell role during the pseudo-game wins, there is a probability of 0/256, that is, the demotion to LV1 is not performed, and it is maintained at LV2 with a probability of 223/256. Then, a lottery for promotion is conducted such that the player is promoted to LV3 with a probability of 32/256 and promoted to LV4 with a probability of 1/256.

Also, when the pseudo-game LV at that time (current) is LV3, when the bell role during the pseudo-game wins, the probability of 0/256, that is, the demotion to LV1 and LV2 is not performed, and the probability of LV3 is 224/256. , and a promotion lottery is held to promote to LV4 with a probability of 32/256.

Next, FIG. 26(b) shows a case where the setting value in the probability setting device 14 is any one of settings 4-6.
As shown in FIG. 26(b), when the pseudo-game LV at that time (current) is LV1, when winning the bell role during the pseudo-game, it is maintained at LV1 with a probability of 204/256, and a probability of 48/256. A lottery for promotion is held such that the player is promoted to LV2 with a probability of 2/256, promoted to LV3, and promoted to LV4 with a probability of 2/256.

Also, if the pseudo-game LV at that time (current) is LV2, when the bell role during the pseudo-game wins, there is a probability of 0/256, that is, the demotion to LV1 is not performed, and it is maintained at LV2 with a probability of 206/256. A lottery for promotion is held so that the player is promoted to LV3 with a probability of 48/256 and promoted to LV4 with a probability of 2/256.

Also, if the pseudo-game LV at that time (current) is LV3, when the bell role during the pseudo-game wins, there is a probability of 0/256, that is, the demotion to LV1 and LV2 is not performed, and LV3 with a probability of 208/256 A promotion lottery will be held so that the level will be maintained at 48/256 with a probability of 48/256.

Since the pseudo-game LV promotion lottery is performed as described above, the higher the set value in the probability setting device 14, the higher the probability that the pseudo-game LV will be promoted. stage).
Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player by promoting the pseudo-game LV.
In addition, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is relatively high, it is possible to increase the player's expectation, and by changing the set value in the probability setting device 14, a pseudo-game Since it is possible to adjust the promotion rate of LV, it is possible to operate efficiently in the amusement arcade.

In addition, the promotion lottery of the pseudo-game LV is executed with the determination of the symbol combination corresponding to the winning of the bell role during the pseudo-game, so when the pseudo-game is executed, the game for the promotion of the pseudo-game LV It is possible to raise people's expectations.

In addition, if the pseudo-game LV is LV4, the promotion lottery is not performed, but even if it is LV4, a lottery corresponding to the promotion lottery is performed, and if the lottery is won By giving a predetermined privilege (for example, a pseudo-bonus state or AT state) to , the dissatisfaction of the player at the time of winning the common bell role when the pseudo-game LV is LV4 may be reduced.
As described above, the pseudo-game LV promotion lottery in the third embodiment is executed.

[Decision processing of pseudo stop symbol sequence when weak table is used in main controller in the third embodiment]
Next, when each pseudo-game table is used, the result of the pseudo-game, that is, the decision control of the symbol combination derived when the reels 4 are pseudo-stopped during the game will be described with reference to FIGS.

First, FIG. 27 shows, in a state in which a weak table is selected as a pseudo-game table, a symbol row to be pseudo-stopped on each reel 4 in a pseudo-game, which is determined in advance when a common bell combination is won, and each symbol row. shows the selection probability of

FIG. 27(a) shows a row of symbols that can be quasi-stopped on each reel 4 in a quasi-game when using a weak table. It is an option of the row, and each pattern in the frame becomes a pattern row displayed in the display window 6 at the time of pseudo stop in the pseudo game. FIG. 27(b) shows the selection probability values of the weak table when selecting the symbol row (frames 1 to 4) on each reel 4 when the common bell combination is won.

Choices that can be selected as a result of the pseudo-game are only four types of symbol rows for each reel 4 as shown, and other symbol rows cannot be selected.
Therefore, the result of the pseudo-game is derived by the combination of the above-described four kinds of predetermined symbol rows, and these options are set so that each pseudo-game table has a characteristic, and it is weak. When the table is selected, only the replay combination and the bell combination corresponding to the first specific symbol combination can be awarded (pseudo winning), and the other combinations are non-winning options.

The lottery for selecting the symbol row on each reel 4 is performed by lottery of random numbers for the symbol row lottery by the main controller 10. In FIGS. , and indicates the number of random numbers when each symbol row is selected.

As shown in FIGS. 27(a) and (b), when the weak table is selected as the pseudo-game table, when the first common bell combination is won, the symbol row at the time of pseudo-stop of the left reel 4a in the pseudo-game , the left 1 frame (“Replay Bell, Blue 7”) is selected with a probability of 64/256, the left 2 frames (“Replay Bell, White 7”) are selected with a probability of 64/256, and the left 3 A slot (“Replay Bell BAR”) is selected with a probability of 64/256, and a left 4 slot (“Replay Bell Blank”) is selected with a probability of 64/256.

Similarly, when the second common bell combination is won, the middle 1 frame (“Bell Replay Cherry”) is selected with a probability of 64/256 as the pattern row at the time of pseudo stop of the middle reel 4b in the pseudo game, The middle 2 slots ("Red 7 Bell Replay") are selected with a probability of 64/256, the middle 3 slots ("Bell Replay Cherry") are selected with a probability of 64/256, and the middle 4 slots (" BAR Bell Replay") is selected with a probability of 64/256.

Similarly, when the third common bell combination is won, the right 1 frame (“Blue 7 Bell Replay”) is selected with a probability of 64/256 as the pattern row when the right reel 4c is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo-game. , the right 2 frames (“Bell Replay Watermelon”) are selected with a probability of 64/256, the right 3 frames (“White 7 Bell Replay”) are selected with a probability of 64/256, and the right 4 frames ( "Replay Blank Bell") is selected with a probability of 64/256.

The symbol row of each reel 4 selected as described above is determined in advance as a symbol combination (result) at the time of pseudo-stop in the pseudo-game.
For example, when the left 1 frame is selected for the left reel 4a, the middle 2 frames are selected for the middle reel 4b, and the right 3 frames are selected for the right reel 4c, as a result of the pseudo-game, "Bell "Bell, Bell" is stopped, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning of the Bell role is determined in advance.

Further, the determined symbol combination of the pseudo-game is displayed (advance) in advance on the main display 8 as the notice reel image at the time of the above-mentioned notice effect.
Then, in the next game in which the symbol combination of the pseudo-game is predetermined, the pseudo-game is actually executed and the predetermined symbol combination is stopped when the reels 4 are pseudo-stopped.

In addition, during the pseudo-game using each pseudo-game table, if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning of the replay combination is pseudo-stopped (pseudo-win), the pseudo-game will be executed again, but in this case, , When the re-pseudo-game is determined, the pseudo-game table selection process is executed again, and the pseudo-stopped symbol row on each reel 4 is re-determined using the re-selected pseudo-game table.

It should be noted that, in this case, redetermining of symbol rows to be pseudo-stopped on each reel 4 is performed at the time of re-determining the pseudo-game.
In addition, in order to prevent the execution of a large number of re-pseudo-games, when the re-pseudo-game reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), forcibly select a pseudo-game table in which the replay role cannot be won. Alternatively, a predetermined privilege (for example, CZ status) may be granted at that time.

As described above, since the result of the pseudo-game is determined in the state in which the weak table is selected, in the state in which the weak table is selected, only either the bell hand or the replay hand wins (pseudo prize). The result of the pseudo-game will be determined as much as possible.
Therefore, when the weak table is selected, the probability that a pseudo-game result that is relatively disadvantageous to the player is derived increases.

Further, even when the weak table is selected, if the replay combination wins (pseudo winning) in the pseudo game, the pseudo game table is drawn again and the pseudo game is executed again, so the weak table is selected. To prevent a player's expectation from being lowered even in a state where a weak table is selected, because there is a possibility that a pseudo-game is executed again using a pseudo-game table with a higher degree of advantage. It becomes possible.
As described above, the result of the pseudo game when the weak table is selected in the third embodiment is determined.

[Determination processing of pseudo stop symbol sequence when using strong table in main controller in the third embodiment]
Next, FIG. 28 shows, in a state in which a strong table is selected as a pseudo-game table, a symbol row to be pseudo-stopped on each reel 4 in a pseudo-game, which is determined in advance when a common bell combination is won, and each symbol. It shows the selection probability of the column.

FIG. 28(a) shows symbol rows that can be simulatedly stopped on each reel 4 in a simulated game when using a strong table. The frame is an option for the symbol row at the time of pseudo stop.
Also, when using the strong table, unlike when using the weak table, the left strong table for the left reel 4a shown in FIG. When the first common bell is won, a lottery is held using the left strong table, and when the second and third common bells are won, the middle right table is used. A lottery will be held.

The options that can be selected as a result of the pseudo-game when using the strong table are only three types of symbol rows for each reel 4 as shown in FIG. 28(a), and other symbol rows cannot be selected. ing.
Therefore, in the state where the strong table is selected, all combinations (including loss) other than the bonus combination are options for winning (pseudo winning), and the rare combination as the second specific symbol combination wins a prize. The symbol combination corresponding to can also be pseudo-stopped.

As shown in FIGS. 28(a) and (b), when the strong table is selected as the pseudo-game table, a lottery using the left-strong table is performed when the first common bell combination is won, and the pseudo-game As the symbol row at the time of pseudo stop of the left reel 4a, the left 1 frame ("Watermelon Replay Bell") is selected with a probability of 96/256, and the left 2 frames ("Bell BAR Cherry") are selected with a probability of 64/256. , and the left three frames (“Blank, Bell, Watermelon”) are selected with a probability of 96/256.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 28(a) and (c), when the second common bell combination is won, a lottery is performed using a medium-right strong table, and the pattern row at the time of pseudo-stop of the medium reel 4b in the pseudo-game , the middle 1 frame ("Watermelon, Red 7, Bell") is selected with a probability of 86/256, the middle 2 frames ("White 7, Watermelon, White 7") are selected with a probability of 85/256, and the middle Three slots (“Replay Cherry Watermelon”) are selected with a probability of 85/256.

Similarly, when the third common bell is won, a lottery using the middle right table is performed, and the right 1 frame ("Watermelon, Red 7, Blue 7") was selected with a probability of 86/256, the right two boxes ("Replay Watermelon Cherry") were selected with a probability of 85/256, and the right three boxes ("Bell Replay Watermelon") were selected with a probability of 85 selected with a probability of /256.

The symbol row of each reel 4 selected as described above is determined in advance as a symbol combination (result) at the time of pseudo-stop in the pseudo-game.
For example, when the left 1 frame is selected for the left reel 4a, the middle 1 frame is selected for the middle reel 4b, and the right 1 frame is selected for the right reel 4c, as a result of the pseudo game "Watermelon, watermelon, watermelon" stops on the upper line, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning of the role of watermelon is determined in advance.

Further, the determined symbol combination of the pseudo-game is displayed (advance) in advance on the main display 8 as the notice reel image at the time of the above-mentioned notice effect.
Then, in the next game in which the symbol combination of the pseudo-game is predetermined, the pseudo-game is actually executed and the predetermined symbol combination is stopped when the reels 4 are pseudo-stopped.

As described above, since the result of the pseudo-game is determined in the state where the strong table is selected, in the state where the strong table is selected, all the combinations excluding the bonus combination can be simulated. The result of the game will be determined.
Therefore, when the strong table is selected, as a result of the pseudo-game, there is a possibility of winning the role of cherry or pseudo-winning of the role of watermelon. It is possible to increase the probability that the result of the pseudo-game that is advantageous to the player will be derived, and to increase the player's expectation.

In addition, as a result of the pseudo-game, when the role of cherry or the role of watermelon is pseudo-winning, a promotion lottery for the pseudo-game LV may be performed.
As described above, the result of the pseudo game when the strong table in the third embodiment is selected is determined.

[Decision processing of pseudo stop symbol sequence when using Gachi table in main controller in the third embodiment]
Next, FIG. 29 shows, in a state where the GACHI table is selected as a pseudo-game table, the symbol row to be pseudo-stopped on each reel 4 in the pseudo-game, which is determined in advance when the common bell combination is won, and each symbol. It shows the selection probability of the column.

FIG. 29(a) shows a symbol row that can be simulatedly stopped on each reel 4 in a pseudo game when using a serious table, and unlike when using a weak table and a strong table, only a specific symbol row is set as an option Instead, a symbol row formed by all the symbols on each reel 4 is an option.
Therefore, when drawing a lottery for the pattern row, a lottery for each pattern is performed instead of a lottery for each frame, and a pattern row in which the winning pattern is positioned at the upper stage in the display window 6 is selected as a result of the pseudo-game. It has become.

Also, when using the Gachi table, a common Gachi table is used for each reel 4 shown in FIG. .
In addition, since all the symbol rows displayed on each reel 4 are set as shown in FIG. In this state, all roles (including losing) can be pseudo-wins.

As shown in FIGS. 29(a) and (b), when the gachi table is selected as the pseudo-game table, a lottery using the gachi table is performed when winning the common bell role for the first to third times, and each Symbols 1 to 16 are selected with a probability of 13/256, and symbols 17 to 20 are selected with a probability of 12/256 as symbols to be pseudo-stopped on the upper stage of the reel 4 .

Therefore, for example, when one symbol is selected for the left reel 4a, "Replay Bell Blue 7" is pseudo-stopped as the symbol row for the left reel 4a, and one symbol is selected for the middle reel 4b. When the symbol row of the middle reel 4b is "blank, watermelon, blue 7", the symbol row of the right reel 4c is "blank, watermelon, blue 7". The result of the pseudo-game is determined in advance such that "Watermelon, Red 7, Blue 7" is pseudo-stopped.

The symbol row of each reel 4 selected as described above is determined in advance as a symbol combination (result) at the time of pseudo-stop in the pseudo-game.
Therefore, when using the Gachi table, it is possible to pseudo-stop the combination of symbols to which direct benefits (CZ status, pseudo-bonus status, AT status, etc.) are awarded.

For example, two symbols ("bell, blue 7, red 7" symbol row) are selected for the left reel 4a, and two symbols ("watermelon, blue 7, bell" symbol row) are selected for the middle reel 4b. If two symbols ("Red 7/Blue 7/Bell" symbol row) are selected for the right reel 4c, the middle line will have a symbol combination of "Blue 7/Blue 7/Blue 7". It is also possible to make a pseudo-stop and establish a winning (pseudo-winning) in a blue 7 pseudo-bonus state.

Similarly, when the symbol combination of "Red 7, Red 7, Red 7" is pseudo-stopped, a prize in the Red 7 pseudo bonus state (pseudo prize) is established, and the symbol combination of "White 7, White 7, White 7" is established. If the symbol combination is pseudo-stopped, an AT state win (pseudo win) is established, and if the “BAR BAR BAR” symbol combination is pseudo-stopped, a CZ state win (pseudo win) is established. do.
That is, in a normal game, benefits such as transition to a pseudo-bonus state are granted based on the result of the pseudo-game even if the lottery for granting benefits (CZ state, pseudo-bonus state, AT state, etc.) is not won. Opportunity is obtained.

In addition, although the details will be described later, 7 symbols ("bell, white 7, bell" symbol row) are selected for the left reel 4a, and 11 symbols ("white 7, watermelon, white 7") are selected for the middle reel 4b. symbol row) is selected, and 12 symbols ("Cherry/White 7/Bell" symbol row) are selected for the right reel 4c. A special judgment different from winning a prize is made.
Similarly, when 17 symbols ("Bell, Blank, Bell" symbol row) are selected for the left reel 4a, and a symbol row that does not allow winning the bell combination is selected for the other reel 4, a special symbol combination is selected. is determined as
Similarly, when 5 symbols ("Replay, BAR, Replay" symbol row) are selected for the right reel 4c and a symbol row that cannot win a replay combination is selected for the other reel 4, a special symbol combination is also selected. is determined as

Furthermore, when 13 symbols ("BAR, cherry, watermelon" symbol row) are selected for the left reel 4a, regardless of the other symbol rows of the reel 4, the so-called mid-level cherry stops and a normal winning combination is won. A special judgment is made that is different from
In addition, since the special symbol combination and the symbol combination of the middle cherry can be simulated and stopped at the same time during one simulated game, in that case, priority is given according to the size of the benefit (advantage) to be obtained. Therefore, a lottery may be drawn for any one of the symbol combinations, or both may be executed.

Similarly, at the same time as the pseudo-stop of the special symbol combination and the middle cherry symbol combination, there are cases where a symbol combination ("white 7, white 7, white 7" etc.) is formed in which the award of the privilege is confirmed, but in that case Although it is preferable to preferentially determine the symbol combination in which the grant of benefits is determined, for example, if the symbol combination of the middle cherry and the symbol combination of "BAR BAR BAR" are pseudo-stopped at the same time, both lotteries may be executed.

Further, the determined symbol combination of the pseudo-game is displayed (advance) in advance on the main display 8 as the notice reel image at the time of the above-mentioned notice effect.
Then, in the next game in which the symbol combination of the pseudo-game is predetermined, the pseudo-game is actually executed and the predetermined symbol combination is stopped when the reels 4 are pseudo-stopped.

As described above, since the result of the pseudo-game is determined in the state where the serious table is selected, in the state where the serious table is selected, all the set combinations are simulated so that they can be won. The result of the game will be determined.
Therefore, when the serious table is selected, as a result of the pseudo-game, there is a possibility of pseudo-winning of rare roles such as pseudo-winning of cherry role and watermelon role, so that the expectation of the player is increased. is possible.

In addition, when a serious table is selected, all the symbols (symbol rows) on each reel 4 can be simulatedly stopped in the pseudo game, so that the results of the pseudo game can be further diversified, and the game can be improved. It becomes possible to improve interest.

In addition, when the serious table is selected, as a result of the pseudo-game, there is a possibility of granting benefits other than small wins such as transition to a pseudo-bonus state. Even if the lottery is not won, it is possible to shift to a pseudo-bonus state in a pseudo-game, and it is possible to greatly increase the player's expectation.

In addition, when the serious table is selected, a symbol row capable of forming a special symbol combination is also selected, so that the player's expectation can be further enhanced.
Furthermore, when the serious table is selected, a so-called middle stage cherry is a symbol combination including the symbol row of "BAR, cherry, and watermelon" in the display window 6 of the left reel 4a, which cannot be stopped in a normal game. Since the symbol row can also be stopped, it is possible to execute a novel game that cannot be realized in a normal game, and it is possible to execute a highly entertaining game.

In addition, when the serious table is selected, the lottery is performed so that all the symbol rows are almost evenly stopped in a pseudo-stop, but the lottery may not be evenly distributed. The selection rate for the symbol row may be made lower or higher than other symbol rows.
Further, when the real table is selected, if the replay combination wins a pseudo prize in the pseudo game, it is preferable to reselect the pseudo game table whose advantage is set to the real table or higher in the re-pseudo game.
As described above, the result of the pseudo game when the serious table in the third embodiment is selected is determined.

[Determination process of pseudo stop symbol sequence when special table 1 is used in main controller in the third embodiment]
Next, FIG. 30 shows, in a state where the special 1 table is selected as a pseudo-game table, a pattern row to be pseudo-stopped on each reel 4 in a pseudo-game, which is determined in advance when a common bell combination is won, and each It shows the selection probability of the symbol row.

FIG. 30(a) shows a pattern row that can be simulatedly stopped on each reel 4 in a simulated game when using a special 1 table. It is an option of the pattern row, and each pattern in the frame becomes a pattern row displayed in the display window 6 at the time of pseudo stop in the pseudo game. FIG. 30(b) shows each selection probability value of the special 1 table when selecting the symbol row (frames 1 to 3) on each reel 4 when the common bell combination is won.

Also, when using the special 1 table, a common special 1 table is used for each reel 4 shown in FIG. is done.

In addition, the options that can be selected as a result of the pseudo-game when using one special table are only three types of symbol rows for each reel 4, as shown in FIG. 30(a). It is set so that some patterns overlap within the range of the upper and lower two patterns.
Therefore, as shown in the figure, for example, in the left reel 4a, the left 1 frame is "Bell, Blue 7, Red 7", the left 2 frames are "Blue 7, Red 7, Watermelon", and the left 3 frames are Each of "red 7, watermelon, and replay" is set as a symbol row, and the symbol row including the symbol "red 7" is always an option. The symbol row including the symbol of "Red 7" becomes the option.
In other words, when the special 1 table is selected, the probability that the symbol combination of "red 7, red 7, red 7" that can generate the red 7 pseudo-bonus state will be pseudo-stopped is high.
Also, in the state where the special 1 table is selected, it is also possible to win false prizes for losing and watermelon roles.

As shown in FIGS. 30(a) and 30(b), when the special 1 table is selected as the pseudo-game table, when the first common bell combination is won, the left reel 4a in the pseudo-game pattern at the time of pseudo-stop As columns, the left 1 frame (“Bell, Blue 7, Red 7”) is selected with a probability of 86/256, and the left 2 frames (“Blue 7, Red 7, Watermelon”) are selected with a probability of 85/256. , the left 3 frames (“Red 7, Watermelon, Replay”) are selected with a probability of 85/256.

Similarly, when the second common bell combination is won, the middle 1 frame (“Cherry/Watermelon/Red 7”) is selected with a probability of 86/256 as the pattern row when the middle reel 4b is stopped in the pseudo game. , the middle 2 frames (“Watermelon/Red 7/Bell”) are selected with a probability of 85/256, and the middle 3 frames (“Red 7/Bell/Replay”) are selected with a probability of 85/256.

Similarly, when the third common bell combination is won, the right 1 frame ("Replay, Watermelon, Red 7") is selected with a probability of 86/256 as the pattern row at the time of pseudo stop of the right reel 4c in the pseudo game. , the right two frames (“watermelon, red 7, blue 7”) are selected with a probability of 85/256, and the right three frames (“red 7, blue 7, bell”) are selected with a probability of 85/256.

The symbol row of each reel 4 selected as described above is determined in advance as a symbol combination (result) at the time of pseudo-stop in the pseudo-game.
For example, when the left 2 frames are selected for the left reel 4a, the middle 2 frames are selected for the middle reel 4b, and the right 2 frames are selected for the right reel 4c, as a result of the pseudo-game "Red 7, Red 7, Red 7" are stopped on the middle line, and the symbol combination corresponding to the red 7 pseudo-bonus state is determined in advance.

Therefore, when using the special 1 table, you can get the opportunity to move directly to the red 7 pseudo-bonus state based on the results of the pseudo-game, even if you do not win the pseudo-bonus state lottery in the normal game, just like when using the Gachi table. It is possible.

Further, the determined symbol combination of the pseudo-game is displayed (advance) in advance on the main display 8 as the notice reel image at the time of the above-mentioned notice effect.
Then, in the next game in which the symbol combination of the pseudo-game is predetermined, the pseudo-game is actually executed and the predetermined symbol combination is stopped when the reels 4 are pseudo-stopped.

As described above, the result of the pseudo-game is determined when the special 1 table is selected. Therefore, when the special 1 table is selected, "Red 7 symbol combination of "red 7, red 7, red 7" which can generate a red 7 pseudo-bonus state is likely to be pseudo-stopped.
Therefore, when the special 1 table is selected, the probability of occurrence of the red 7 pseudo-bonus state becomes extremely high, and the player's expectation can be further heightened.

In addition, when the special 1 table is selected, it is possible to make a pseudo-win for the watermelon role, so that even if the red 7 pseudo-bonus state does not occur, the player's expectation can be enhanced.
As described above, the result of the pseudo game when the special 1 table is selected in the third embodiment is determined.

[Determination processing of pseudo stop symbol sequence when special 2 table is used in main controller in the third embodiment]
Next, FIG. 31 shows, in a state in which the special 2 table is selected as the pseudo-game table, the symbol row to be pseudo-stopped on each reel 4 in the pseudo-game, which is determined in advance when the common bell combination is won, and each It shows the selection probability of the symbol row.

FIG. 31(a) shows a symbol row that can be simulatedly stopped on each reel 4 in a simulated game when using a special 2 table. It is an option of the pattern row, and each pattern in the frame becomes a pattern row displayed in the display window 6 at the time of pseudo stop in the pseudo game. FIG. 31(b) shows the selection probability values of the special 2 tables when selecting the symbol row (frames 1 to 3) on each reel 4 when the common bell combination is won.

Also, when the special 2 table is used, a common special 2 table is used for each reel 4 as shown in FIG. is done.

Also, the options that can be selected as a result of the pseudo game when using the special 2 table are only 3 types of symbol rows for each reel 4 as shown in FIG. It is set so that some patterns overlap within the range of the upper and lower two patterns.
Therefore, as shown in the figure, for example, in the left reel 4a, "Replay Bell Blue 7" is in the left 1 frame, "Bell Blue 7 Red 7" is in the left 2 frames, and "Bell Blue 7 Red 7" is in the left 3 frames. Blue 7, Red 7, and Watermelon" are set as symbol rows, and the symbol row including the symbol "Blue 7" is always an option. The symbol row including the symbol of "blue 7" is the option.
In other words, when the special 2 table is selected, the probability that the symbol combination of "blue 7, blue 7, blue 7" that can generate the blue 7 pseudo bonus state will be pseudo-stopped is high.
In addition, in the state where the special 2 table is selected, in addition to losing, it is also possible to win pseudo-wins of Bell and Watermelon.

As shown in FIGS. 31(a) and 31(b), when the special 2 table is selected as the pseudo-game table, when the first common bell combination is won, the left reel 4a in the pseudo-game is a pattern at the time of pseudo-stop. As a column, the left 1 frame (“Replay, Bell, Blue 7”) is selected with a probability of 86/256, and the left 2 frames (“Bell, Blue 7, Red 7”) are selected with a probability of 85/256, The left three frames (“7 blue, 7 red, and watermelon”) are selected with a probability of 85/256.

Similarly, when the second common bell combination is won, the middle 1 frame (“blank, watermelon, blue 7”) is selected with a probability of 86/256 as the pattern row at the time of pseudo stop of the middle reel 4b in the pseudo game. , the middle 2 frames (“Watermelon/Blue 7/Bell”) are selected with a probability of 85/256, and the middle 3 frames (“Blue 7/Bell/Replay”) are selected with a probability of 85/256.

Similarly, when the third common bell combination is won, the right frame ("watermelon, red 7, blue 7") is selected with a probability of 86/256 as the symbol row when the right reel 4c is stopped in the pseudo game. , the right two frames (“Red 7, Blue 7, Bell”) are selected with a probability of 85/256, and the right three frames (“Blue 7, Bell, Replay”) are selected with a probability of 85/256.

The symbol row of each reel 4 selected as described above is determined in advance as a symbol combination (result) at the time of pseudo-stop in the pseudo-game.
For example, when the left 2 frames are selected for the left reel 4a, the middle 2 frames are selected for the middle reel 4b, and the right 2 frames are selected for the right reel 4c, as a result of the pseudo-game "Blue 7, Blue 7, Blue 7" are stopped on the middle line, and the symbol combination corresponding to the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state is determined in advance.

Further, the determined symbol combination of the pseudo-game is displayed (advance) in advance on the main display 8 as the notice reel image at the time of the above-mentioned notice effect.
Then, in the next game in which the symbol combination of the pseudo-game is predetermined, the pseudo-game is actually executed and the predetermined symbol combination is stopped when the reels 4 are pseudo-stopped.

As described above, the result of the pseudo-game is determined when the special table 2 is selected. ' symbol is included, and the probability that the symbol combination of 'blue 7/blue 7/blue 7', which can generate the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state, will be pseudo-stopped is high.
Therefore, when the special 2 table is selected, the probability of occurrence of the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state becomes extremely high, and the player's expectation can be further heightened.

Although the details will be described later, the advantage to the player is set higher in the Blue 7 pseudo-bonus state than in the Red 7 pseudo-bonus state. It is possible to heighten the expectation of the player more than when the table is selected.

In addition, when the special 2 table is selected, it is possible to make a pseudo-win for the role of watermelon. Since it is also possible to win a winning combination, it is possible to raise the expectation of the player as compared with the case where the special 1 table is selected.
As described above, the result of the pseudo-game is determined when the special 2 table in the third embodiment is selected.

[Determination processing of pseudo stop symbol sequence when special 3 table is used in main controller in the third embodiment]
Next, FIG. 32 shows, in a state where the special 3 table is selected as the pseudo-game table, the symbol row to be pseudo-stopped on each reel 4 in the pseudo-game, which is determined in advance when the common bell combination is won, and each It shows the selection probability of the symbol row.

FIG. 32(a) shows a pattern row that can be simulatedly stopped on each reel 4 in a simulated game when using a special 3 table, and the frames 1 to 3 shown on each reel 4 are simulated when stopped. It is an option of the pattern row, and each pattern in the frame becomes a pattern row displayed in the display window 6 at the time of pseudo stop in the pseudo game.

Also, FIG. 32(b) shows left and right special 3 tables used when selecting symbol rows (frames 1 to 3) on the left reel 4a and the right reel 4c when winning the first and third common bell combinations. FIG. 32(c) shows a middle special 3 table used when selecting a symbol row (frames 1 and 2) on the middle reel 4b when the second common bell combination is won.
Therefore, when the special 3 table is used, there are only two types (two frames) of symbol rows corresponding to the middle reel 4b.

In addition, the options that can be selected as a result of the pseudo game when using the special 3 tables are only 2 to 3 types of symbol rows for each reel 4, as shown in FIG. 32(a). It is set so that some patterns overlap within the range of a predetermined number of patterns on both sides.
Therefore, as shown in the figure, for example, in the left reel 4a, "Replay Bell White 7" is displayed in the left two frames, "Bell White 7 Bell" is displayed in the left two frames, and "White White 7" is displayed in the left three frames. 7, Bell, and Watermelon” are set as symbol rows, and the symbol row including the symbol “White 7” is always an option. The symbol row including the symbol "7" is the option.

In other words, when the special 3 table is selected, the probability that the symbol combination of "white 7, white 7, white 7" corresponding to the occurrence of the AT state will be falsely stopped is high.
Also, in the state where the special 3 table is selected, in addition to the loss, a pseudo winning of the watermelon role is also possible.

As shown in FIGS. 32(a) and 32(b), when the special 3 table is selected as the pseudo game table, a lottery using the left and right special 3 tables is performed when the common bell combination is won for the first time. As the pattern row when the left reel 4a is pseudo-stopped in the game, the left 1 frame (“replay, bell, white 7”) is selected with a probability of 86/256, and the left 2 frames (“bell, white 7, bell”) are selected. is selected with a probability of 85/256, and the left three frames ("white 7, bell, watermelon") are selected with a probability of 85/256.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 32(a) and (c), when the special 3 table is selected as the pseudo-game table, a lottery using the medium special 3 table is performed when the common bell combination is won for the second time. , As a pattern row at the time of pseudo stop of the middle reel 4b in the pseudo game, the middle 1 frame ("Replay, White 7, Watermelon") is selected with a probability of 128/256, and the middle 2 frames ("White, Watermelon, White 7 ”) is selected with a probability of 128/256.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 32(a) and (b), when the special 3 table is selected as the pseudo game table, a lottery using the left and right special 3 tables is performed when the common bell combination is won for the third time. , Right 1 frame (“Watermelon, Cherry, White 7”) is selected with a probability of 86/256 as a symbol row at the time of pseudo stop of the right reel 4c in the pseudo game, and right 2 frames (“Cherry, White 7, Bell ”) is selected with a probability of 85/256, and the right three frames (“white 7, bell, replay”) are selected with a probability of 85/256.

The symbol row of each reel 4 selected as described above is determined in advance as a symbol combination (result) at the time of pseudo-stop in the pseudo-game.
For example, when the left 2 frames are selected for the left reel 4a, the middle 1 frame is selected for the middle reel 4b, and the right 2 frames are selected for the right reel 4c, as a result of the pseudo-game "White 7, White 7, White 7" stops on the middle line, and the symbol combination corresponding to the AT state is determined in advance.

In addition, the left two frames ("Bell, White 7, Bell" symbol row) are selected for the left reel 4a, and the middle two frames ("White 7, Watermelon, White 7" symbol row) are selected for the middle reel 4b. ) is selected, and the right two frames (“Cherry/White 7/Bell” symbol row) are selected for the right reel 4c, the special symbol combination is stopped, which is different from the winning of a normal winning combination. A special judgment is made.

Further, the determined symbol combination of the pseudo-game is displayed (advance) in advance on the main display 8 as the notice reel image at the time of the above-mentioned notice effect.
Then, in the next game in which the symbol combination of the pseudo-game is predetermined, the pseudo-game is actually executed and the predetermined symbol combination is stopped when the reels 4 are pseudo-stopped.

As described above, since the result of the pseudo-game is determined in the state where the special 3 table is selected, in the state where the special 3 table is selected, "White 7" is always selected regardless of which symbol row is selected. ' symbol is included, and the probability that the symbol combination of 'white 7, white 7, white 7', which can generate an AT state, will be falsely stopped is high.
Therefore, when the special 3 table is selected, the possibility of occurrence of the AT state becomes extremely high, and the expectation of the player can be greatly enhanced.

In addition, since the advantage to the player is generally set higher in the AT state than in the pseudo-bonus state, when the special 3 table is selected, the special 1 table and the special 2 table are selected. Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's expectation more than in the case where it is set.

In addition, when the serious table is selected, a symbol row capable of forming a special symbol combination is also selected, so that the player's expectation can be further enhanced.
In addition, when the special 3 table is selected, it is possible to make a pseudo-win for the role of watermelon, so even if the AT state does not occur, the player's expectation can be heightened, and the player's expectation can be increased. It is possible to raise it.
As described above, the result of the pseudo game when the special 3 table is selected in the third embodiment is determined.

[Lottery table used when determining a high probability state in the main controller in the third embodiment]
Next, a high-probability state in which a privilege lottery is executed with a high probability will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 33 shows how main controller 10 determines the transition to the high probability state when a predetermined rare combination (cherry combination, watermelon combination) is won in the normal probability state and the number of continuous games in the high probability state. shows a high-probability lottery table used in

In the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment, under the control of the main controller 10, when a cherry or watermelon combination is won in the normal game state, a lottery for transition to a high-probability state is executed, and the transition lottery is won. In this case, a high probability state can occur.
In the normal game in the high probability state, the lottery of benefits such as the CZ state, the pseudo-bonus state, the AT state, etc. is executed at a higher probability than in the normal probability state.
Furthermore, the high-probability state is also reflected in the pseudo-game, and the lottery of benefits is executed with a high probability even in the pseudo-game.
It should be noted that the transition to the high-probability state is performed from the start of the next game after the game in which the rare combination has been won. Therefore, after the special lottery for winning a rare combination is once performed in the normal probability state, the state shifts to the high probability state from the start of the next game.

The lottery for transition to the high-probability state is performed by random number lottery for the high-probability transition lottery by the main controller 10. In FIG. It shows the number of random values when is determined.

First, FIG. 33(a) shows a high-probability lottery table used when a cherry combination is won in a normal game in the normal probability state.
As shown in FIG. 33(a), when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 1, when the cherry hand is won, the probability of losing is 232/256, that is, the normal probability state is maintained. A high probability state of continuing 10 games occurs with a probability of 18/256, a high probability state of continuing 20 games occurs with a probability of 4/256, and a high probability state of continuing 30 games occurs with a probability of 2/256. A lottery will be held.

Similarly, if the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 2, when the cherry hand is won, there is a 220/256 probability of losing, that is, the normal probability state is maintained, and 10 with a 24/256 probability. A lottery is performed such that a high probability state of continuing the game occurs, a high probability state of continuing 20 games occurs with a probability of 10/256, and a high probability state of continuing 30 games occurs with a probability of 2/256.

Similarly, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 3, when the cherry hand is won, the probability of losing is 232/256, that is, the normal probability state is maintained, and the probability of 10 is maintained at 16/256. A lottery is performed such that a high probability state of continuing games occurs, a high probability state of continuing 20 games occurs with a probability of 6/256, and a high probability state of continuing 30 games occurs with a probability of 2/256.

Similarly, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 4, when the cherry hand is won, the probability of losing is 220/256, that is, the normal probability state is maintained, and the probability of 22/256 is 10. A lottery is performed such that a high probability state of continuing the game occurs, a high probability state of continuing 20 games occurs with a probability of 10/256, and a high probability state of continuing 30 games occurs with a probability of 4/256.

Similarly, if the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 5, there is a 232/256 probability of losing when the cherry hand is won. A lottery is performed such that a high probability state of continuing the game occurs, a high probability state of continuing 20 games occurs with a probability of 8/256, and a high probability state of continuing 30 games occurs with a probability of 2/256.

Similarly, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is 6, when the cherry hand is won, there is a probability of 220/256 to lose, that is, the normal probability state is maintained, and 10 is maintained with a probability of 20/256. A lottery is performed such that a high probability state of continuing the game occurs, a high probability state of continuing 20 games occurs with a probability of 10/256, and a high probability state of continuing 30 games occurs with a probability of 6/256.

Next, FIG. 33(b) shows a high-probability lottery table used when winning the watermelon combination in the normal game in the normal-probability state.
As shown in FIG. 33(b), when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 1, when the watermelon role is won, the probability of losing is 192/256, that is, the normal probability state is maintained. A high probability state of continuing 10 games occurs with a probability of 52/256, a high probability state of continuing 20 games occurs with a probability of 10/256, and a high probability state of continuing 30 games occurs with a probability of 2/256. A lottery will be held.

Similarly, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 2, when the watermelon role is won, the probability of losing is 128/256, that is, the normal probability state is maintained, and the probability of 10 is maintained at 114/256. A lottery is performed such that a high probability state of continuing the game occurs, a high probability state of continuing 20 games occurs with a probability of 10/256, and a high probability state of continuing 30 games occurs with a probability of 4/256.

Similarly, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 3, when the watermelon role is won, the probability of losing is 192/256, that is, the normal probability state is maintained, and the probability is 50/256. A lottery is performed such that a high probability state of continuing the game occurs, a high probability state of continuing 20 games occurs with a probability of 12/256, and a high probability state of continuing 30 games occurs with a probability of 2/256.

Similarly, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 4, when the watermelon role is won, the probability of losing is 128/256, that is, the normal probability state is maintained, and the probability of 10 is maintained at 110/256. A lottery is performed such that a high probability state of continuing the game occurs, a high probability state of continuing 20 games occurs with a probability of 12/256, and a high probability state of continuing 30 games occurs with a probability of 6/256.

Similarly, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 5, when the watermelon role is won, the probability of losing is 192/256, that is, the normal probability state is maintained, and 10 is maintained with a probability of 46/256. A lottery is performed such that a high probability state of continuing the game occurs, a high probability state of continuing 20 games occurs with a probability of 16/256, and a high probability state of continuing 30 games occurs with a probability of 2/256.

Similarly, if the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 6, when the watermelon role is won, the probability of losing is 128/256, that is, the normal probability state is maintained, and the probability of 10 is maintained at 104/256. A lottery is performed such that a high probability state of continuing the game occurs, a high probability state of continuing 20 games occurs with a probability of 16/256, and a high probability state of continuing 30 games occurs with a probability of 8/256.

Since the lottery for transition to the high-probability state is performed as described above, when the player wins the cherry or watermelon role as a predetermined rare role, the player's expectation for the transition to the high-probability state can be increased. It becomes possible.
Also, even when the rare role is won, the watermelon role is more advantageous to the player than the cherry role in terms of the overall probability of transition to the high probability state and the number of continuous games when the transition to the high probability state occurs. Since it is set in such a manner, it is possible to raise the player's sense of expectation when winning the role of watermelon.

Overall, when the set value is an even value, the probability of transition to the high-probability state is higher than when it is an odd value. It will be lower than if it is an even number, but if it is decided to move to a high probability state, a larger value will be decided than if the number of continuous games is an even number, so there are various high It is possible to realize the mode of transition and continuation of the probability state, and to improve the interest of the game.
Furthermore, the high-probability state transition and continuation control allows the player to guess the set value to some extent, so that the game becomes more interesting.
It should be noted that, in the pseudo-game, when the rare role is won, the high-probability state transition lottery is not performed, but it may be performed in the same manner as described above.
As described above, the high-probability state transition lottery in the third embodiment is performed.

[Lottery table used for determining a privilege when winning a role in the main controller in the third embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 34, a prize lottery executed under the control of the main controller 10 in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment, the main controller 10 determines whether or not to give a privilege when a rare combination is won in either a normal game or a pseudo-game (pseudo-game). A lottery (lottery for benefits) will be held.
The lottery for this privilege is set so that the probability of winning is different between the normal probability state and the high probability state, and furthermore, the probability of winning is set to be different for each set value in the probability setting device 14.例文帳に追加

In the pseudo-game, a lottery for a role (a so-called one-shot lottery) is not performed like in a normal game, but a lottery for a role is performed when the symbol to be pseudo-stopped on each reel 4 is determined. If a combination of symbols corresponding to the rare combination is determined at the beginning of the game, the winning of the rare combination is determined.

Also, in addition to winning the above rare role, the lottery for benefits is also performed when the above-mentioned special symbol combination is decided, or when the middle cherry symbol combination is decided. Different special draws are held.
The lottery for the privilege is performed by lottery of random numbers for the privilege lottery by the main controller 10. In FIG. Indicates the number of random numbers.
34(a) to (d) show lottery tables commonly used in normal games and pseudo-games, and FIGS. 34(e) and (f) show lottery tables used only in pseudo-games. .

First, FIG. 34(a) shows a lottery table used when winning a cherry combination in a normal game and a pseudo game in the normal probability state.
As shown in FIG. 34(a), when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 1, there is a probability of 222/256 when the cherry combination is won. /256 chance to win CZ state, 4/256 chance to win Red 7 pseudo-bonus state, 12/256 chance to win Blue 7 pseudo-bonus state, 2/256 chance to win AT state A lottery will be held to win.

Similarly, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 2, when the cherry role is won, there is a probability of 208/256 that the player will lose, that is, no privilege will be awarded, and the CZ state will be obtained with a probability of 20/256. , a lottery is carried out such that a red 7 pseudo-bonus state is won with a probability of 16/256, a blue 7 pseudo-bonus state is won with a probability of 8/256, and an AT state is won with a probability of 4/256. will be

Similarly, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 3, when the cherry role is won, there is a probability of 218/256 of losing, that is, no privilege is given, and a CZ state is obtained with a probability of 16/256. , a red 7 pseudo-bonus state with a probability of 6/256, a blue 7 pseudo-bonus state with a probability of 14/256, and an AT state with a probability of 2/256. will be

Similarly, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 4, when the cherry role is won, there is a probability of 204/256 to lose, that is, no privilege is given, and a CZ state is given with a probability of 24/256. , a lottery is carried out such that a red 7 pseudo-bonus state is won with a probability of 16/256, a blue 7 pseudo-bonus state is won with a probability of 8/256, and an AT state is won with a probability of 4/256. will be

Similarly, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 5, when the cherry role is won, there is a probability of 202/256 to lose, that is, no privilege is given, and a CZ state is given with a probability of 16/256. , the red 7 pseudo-bonus state with a probability of 12/256, the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state with a probability of 20/256, and the AT state with a probability of 6/256. will be

Similarly, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 6, when the cherry role is won, there is a probability of 184/256 that there is a failure, that is, no privilege is given, and there is a probability of 32/256 that the player is in the CZ state. , a lottery is carried out such that a red 7 pseudo-bonus state is won with a probability of 16/256, a blue 7 pseudo-bonus state is won with a probability of 8/256, and an AT state is won with a probability of 16/256. will be

Next, FIG. 34(b) shows a lottery table used when winning a cherry combination in a normal game and a pseudo game in a high probability state.
As shown in FIG. 34(b), when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 1, there is a probability of 128/256 when the cherry combination is won. /256 chance to win CZ state, 16/256 chance to win Red 7 pseudo-bonus state, 32/256 chance to win Blue 7 pseudo-bonus state, 16/256 chance to win AT state A lottery will be held to win.

Similarly, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 2, when the cherry role is won, there is a probability of 74/256 to lose, that is, no privilege is given, and a CZ state is given with a probability of 128/256. , the red 7 pseudo-bonus state with a probability of 32/256, the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state with a probability of 10/256, and the AT state with a probability of 12/256. will be

Similarly, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 3, when the cherry role is won, there is a probability of 96/256 that there is a failure, that is, no privilege is given, and there is a probability of 64/256 that the player is in the CZ state. , the red 7 pseudo-bonus state with a probability of 16/256, the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state with a probability of 48/256, and the AT state with a probability of 32/256. will be

Similarly, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 4, when the cherry role is won, there is a probability of 64/256 that the player will lose, i.e., no privilege will be given, and a probability of 128/256 will be the CZ state. , a lottery is conducted such that a red 7 pseudo-bonus state is won with a probability of 32/256, a blue 7 pseudo-bonus state is won with a probability of 16/256, and an AT state is won with a probability of 16/256. will be

Similarly, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 5, when the cherry role is won, there is a probability of 64/256 that the player will lose, that is, no privilege will be given, and the probability of 48/256 is that the player will be in the CZ state. , a lottery is conducted such that a red 7 pseudo-bonus state is won with a probability of 32/256, a blue 7 pseudo-bonus state is won with a probability of 64/256, and an AT state is won with a probability of 48/256. will be

Similarly, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 6, there is a probability of 64/256 when the player wins the role of Cherry. , the red 7 pseudo-bonus state with a probability of 64/256, the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state with a probability of 32/256, and the AT state with a probability of 32/256. will be

Next, FIG. 34(c) shows a lottery table used when winning the watermelon combination in the normal game and pseudo game in the normal probability state.
As shown in FIG. 34(c), when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 1, there is a probability of 240/256 when the watermelon role is won. /256 probability of winning the CZ state, 0/256 probability of not winning the red 7 pseudo-bonus state, 8/256 probability of winning the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state, 0/256 probability, In other words, a lottery is carried out so as not to win in the AT state.

Similarly, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 2, there is a probability of 236/256 when the player wins the role of watermelon. , with a probability of 0/256, i.e., not winning the red 7 pseudo-bonus state, winning the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state, with a probability of 10/256, and not winning the AT state, with a probability of 0/256. A lottery will be held.

Similarly, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 3, when the watermelon role is won, there is a probability of 232/256 of losing, that is, no privilege is given, and a CZ state is given with a probability of 12/256. , with a probability of 0/256, i.e. not elected to the red 7 pseudo-bonus state, elected to the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state with a probability of 12/256, and not elected to the state of AT with a probability of 0/256 A lottery will be held.

Similarly, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 4, when the watermelon role is won, there is a probability of 228/256 that there is a failure, that is, no privilege is given, and there is a probability of 14/256 that the player is in the CZ state. , with a probability of 0/256, i.e., not winning the red 7 pseudo-bonus state, winning the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state, with a probability of 14/256, and not winning the AT state, with a probability of 0/256 A lottery will be held.

Similarly, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 5, there is a probability of 224/256 when the player wins the role of watermelon. , with a probability of 0/256, i.e. not elected to the red 7 pseudo-bonus state, elected to the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state with a probability of 16/256, and not elected to the state of AT with a probability of 0/256 A lottery will be held.

Similarly, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 6, there is a probability of 220/256 when the watermelon role is won. , with a probability of 0/256, i.e. not elected to the red 7 pseudo-bonus state, elected to the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state with a probability of 18/256, and not elected to the state of AT with a probability of 0/256 A lottery will be held.

Next, FIG. 34(d) shows a lottery table used when a watermelon is won in a normal game and a pseudo game in a high probability state.
As shown in FIG. 34(d), when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 1, there is a probability of 232/256 when the watermelon role is won. /256 probability of winning the CZ state, 0/256 probability of not winning the red 7 pseudo-bonus state, 8/256 probability of winning the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state, 0/256 probability, In other words, a lottery is carried out so as not to win in the AT state.

Similarly, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 2, when the watermelon role is won, there is a probability of 226/256 that there is a failure, that is, no privilege is given, and there is a probability of 20/256 that the player is in the CZ state. , with a probability of 0/256, i.e., not winning the red 7 pseudo-bonus state, winning the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state, with a probability of 10/256, and not winning the AT state, with a probability of 0/256. A lottery will be held.

Similarly, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 3, there is a probability of 220/256 when the player wins the role of watermelon. , with a probability of 0/256, i.e. not elected to the red 7 pseudo-bonus state, elected to the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state with a probability of 12/256, and not elected to the state of AT with a probability of 0/256 A lottery will be held.

Similarly, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 4, there is a probability of 214/256 when the watermelon role is won. , with a probability of 0/256, i.e., not winning the red 7 pseudo-bonus state, winning the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state, with a probability of 14/256, and not winning the AT state, with a probability of 0/256 A lottery will be held.

Similarly, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 5, when the watermelon role is won, there is a probability of 208/256 that the player will lose, that is, no privilege will be awarded, and the CZ state will be obtained with a probability of 32/256. , with a probability of 0/256, i.e. not elected to the red 7 pseudo-bonus state, elected to the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state with a probability of 16/256, and not elected to the state of AT with a probability of 0/256 A lottery will be held.

Similarly, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is 6, when the watermelon role is won, there is a probability of 202/256 that you will lose, that is, no privilege will be given, and there is a probability of 36/256 that you will be in the CZ state. , with a probability of 0/256, i.e. not elected to the red 7 pseudo-bonus state, elected to the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state with a probability of 18/256, and not elected to the state of AT with a probability of 0/256 A lottery will be held.

Next, FIG. 34(e) shows a lottery table used when a symbol combination capable of giving a privilege is formed in a pseudo-game in the normal probability state, other than the above rare combination.
In the pseudo game, when a combination of symbols other than a rare combination that can be given a privilege is formed, a lottery is performed regardless of the set value in the probability setting device 14 in both the normal probability state and the high probability state.

As shown in FIG. 34(e), when the pattern combination of the cherry in the middle row is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo-game, there is a probability of 128/256 that it is lost, that is, no privilege is given, and the CZ state is obtained with a probability of 64/256. A lottery is carried out such that a player wins the red 7 pseudo-bonus state with a probability of 48/256, wins the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state with a probability of 10/256, and wins the AT state with a probability of 6/256. .

Similarly, when the special symbol combination is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo-game, it becomes a loss with a probability of 0/256, wins the CZ state with a probability of 64/256, and enters the red 7 pseudo-bonus state with a probability of 64/256. A lottery is conducted such that the player wins the prize, wins the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state with a probability of 64/256, and wins the AT state with a probability of 64/256.

In addition, when the pattern combination of "BAR, BAR, BAR" is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo-game during the normal probability state, the CZ state is confirmed at that time, and the symbol combination of "Red 7, Red 7, Red 7" is established. If is pseudo-stopped, the red 7 pseudo-bonus state is confirmed at that time, and if the symbol combination of "blue 7, blue 7, blue 7" is pseudo-stopped, the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state is confirmed at that time. When the symbol combination of "white 7, white 7, white 7" is quasi-stopped, the AT state is determined at that time.

Next, FIG. 34(f) shows a lottery table used when a symbol combination capable of giving a privilege is formed in a pseudo-game in a high-probability state other than the above rare combination.
As shown in FIG. 34(f), when the pattern combination of the cherry in the middle row is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo-game, the probability of losing is 0/256, and the CZ state is won with the probability of 128/256, 64/256. A lottery is performed such that the red 7 pseudo-bonus state is won with a probability of , the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state is won with a probability of 32/256, and the AT state is won with a probability of 32/256.

Similarly, when the special symbol combination is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo-game, there is a probability of 0/256 to lose, and a probability of 0/256 is CZ state, that is, the CZ state is not elected, and a probability of 64/256. A lottery is performed such that the red 7 pseudo-bonus state is won, the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state is won with a probability of 96/256, and the AT state is won with a probability of 96/256.

In addition, when the pattern combination of "BAR, BAR, BAR" is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game during the high probability state, the CZ state is confirmed at that time, and the symbol combination of "Red 7, Red 7, Red 7" is established. If is pseudo-stopped, the red 7 pseudo-bonus state is confirmed at that time, and if the symbol combination of "blue 7, blue 7, blue 7" is pseudo-stopped, the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state is confirmed at that time. When the symbol combination of "white 7, white 7, white 7" is quasi-stopped, the AT state is determined at that time.

As described above, when a rare role is won in a normal game and a pseudo-game, a lottery related to the granting of benefits is performed for each of the cases where the middle cherry and special symbol combinations are pseudo-stopped in the pseudo-game. Even when a pseudo-game is executed in addition to the game of (1), it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the awarding of the privilege.

In addition, since the probability of receiving benefits is generally higher in the high-probability state than in the normal-probability state, in the high-probability state, it is possible to increase the player's expectations. It becomes possible.
Furthermore, when the Cherry role is won, if the set value is an even value in both the normal probability state and the high probability state, the probability of winning the Red 7 pseudo-bonus state is higher than in the case of an odd value. If the value is an odd value, the probability of winning the Blue 7 pseudo-bonus state is higher than if the value is an even value. Therefore, it is possible to form a more diverse privilege provision mode and improve interest.

In addition, when the watermelon role is won, a lottery is conducted in which neither the normal probability state nor the high probability state, nor the red 7 pseudo-bonus state or the AT state are given, so that the profit balance between the game parlor and the player is maintained. It can be adjusted, and when a privilege is granted, the probability of being granted a blue 7 pseudo-bonus state, which has a relatively high degree of advantage, is high, so it is possible to give the player a certain sense of expectation. It becomes.

Also, the higher the set value in the probability setting device 14, the higher the probability that the privilege will be given. It is possible to raise it.

In addition, in the pseudo-game, in addition to winning the above rare role, a special lottery for benefits is held even in the pseudo stop of the middle stage cherry and special symbol combination, and the special lottery is more attractive to the player than in the case of winning a rare role. Since it is an advantageous lottery, it is possible to increase the player's expectation when the pseudo-game is executed.
In particular, when the special symbol combination is pseudo-stopped, or when the middle cherry symbol combination is pseudo-stopped in a high-probability state, the award of the privilege is confirmed, so it is possible to greatly increase the player's expectation. It becomes.

In addition, in the pseudo game, the pattern combinations of "BAR BAR BAR", "Red 7 Red 7 Red 7", "Blue 7 Blue 7 Blue 7", and "White 7 White 7 White 7" are simulated. When the game is stopped, the corresponding benefits are given without lottery, so that the expectation of the player is increased, and the game during the pseudo-game can be made new and different from the normal game. It is possible to greatly enhance the interest of the game.

In addition, when a privilege is granted in a normal game, continuous effects and predictive effects are executed before the privilege is granted, so even if it is decided to grant a privilege in a pseudo-game, After executing a continuous effect or an omen effect, etc., it may be possible to shift to a game state that is advantageous for the corresponding player, or in a pseudo-game, without executing a continuous effect or an omen effect, etc. The game may be shifted to a game state advantageous to the player from the next game of the game in which is executed.

In addition, when it is decided to grant a privilege in a pseudo-game, in this game that is executed immediately after the pseudo-game in the same game, the above-mentioned individual production is executed, and the privilege is granted in this individual production. You may make it derive the result which finally alert|reports. In this case, for example, when a rare role is won in a pseudo-game, even if a privilege is not awarded, it is preferable to execute an individual effect in the game to notify that the privilege is not finally awarded.

However, in pseudo-games, the pattern combinations of “BAR BAR BAR”, “Red 7, Red 7, Red 7”, “Blue 7, Blue 7, Blue 7”, and “White 7, White 7, White 7” are pseudo If the game is stopped, the award of the privilege is confirmed, so it is preferable to shift to a game state advantageous to the corresponding player from the next game after the game in which the pseudo game is executed. Also, in this case, the game may be shifted to a game state advantageous to the player from the main game executed immediately after the pseudo game.
As described above, a lottery for benefits is performed in normal games and pseudo-games.

[Lottery table used during CZ state in main controller in the third embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 35, control related to the CZ state in the main controller in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described.

First, FIG. 35(a) shows a lottery table used for determining the number of games, which is the duration of the CZ state, in the event that a transition to the CZ state is won in the privilege lottery described above.
The determination of the number of games in the CZ state is set so that the content of determination differs for each set value in the probability setting device 14 .
Also, the number of games in the CZ state may be determined at the time when the transition to the CZ state is won in the prize lottery described above, or may be performed at the start of the game in which the transition to the CZ state actually occurs.
Various lotteries related to the CZ state are performed by lotteries of predetermined random numbers by the main controller 10. In FIG. It shows the number of random numbers when

As shown in FIG. 35(a), when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 1, the number of games in the CZ state is determined to be 5 with a probability of 192/256, and 48/256. 10 games are decided with a probability of , and 15 games are decided with a probability of 16/256.

Similarly, when the setting value of the probability setting device 14 is 2, the number of games in the CZ state is determined to be 5 games with a probability of 168/256 and 10 games with a probability of 80/256. A lottery is held to determine 15 games with a probability of 8/256.

Similarly, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 3, the number of games in the CZ state is determined to be 5 games with a probability of 192/256 and 10 games with a probability of 48/256. A lottery is held to determine 15 games with a probability of 16/256.

Similarly, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 4, the number of games in the CZ state is determined to be 5 games with a probability of 168/256 and 10 games with a probability of 80/256. A lottery is held to determine 15 games with a probability of 8/256.

Similarly, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 5, the number of games in the CZ state is determined to be 5 games with a probability of 192/256 and 10 games with a probability of 48/256. A lottery is held to determine 15 games with a probability of 16/256.

Similarly, when the set value of the probability setting device 14 is 6, the number of games in the CZ state is determined to be 5 games with a probability of 168/256 and 10 games with a probability of 80/256. A lottery is held to determine 15 games with a probability of 8/256.

Since the number of games in the CZ state is determined with the above probability, the number of continuous games in the CZ state will be any of 5, 10, or 15 games, and the expectation for the provision of benefits will increase. Duration will vary.
In addition, it becomes possible to change the number of games in the CZ state according to the set value in the probability setting device 14, and it becomes possible to form a more diverse execution mode of the CZ state.

Also, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is an even value, the probability of selecting a relatively short duration such as 5 games or 10 games is higher than when the value is an odd value. Conversely, in the case of an odd number, the probability of selecting the maximum duration of 15 games is higher than in the case of an even number.
Therefore, it is possible to generate a characteristic CZ state in accordance with the set value in the probability setting device 14, thereby making it possible to enhance the interest of the game, and the probability setting device 14 allows the game parlor and the player to interact with each other. It is possible to adjust the profit balance between

Next, FIG. 35(b) shows a lottery table used when determining whether or not to execute a pseudo game in the game during the CZ state.
In the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment, in the game in the CZ state, a prize (pseudo-bonus state) lottery is performed upon winning of a predetermined combination (push-order bell, cherry, watermelon). I have to.
When a privilege is given, a pseudo-game is executed in the game during the CZ state, and the fact that the privilege is given in the pseudo-game is notified.

Specifically, in the game in the CZ state, when a predetermined combination (push order bell combination, common bell combination, cherry combination, watermelon combination) is won, a lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to execute a pseudo-game. When it is decided to execute a pseudo-game, a lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to grant a privilege.

Therefore, if a privilege is granted during the CZ state, it is necessary to win both of the above two lotteries, and even if a pseudo-game is executed during the CZ state, the privilege is not necessarily granted. Not only, even if the pseudo-game is executed, it may end without giving any benefits.
In addition, since the pseudo-game during the CZ state is different from the pseudo-game during the normal game state, it is executed to notify whether or not a privilege is granted, so that the pseudo-game can be used to win a predetermined winning combination. There is no such thing.

It should be noted that the winning of the combination that triggered the lottery of the privilege is reflected in the control of the reels 4 during the main game which is executed immediately after the pseudo game. Therefore, for example, when a cherry combination is won in a predetermined game in the CZ state, a pseudo-game is executed first, and immediately after that, the reels 4 capable of forming a symbol combination corresponding to the cherry combination are stopped during the main game. Control takes place. In this case, it is preferable to execute an individual effect for winning a rare combination during the game.

In FIG. 35(b), when a predetermined combination (push order bell combination, common bell combination, cherry combination, watermelon combination) is won in the game in the CZ state, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute a pseudo-game. It shows the lottery table used when doing.
As shown in FIG. 35(b), if the bell combination (push order bell combination or common bell combination) is won in the game in the CZ state, it is determined with a probability of 192/256 that the pseudo-game will not be executed. , a lottery is performed so that it is decided to execute the pseudo-game with a probability of 64/256.

Similarly, when a cherry hand is won in a game in the CZ state, it is determined not to execute a pseudo-game with a probability of 0/256, and it is decided to execute a pseudo-game with a probability of 256/256. A lottery will be held. Therefore, when a cherry combination is won, a pseudo-game is always executed.

Similarly, when a watermelon role is won in a game in the CZ state, it is determined with a probability of 64/256 not to execute a pseudo-game, and with a probability of 192/256 it is decided to execute a pseudo-game. A lottery will be held.

Since the lottery as described above is performed, the probability that the pseudo-game, which is the trigger for granting the privilege, will be executed is higher when the rare role is won than when the bell role is won in the CZ state. .
In particular, when the cherry combination is won, the pseudo-game is always executed.

Next, FIG. 35(c) shows a lottery table used when performing lottery to decide whether or not to grant a privilege when execution of a pseudo-game is determined by the lottery.

As shown in FIG. 35(c), in the game in the CZ state, if the bell combination (push order bell combination or common bell combination) is won and execution of the pseudo-game is determined, the probability is 192/256. A lottery is carried out so that it is decided not to pseudo-stop the fixed symbol row (fixed eye) in the pseudo game, and it is decided to pseudo-stop the fixed symbol row (fixed eye) in the pseudo game with a probability of 64/256. .
Here, the fixed symbol row (fixed eye), which will be described later in detail, is a symbol row that notifies transition to a pseudo-bonus state on a predetermined reel 4 in a pseudo-game, and the generation of the pseudo-bonus state is determined. is shown.

Similarly, in the game in the CZ state, if the cherry hand is won and the execution of the pseudo-game is decided, it is decided that the fixed symbol sequence (fixed eye) is not pseudo-stopped in the pseudo-game with a probability of 64/256. A lottery is conducted so that it is decided to pseudo-stop the fixed symbol row (fixed eye) in the pseudo game with a probability of 192/256.

Similarly, when the watermelon role is won in the game during the CZ state and the execution of the pseudo game is decided, it is decided not to pseudo-stop the fixed symbol sequence (fixed eye) in the pseudo game with a probability of 0/256. A lottery is performed so that it is decided to quasi-stop the definite symbol sequence (definite symbols) in the quasi-game with a probability of 256/256.

Since the lottery as described above is performed, when the pseudo-game is executed in the CZ state, the winning combination that triggered the execution of the pseudo-game is more likely to be a rare combination than a bell combination. The probability that a privilege (pseudo-bonus state) is provided is increased.
In addition, when the watermelon role is won in the CZ state, the probability of the pseudo-game being executed is lower than when the cherry role is won, but as long as the pseudo-game is performed, the privilege is always given. The Rukoto.

Next, FIG. 35(d) shows a lottery table that is used to determine the type of privilege to be awarded when awarding of the privilege is determined by the lottery (pseudo stop of the fixed symbol sequence).
The privilege granted during the CZ state is either the red 7 pseudo-bonus state or the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state, and the lottery for the type of privilege to be granted differs for each set value in the probability setting device 14. is executed as

As shown in FIG. 35(d), when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 1, it is determined with a probability of 192/256 that the red 7 pseudo-bonus state is generated, and the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state is determined with a probability of 192/256. A lottery is conducted such that the occurrence of the bonus condition is determined with a probability of 64/256.
Similarly, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 2, it is determined with a probability of 224/256 that the red 7 pseudo-bonus state is generated, and the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state is not generated. A lottery will be held with a probability of 32/256 to determine.

Similarly, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 3, it is determined with a probability of 160/256 that the red 7 pseudo-bonus state is generated, and the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state is not generated. A lottery will be held with a probability of 96/256 being determined.
Similarly, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is 4, it is determined with a probability of 208/256 that the red 7 pseudo-bonus state is generated, and the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state is not generated. A lottery will be held with a 48/256 probability of being determined.

Similarly, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is 5, it is determined with a probability of 128/256 that the red 7 pseudo-bonus state is generated, and the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state is not generated. A lottery is held with a probability of 128/256 being determined.
Similarly, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is 6, it is determined with a probability of 208/256 that the red 7 pseudo-bonus state is generated, and the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state is not generated. A lottery will be held with a 48/256 probability of being determined.

Since the lottery as described above is performed, when it is decided to grant a privilege in the CZ state, it is possible to change the type of pseudo-bonus state according to the setting value in the probability setting device 14, Thus, it becomes possible to form a more diverse privilege provision mode.
Further, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is an odd value, the probability of determining the Blue 7 pseudo-bonus state, which has a relatively high degree of advantage, is higher than when it is an even value. Therefore, it is possible to form a characteristic privilege giving mode in accordance with the set value in the probability setting device 14, thereby making it possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In addition, in each of the odd number group and the even number group, the higher the set value, the higher the probability that the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state will be determined. It becomes possible to adjust the profit balance of
As described above, various lotteries are executed during the CZ state in the third embodiment.

[Production on the main display when winning the pseudo-bonus state in the CZ state in the third embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the effect when the pseudo-bonus state is won in the CZ state in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment, the main controller 10 performs a lottery for granting a privilege during the CZ state. A state will occur, but at this time, a pseudo-game will be executed during the game in which the privilege is awarded.
During the pseudo-game, in order to notify the occurrence of the pseudo-bonus state, control is performed to pseudo-stop the above-described fixed symbol row on the reels 4 .

Specifically, during a pseudo-game, the middle reel 4b is controlled to quasi-stop the confirmed symbol row, and when the player performs a stop operation on the middle reel 4b, the confirmed symbol row A pseudo stop will occur at 4b.
On the other hand, during the pseudo-game that is executed when the privilege is not granted, the control of pseudo-stopping the fixed symbol row is not performed on the middle reel 4b, and the losing symbol row that can recognize that the privilege is not granted is pseudo-stopped. It will be done.

As for the losing symbol row, any symbol row may be used as long as it can be recognized that the privilege is not given, and any symbol row is pseudo-stopped for the reels 4 other than the middle reel 4b during the pseudo game. Alternatively, only the middle reel 4b may be quasi-stopped during the quasi-game.

FIG. 36 shows an effect image on the main display 8 when the fixed symbol row is pseudo-stopped during the pseudo-game, which is executed under the control of the sub-controller 20 based on the control information from the main controller 10. .
In the slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the fixed symbol row is set to "white 7, watermelon, white 7", which is the symbol row of the array numbers 10 to 12 on the middle reel 4b. A pattern row may be used.

As shown in FIG. 36, when a pseudo-game is executed in the CZ state, a confirmed symbol row image 55a is displayed in the approximate center of the screen on the main display 8. As shown in FIG.
The fixed symbol row image 55a is an image corresponding to the symbol rows of array numbers 10 to 12 on the middle reel 4b, "white 7, watermelon, white 7".
Further, below the confirmed symbol row image 55a, a pseudo stop instruction image 55b consisting of character information "Aim!!" An effect is executed to prompt a stop operation aiming at "white 7, watermelon, white 7", which is the symbol row of array numbers 10 to 12 in .

Then, when the player performs a stop operation (pseudo stop operation) of the middle reel 4b by operating the middle stop button 5b as instructed by the effect, if it is determined in advance to give a privilege, the middle reel 4b The fixed symbol row (“white 7, watermelon, white 7”) is pseudo-stopped.
In this case, stop control is performed such that the fixed symbol row is always pseudo-stopped no matter what timing the player performs the stop operation of the middle reel 4b.

After the pseudo-stop, the reels 4 are rotated again by the player's start operation to shift to the main game. An image for informing the pseudo-bonus state of the type shown is displayed.
For example, when the generation of the red 7 pseudo-bonus state is determined, character information such as "red 7 pseudo-bonus state start" is displayed during the game.

Then, the corresponding pseudo-bonus state occurs from the start of the game following the game in which the pseudo-game is executed.
In addition, during the first game in the pseudo-bonus state generated as described above, a pseudo-game that once pseudo-stops the symbol combination of "red 7, red 7, red 7" or "blue 7, blue 7, blue 7" is performed. may be executed. In this case, since the game immediately after the pseudo-game is already in the pseudo-bonus state, the push-order navigation is executed when the push-order bell combination is won.

On the other hand, in the case of a pseudo-game in which the provision of benefits is not determined in advance, even if the stopping operation (pseudo-stopping operation) of the middle reel 4b is performed, the fixed symbol row does not pseudo-stop and the losing pattern row on the middle reel 4b. is pseudo-stopped.
Then, when there is a remaining number of games in the CZ state, the game in the CZ state is executed again from the start of the game next to the game in which the pseudo game is executed.

As described above, when the pseudo-game is executed during the CZ state, the main display 8 executes the effect of prompting the pseudo-stop of the fixed symbol row, so that the interest of the game during the CZ state is improved. It becomes possible.
In addition, when it is decided to give a privilege during the CZ state, if the stop operation is performed according to the production prompting the pseudo-stop of the fixed symbol row, the fixed symbol row will be pseudo-stopped. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling that he/she has obtained a privilege by his/her own operation, and to give a high sense of satisfaction to the player.

In addition, when the pseudo-game is executed during the CZ state, if a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) passes without the player performing the stop operation of the middle reel 4b, any predetermined The pattern row may be automatically pseudo-stopped, or after the lapse of a predetermined time, the production prompting the pseudo-stop of the fixed pattern row is terminated, and the pseudo-game is stopped to automatically shift to the main game. good too.
As described above, the effect during the pseudo-game is performed in the CZ state in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment.

[Additional point lottery table used for determining the additional points at the AT state lottery in the pseudo-bonus state in the main controller in the third embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the lottery for the AT state during the pseudo-bonus state executed by the main controller 10 in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described.

In the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment, when the normal game state or the CZ state is shifted to the pseudo-bonus state, a transition lottery is executed as to whether or not to shift to the AT state. When winning, the game state shifts to the AT state after the pseudo bonus state ends.

The lottery for transition to the AT state is executed based on the points added according to the lottery result of the combination in the game during the pseudo-bonus state. Therefore, the lottery is executed so that the more points added during the pseudo-bonus state, the higher the probability of transition to the AT state.

FIG. 37 shows a lottery table used for determining whether or not to add points related to the AT state transition lottery when a winning combination is won in a game in the pseudo-bonus state.
The points are set to an initial value (0) at the start of the pseudo-bonus state, and the additional points are set to 1 to 3 points for each game.
Further, the point addition lottery is performed by lottery of predetermined random numbers by main controller 10. In FIG. shows the number of random values in

First, FIG. 37(a) shows a lottery table used in the point addition lottery during the red 7 pseudo-bonus state that continues for 30 games.
As shown in FIG. 37(a), in the game in the red 7 pseudo-bonus state, if a replay combination is won, 1 point is added with a probability of 256/256. Therefore, when a replay combination is won, a lottery is performed such that one point is always added and no other points are added.

Similarly, when winning the cherry hand, 2 points are added with a probability of 192/256, and 3 points are added with a probability of 64/256. Therefore, when the cherry combination is won, a lottery is performed in which either 2 points or 3 points are added, and 1 point is not added.

Similarly, when winning the watermelon role, 2 points are added with a probability of 128/256, and 3 points are added with a probability of 128/256. Therefore, when the watermelon role is won, either 2 points or 3 points are added, and a lottery is performed so that 1 point is not added.
It should be noted that points are not added if the bell combination (push-order bell combination and common bell combination) is won in the game in the red 7 pseudo-bonus state.

Next, FIG. 37(b) shows a lottery table used in the point addition lottery during the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state that continues for 20 games.
As shown in FIG. 37(b), in the game in the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state, if the bell combination (push order bell combination and common bell combination) is won, 1 point is added with a probability of 240/256. , 2 points are added with a probability of 216/256. Therefore, when the bell combination is won, a lottery is performed in which either 1 point or 2 points are added, and 3 points are not added.

Similarly, when winning the cherry hand, 2 points are added with a probability of 192/256, and 3 points are added with a probability of 64/256. Therefore, when the cherry combination is won, a lottery is performed in which either 2 points or 3 points are added, and 1 point is not added.

Similarly, when winning the watermelon role, 2 points are added with a probability of 128/256, and 3 points are added with a probability of 128/256. Therefore, when the watermelon role is won, either 2 points or 3 points are added, and a lottery is performed so that 1 point is not added.
It should be noted that points are not added when a replay combination is won in a game in the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state.

Since the points in each pseudo-bonus state are added by the lottery as described above, more points will be added if a rare combination is won in the game in the pseudo-bonus state.
Also, since the probability of winning the bell role (push order bell role and common bell role) is set higher than the winning probability of the replay role, the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state in which the bell role is the trigger for adding points is better. , red 7 pseudo-bonus state, the lottery is performed so that the total point value is larger than that in the red 7 pseudo-bonus state.
That is, the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state is set to have a higher advantage than the red 7 pseudo-bonus state.

Then, based on the total value of the points added during the pseudo-bonus state, the main controller 10 executes an AT state transition lottery.
Further, the AT state transition lottery by the main controller 10 is executed so that the higher the total number of points, the higher the probability of winning the AT state. For example, one point increases the probability of winning the AT state by 5%. A migration lottery will be held.
Also, when the total points are 0 points, or when the total points are 20 points or more, a transition lottery is performed to unconditionally win the AT state.
It is preferable that the total value of the points is notified during the pseudo-bonus state.

Therefore, if the player wins the point addition trigger role in each pseudo-bonus state, it is possible to raise the player's expectation, and in particular, if the player wins the rare role, the player's expectation can be further enhanced. It is possible to raise it.
In addition, the probability of shifting to the AT state is higher when the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state occurs than when the red 7 pseudo-bonus state occurs. It is possible to form a highly interesting pseudo-bonus state generation mode that can be changed, and to increase the player's expectation when the Blue 7 pseudo-bonus state occurs. of.

In the next game after the pseudo-bonus state ends, a pseudo-game for announcing the AT state transition lottery result is executed, and the AT state transition lottery result is notified by the pseudo-stop mode of the reels 4. It will happen.
For example, when the AT state is entered after the pseudo-bonus state ends, a pseudo-game is executed in the first game in the AT state, and during the pseudo-game, reel 4 displays "white 7, white 7, white 7". symbol combination has been pseudo-stopped and shifted to the AT state.
On the other hand, when the transition to the normal game state in which the advantageous section continues after the pseudo-bonus state ends, the pseudo-game is executed in the first game of the normal game state, and during the pseudo-game, "White 7・It is notified that the symbol combination "White 7, White 7" has not changed to the AT state due to a pseudo-stop.
Therefore, even if the normal game state is entered after the pseudo-bonus state ends, the above-mentioned pseudo-game will be executed in part of it. The first game that raises the player's expectations can be executed, and a wider variety of games can be executed.
Incidentally, the pseudo game for informing the AT state transition lottery result may be performed in the final game in the pseudo bonus state, in addition to being performed in the next game after the pseudo bonus state ends. In this case, when shifting to the AT state after the pseudo-bonus state ends, a pseudo-game is executed in which the symbol combination of "white 7, white 7, white 7" can be pseudo-stopped in the final game, and after the pseudo-bonus state ends. If the AT state is not entered, a pseudo-game is executed in which the symbol combination of "white 7, white 7, other than white 7" can be pseudo-stopped in the final game.
In addition, the final game in the pseudo-bonus state or the next game after the end of the pseudo-bonus state is a result game (result notification game) that is completed in one game. Related notification may be made.
As described above, the lottery for transition to the AT state during the pseudo-bonus state in the third embodiment is executed.

[Effect on the main display at the start of the AT state after the end of the pseudo-bonus state in the third embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the effect on the main display 8 executed during the pseudo-game in the first game in the AT state when the AT state is entered after the pseudo-bonus state is terminated will be described.

As described above, when the AT state transition lottery based on the occurrence of the pseudo bonus state is won, a pseudo game is executed in the first game in the AT state, and the player's stop operation causes the "white When the pattern combination of 7, White 7, White 7 is stopped in a pseudo manner and the AT state is not won, a pseudo game is executed in the first game in the normal game state in which the advantageous section continues, and the player By the stop operation, the symbol combination of "white 7, white 7, white 7" is pseudo-stopped. An effect prompting a pseudo-stop of the combination is executed.

FIG. 38 shows the main display when the symbol combination of "white 7, white 7, white 7" is simulated during the above-described pseudo-game, which is executed under the control of the sub-controller 20 based on the control information from the main controller 10. 8 shows a rendered image on the device 8. FIG.
As shown in FIG. 38, when the first game in the AT state is executed, a fixed symbol combination image 56a is displayed in the approximate center of the screen of the main display 8. As shown in FIG.
The fixed symbol combination image 56 a is an image corresponding to the stopping of the symbol combination of “white 7, white 7, white 7” on a predetermined line on the reel 4 .

In addition, below the confirmed symbol combination image 56a, a pseudo stop instruction image 55b consisting of character information of "Aim!!" ] symbol combination is executed to prompt a stop operation.
Also, above the confirmed symbol combination image 56a, an acquired point image 56b, which is the total value of points referred to in the current AT state transition lottery, is displayed.
Note that FIG. 38 illustrates a case where 7 points are added as the acquired point image 56b.

Then, when the player performs a stop operation (pseudo stop operation) on the reels 4 by operating the stop buttons 5 as instructed by the effect, if the transition to the AT state is determined in advance, the reels 4 The symbol combination of "white 7, white 7, white 7" is quasi-stopped.
In this case, the stop control is performed so that the symbol combination of "white 7, white 7, white 7" is always pseudo-stopped regardless of the timing of the player's stop operation of the reels 4 .

After the pseudo-stop, the reels 4 are rotated again by the player's start operation to shift to the main game, and the first game in the AT state is executed.
During the game, although not shown, an image notifying the start of the AT state is displayed. For example, text information such as "AT state established" or "AT state start" is displayed.
Then, when the winning of the push order bell combination is made, the push order navigation is executed (displayed) together with the character information during this game.

On the other hand, even when the normal game state is entered after the pseudo-bonus state ends, the pseudo-game is executed in the first game of the normal game state, and the same effect as described above is executed.
However, in this case, even if the player performs the stop operation as instructed, the symbol combination of "white 7, white 7, other than white 7" is pseudo-stopped on the reel 4 during the pseudo-game, and the AT state is entered. You will be notified that you have not moved.

As described above, the pseudo-game is executed in the next game after the pseudo-bonus state ends, and the effect of prompting the pseudo-stop of the symbol combination of "white 7, white 7, white 7" on the main display 8 is performed. , it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.
In addition, when it is decided to shift to the AT state during the pseudo-bonus state, if the stop operation is performed according to the production prompting the pseudo-stop of the symbol combination of "white 7, white 7, white 7", the corresponding symbol combination is performed. is stopped, the player can feel that he/she has obtained a privilege by his/her own operation, and the player can be highly satisfied.

If a predetermined time (for example, one minute) elapses without the player stopping the reels 4 during the pseudo-game after the pseudo-bonus state ends, any predetermined symbol combination is selected. Pseudo-stop may be performed automatically, or after a predetermined period of time, the effect of prompting the quasi-stop of the symbol combination may be terminated, and the pseudo-game may be stopped to automatically shift to the main game.
As described above, the effect during the pseudo-game is performed after the pseudo-bonus state ends in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment.

[Lottery table used when shifting to a specialized zone during AT state in the main controller in the third embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the special zone lottery during the AT state executed by the main controller 10 in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described.

In the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment, when a predetermined combination is won, the main controller 10 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a special zone during the AT state, and moves to the special zone. , the predetermined period during the AT state is controlled as a specialized zone.
A lottery for transition to the pseudo-bonus state is executed in the specialized zone, and when the lottery for transition to the pseudo-bonus state is won, the AT state is temporarily interrupted and the game state is shifted to the pseudo-bonus state. It will happen.
It should be noted that the transfer lottery to the specialized zone is executed not only during the normal game during the AT state, but also during the pseudo-game during the AT state, which will be described later.

FIG. 39 shows a lottery table that is used in a special zone shift lottery in normal games and pseudo-games in the AT state.
In the pseudo-game in the AT state, since the combination corresponding to the bell combination of the pressing order is not set, the common bell combination is won in all cases where the combination of symbols corresponding to the bell combination is formed on the reels 4. judged as a

As shown in FIG. 39, in the normal game and the pseudo-game during the AT state, if the common bell role is won, it is determined not to move to the specialized zone with a probability of 240/256, and 16/256. A lottery is held so that it is decided to move to the specialized zone with probability.
Similarly, in the case of winning the cherry role, a lottery is conducted such that it is determined not to move to the specialized zone with a probability of 192/256, and it is determined to move to the specialized zone with a probability of 64/256. done.
Similarly, when a watermelon role is won, a lottery is conducted such that it is determined not to shift to the specialized zone with a probability of 224/256, and it is determined to shift to the specialized zone with a probability of 32/256. done.

As described above, since the special zone shift lottery is performed during the AT state, the winning probability of the special zone changes for each combination lottery result, and the interest of the game during the AT state is improved. It becomes possible.
In addition, when a rare role is won, the probability of shifting to a special zone that triggers the transition to the pseudo-bonus state increases, so it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation.

Further, in the pseudo game executed during the AT state, it is determined that the common bell combination, which is the special zone transition lottery trigger combination, is won simply by forming a symbol combination corresponding to the bell combination. When a pseudo-game is executed during the AT state, it is possible to further heighten the player's sense of expectation.
As described above, the specialized zone transfer lottery is executed during the AT state in the third embodiment.

[Decision processing of pseudo stop symbol sequence when using AT table in AT state in main controller in the third embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the result of the pseudo-game during the AT state, that is, the determination control of the symbol combination derived when the reels 4 are pseudo-stopped during the game will be described.

As described above, during the normal game state, a pseudo-game is executed in a predetermined game, and one of a plurality of pseudo-game tables is used for the symbol row to be pseudo-stopped on each reel 4 during the pseudo-game. I am trying to make a decision.
In the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment, the main controller 10 is capable of executing a pseudo-game even during the AT state, and during the AT state, each reel uses an AT table dedicated to the AT state. 4 pseudo stop symbol sequences are determined.

Then, the result of the pseudo-game during the AT state is associated with the special zone lottery during the AT state as described above, so when the pseudo-game is executed during the AT state, Expectations will rise.

During the normal game state, each time the common bell combination is won in the normal game, the pseudo stop symbol row is determined, and when the common bell combination is won three times in total, one pseudo game is executed. However, during the AT state, in addition to winning the common bell combination, if the pressing order bell combination is also won, the pseudo stop symbol sequence is determined, and the common bell combination and the pressing order bell combination are determined. One pseudo-game is executed when the number of wins of a role reaches three times in total.
Therefore, during the AT state, pseudo-games are executed more frequently than during the normal game state.

FIG. 40 shows a pseudo stop on each reel 4 in a pseudo game, which is determined in advance when the common bell combination and the push order bell combination are won in the state where the table during AT is selected as the pseudo game table (AT state). The symbol rows to be made and the selection probability of each symbol row are shown.

FIG. 40(a) shows a symbol row that can be simulatedly stopped on each reel 4 in a simulated game when using a table during AT. It is an option of the pattern row, and each pattern in the frame becomes a pattern row displayed in the display window 6 at the time of pseudo stop in the pseudo game. FIG. 40(b) shows each selection probability value of the table during AT when selecting the symbol row (frames 1 to 4) on each reel 4 when the common bell combination and the push-order bell combination are won. .

Choices that can be selected as a result of the pseudo-game are only four types of symbol rows for each reel 4 as shown, and other symbol rows cannot be selected.
Therefore, the result of the pseudo-game is derived by the combination of the above-described four types of predetermined symbol rows, and these options are set so that each pseudo-game table has a characteristic, AT When the middle table is selected, only the replay role, the bell role, and the cherry role can be simulated prizes, and the other roles cannot be simulated prizes.
The symbol row selection lottery for each reel 4 is performed by lottery of random numbers for the symbol row lottery by the main controller 10. In FIG. It shows the number of random numbers when each symbol row is selected.

As shown in FIGS. 40(a) and (b), when the AT table is selected as the pseudo-game table, at the first winning of either the common bell role or the pushing order bell role, in the pseudo-game As the symbol row at the time of pseudo stop of the left reel 4a, the left 1 frame ("Replay Bell, Blue 7") is selected with a probability of 80/256, and the left 2 frames ("Replay Bell, White 7") are selected with a probability of 80. Selected with a probability of /256, the left 3 frames (“Bell, BAR, Cherry”) are selected with a probability of 16/256, and the left 4 frames (“Replay, Bell, Blank”) are selected with a probability of 80/256. be done.

Similarly, when either the common bell combination or the push-order bell combination is won for the second time, one middle frame (“Bell Replay Cherry”) is displayed as a pattern row at the time of pseudo stop of the middle reel 4b in the pseudo game. 80/256 chance of being selected, 80/256 chance of selecting middle 2 slots (“Red 7 Bell Replay”), 16/256 chance of middle 3 slots (“Bell Replay Cherry”) , and the middle 4 frames (“BAR/Bell/Replay”) are selected with a probability of 80/256.

Similarly, when either the common bell combination or the push-order bell combination is won for the third time, the right 1 frame ("Blue 7 Bell Replay") is displayed as the symbol row at the time of pseudo stop of the right reel 4c in the pseudo game. is selected with a probability of 80/256, the right two boxes ("Bell Replay Watermelon") are selected with a probability of 80/256, and the right three boxes ("White 7 Bell Replay") are selected with a probability of 16/256. Selected with probability, the right 4 boxes ("replay blank bell") are selected with a probability of 80/256.

The symbol row of each reel 4 selected as described above is determined in advance as the symbol combination (result) at the time of pseudo-stop in the pseudo-game during the AT state.
For example, when the left 1 frame is selected for the left reel 4a, the middle 2 frames are selected for the middle reel 4b, and the right 3 frames are selected for the right reel 4c, as a result of the pseudo-game, "Bell "Bell, Bell" is stopped, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning of the Bell role is determined in advance.

In addition, in the normal game state, the notice effect is executed, and the symbol combination of the determined pseudo-game is displayed (advance) in advance on the main display 8 by the notice reel image. Since the pseudo-game is frequently executed during the state, the notice performance is not executed to avoid complexity, but the notice performance is executed during the AT state as well as during the normal game state. You may do so.
Then, in the next game in the AT state in which the symbol combination of the pseudo game is predetermined, the pseudo game is actually executed, and the predetermined symbol combination is stopped when the reels 4 are pseudo-stopped.

As described above, since the result of the pseudo-game is determined in the state in which the AT table is selected (AT state), in the state in which the AT table is selected, the replay hand, the bell hand and the cherry hand are selected. The result of the pseudo game is determined so that only one of them can win a pseudo prize.
Therefore, when the pseudo-game is executed in the AT state, the pseudo-win of the bell role and the cherry role, which is the trigger for the lottery of the special zone, becomes possible, so the probability of occurrence of the special zone increases accordingly, and the game is played. It is possible to raise people's expectations.
As described above, the result of the pseudo-game when the AT state table is selected in the third embodiment is determined.

[Lottery table used in the specialized zone in the main controller in the third embodiment]
Next, referring to FIG. 41, the control related to the specialized zone in the AT state by the main controller in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described.

First, FIG. 41(a) shows, in the transfer lottery of the specialized zone in the AT state described above, when the transfer to the specialized zone is won, the number of games which is the duration of the specialized zone is determined. It shows the lottery table used.
The determination of the number of games in the special zone is set so that the content of determination differs for each set value in the probability setting device 14 .
Further, the number of games in the specialized zone may be determined at the time when the shift to the specialized zone is won in the transition lottery described above, or at the start of the game actually shifted to the specialized zone.

In addition, various lotteries related to the specialized zone are performed by lottery of predetermined random numbers by the main controller 10. In FIG. It shows the number of random values to be generated.

As shown in FIG. 41(a), when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 1, the number of games in the specialized zone is determined to be 5 games with a probability of 192/256, and 48/48. A lottery is conducted such that 10 games are decided with a probability of 256 and 15 games are decided with a probability of 16/256.

Similarly, when the setting value of the probability setting device 14 is 2, the number of games in the specialized zone is determined to be 5 games with a probability of 168/256, and 10 games with a probability of 80/256. A lottery is held such that 15 games are decided with a probability of 8/256.

Similarly, when the setting value of the probability setting device 14 is 3, the number of games in the specialized zone is determined to be 5 games with a probability of 192/256, and 10 games with a probability of 48/256. A lottery is held such that 15 games are decided with a probability of 16/256.

Similarly, when the setting value of the probability setting device 14 is 4, the number of games in the specialized zone is determined to be 5 games with a probability of 168/256, and 10 games with a probability of 80/256. A lottery is held such that 15 games are decided with a probability of 8/256.

Similarly, when the setting value of the probability setting device 14 is 5, the number of games in the specialized zone is determined to be 5 games with a probability of 192/256, and 10 games with a probability of 48/256. A lottery is held such that 15 games are decided with a probability of 16/256.

Similarly, when the set value of the probability setting device 14 is 6, the number of games in the specialized zone is determined to be 5 games with a probability of 168/256, and 10 games with a probability of 80/256. A lottery is held such that 15 games are decided with a probability of 8/256.

Since the number of games in the specialized zone is determined with the above probability, the number of continuous games in the specialized zone will be 5, 10, or 15 games. The duration of the specialized zone, which raises expectations, will change.
In addition, it becomes possible to change the number of games in the special zone according to the set value in the probability setting device 14, so that it becomes possible to form a more diverse execution mode of the special zone.

Also, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is an even value, the probability of selecting a relatively short duration such as 5 games or 10 games is higher than when the value is an odd value. Conversely, in the case of an odd number, the probability of selecting the maximum duration of 15 games is higher than in the case of an even number.
Therefore, it is possible to generate a special zone with a characteristic according to the set value in the probability setting device 14, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game. It is possible to adjust the profit balance between

Next, FIG. 35(b) shows a lottery table used when determining whether or not to execute a pseudo game in the game in the specialized zone.
In the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment, a prize (pseudo-bonus state) is drawn by lottery when a predetermined combination (push-order bell, cherry, watermelon) is won in the game in the special zone. I'm trying
Then, when a privilege is given, a pseudo-game is executed in the game in the specialized zone as in the CZ state described above, and the fact that the privilege is given in the pseudo-game is notified.

Specifically, in the game in the specialized zone, when a predetermined role (push-order bell role, common bell role, cherry role, watermelon role) is won, a lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to execute a pseudo-game. , When it is decided to execute a pseudo-game, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to give a privilege.

Therefore, in the specialized zone, if the privilege is granted in the same way as in the CZ state, it is necessary to win both of the above two lotteries, and when the pseudo-game is executed in the specialized zone However, the privilege is not always granted, and even if the pseudo-game is executed, it may end without being granted the privilege.
In addition, the pseudo-game in the specialized zone is different from the pseudo-game in the normal game state, and is executed to notify whether or not a privilege is given, so that the pseudo-game wins a predetermined combination. It has become something that will never happen.

It should be noted that the winning of the combination that triggered the lottery of the privilege is reflected in the control of the reels 4 during the main game which is executed immediately after the pseudo game. Therefore, for example, when a cherry combination is won in a predetermined game in the specialized zone, a pseudo-game is first executed, and immediately after that, during the main game, reels 4 capable of forming a combination of symbols corresponding to the cherry combination are displayed. Stop control is performed. In this case, it is preferable to execute an individual effect for winning a rare combination during the game.

FIG. 41(b) shows a lottery for whether or not to execute a pseudo-game when a predetermined combination (bell combination, common bell combination, cherry combination, watermelon combination) is won in a game in a specialized zone. It shows a lottery table used when performing.
As shown in FIG. 41(b), if the bell combination (push order bell combination or common bell combination) is won in the game in the specialized zone, it is determined that the pseudo-game will not be executed with a probability of 192/256. A lottery is conducted so that it is decided to execute a pseudo-game with a probability of 64/256.

Similarly, when a cherry hand is won in a game in the specialized zone, it is decided not to execute the pseudo game with a probability of 0/256, and it is decided to execute a pseudo game with a probability of 256/256. A lottery will be held. Therefore, when a cherry combination is won, a pseudo-game is always executed.

Similarly, when a watermelon role is won in a game in the specialized zone, it is determined with a probability of 64/256 not to execute the pseudo-game, and with a probability of 192/256 it is decided to execute the pseudo-game. A lottery will be held.

Since the lottery as described above is carried out, the probability of executing the pseudo-game, which is the trigger for awarding the privilege, is higher in the case of winning the rare role than in the case of winning the role of Bell in the specialized zone. be.
In particular, when the cherry combination is won, the pseudo-game is always executed.

Next, FIG. 41(c) shows a lottery table used when performing lottery to decide whether or not to grant a privilege when execution of a pseudo-game is determined by the lottery.

As shown in FIG. 41(c), in the game in the specialized zone, if the bell combination (push order bell combination or common bell combination) is won and execution of the pseudo-game is determined, the probability is 192/256. A lottery is performed so that it is determined not to pseudo-stop the fixed symbol row (fixed eye) in the pseudo game, and it is decided to pseudo-stop the fixed symbol row (fixed eye) in the pseudo game with a probability of 64/256. will be
Here, as in the CZ state, the fixed symbol row (fixed eye) is a symbol row that informs the transition to the pseudo-bonus state on the predetermined reel 4 in the pseudo-game, and the occurrence of the pseudo-bonus state is determined. It is shown that.

Similarly, in the game in the specialized zone, when the cherry hand is won and the execution of the pseudo-game is decided, there is a probability of 64/256 that the fixed symbol sequence (fixed eye) is not pseudo-stopped in the pseudo-game. A lottery is performed so that it is determined that the fixed symbol row (fixed eye) is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game with a probability of 192/256.

Similarly, when a watermelon role is won in a game in the specialized zone and execution of a pseudo-game is determined, there is a probability of 0/256 that the fixed symbol sequence (fixed eye) is not pseudo-stopped in the pseudo-game. A lottery is performed so that it is determined that the fixed symbol row (fixed eye) is pseudo-stopped in the pseudo game with a probability of 256/256.

Due to the lottery as described above, when a pseudo-game is executed in a specialized zone, the winning hand that triggered the pseudo-game execution is more likely to be a rare hand than a bell hand. However, the probability that a privilege (pseudo-bonus state) is granted increases.
In addition, when the role of watermelon is won in the special zone, the probability that the pseudo-game is executed is lower than when the role of cherry is won, but if the pseudo-game is executed, the privilege is always given. It will be done.

Next, FIG. 41(d) shows a lottery table used for determining the type of privilege to be awarded when the award of the privilege is determined by the lottery (pseudo stop of the fixed symbol sequence).
In addition, the privilege given in the special zone is either the red 7 pseudo-bonus state or the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state. performed differently.

As shown in FIG. 41(d), when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 1, it is determined with a probability of 192/256 that the red 7 pseudo-bonus state is generated, and the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state is determined with a probability of 192/256. A lottery is conducted such that the occurrence of the bonus condition is determined with a probability of 64/256.
Similarly, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 2, it is determined with a probability of 224/256 that the red 7 pseudo-bonus state is generated, and the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state is not generated. A lottery will be held with a probability of 32/256 to determine.

Similarly, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 3, it is determined with a probability of 160/256 that the red 7 pseudo-bonus state is generated, and the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state is not generated. A lottery will be held with a probability of 96/256 being determined.
Similarly, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is 4, it is determined with a probability of 208/256 that the red 7 pseudo-bonus state is generated, and the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state is not generated. A lottery will be held with a 48/256 probability of being determined.

Similarly, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is 5, it is determined with a probability of 128/256 that the red 7 pseudo-bonus state is generated, and the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state is not generated. A lottery is held with a probability of 128/256 being determined.
Similarly, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is 6, it is determined with a probability of 208/256 that the red 7 pseudo-bonus state is generated, and the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state is not generated. A lottery will be held with a 48/256 probability of being determined.

Since the lottery as described above is performed, when it is decided to grant a privilege in the specialized zone, it is possible to change the type of the pseudo-bonus state according to the set value in the probability setting device 14. , it becomes possible to form a more diverse privilege provision mode.
Further, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is an odd value, the probability of determining the Blue 7 pseudo-bonus state, which has a relatively high degree of advantage, is higher than when it is an even value. Therefore, it is possible to form a characteristic privilege giving mode in accordance with the set value in the probability setting device 14, thereby making it possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In addition, in each of the odd number group and the even number group, the higher the set value, the higher the probability that the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state will be determined. It becomes possible to adjust the profit balance of

Then, as a result of the lottery, when it is decided to execute a pseudo-game in the specialized zone, during the game in which the lottery trigger role is won, whether benefits are given in the same way as the CZ state described above A pseudo-game that can notify whether or not will be executed.

Also, during the pseudo-game in the specialized zone, as in the CZ state described above (see FIG. 36), by the control of the sub-controller 20 based on the control information from the main controller 10, determined on the main display 8 An effect related to the pseudo-stop of the symbol row is executed.
The effect during the pseudo-game in the specialized zone is the same as the above-described CZ state, so the description is omitted here.

Then, when the pseudo-bonus state has been won, in the pseudo-game in the specialized zone, the above-described center reel 4b is controlled to pseudo-stop the fixed symbol row, and the game in which the pseudo-game is executed. From the start of the next game, any kind of pseudo-bonus state selected and determined will occur.

On the other hand, when the pseudo-bonus state is won, even if the stopping operation (pseudo-stopping operation) of the middle reel 4b is performed, the fixed symbol row is not pseudo-stopped, and the losing pattern row is pseudo-stopped on the middle reel 4b. It will happen.
Then, when there is a remaining number of games in the specialized zone, the game in the specialized zone is executed again from the start of the game next to the game in which the pseudo game is executed.
Any symbol row may be displayed when the reels 4 other than the middle reel 4b are quasi-stopped during the quasi-game, but the quasi-stopping of the reels 4 other than the middle reel 4b may be disabled.
As described above, various lotteries are executed in the specialized zone in the third embodiment.

[Lottery table used for determining the number of games to be added in the AT state in the main controller in the third embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the addition lottery for the number of games during the pseudo-bonus state triggered by the special zone in the main controller in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described.

As described above, during the AT state, a special zone is generated when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Unlike medium, a lottery for adding a predetermined number of games to the number of remaining games in the AT state is performed.

The extra lottery in the pseudo-bonus state is executed based on the lottery result of the combination in each game in the pseudo-bonus state, and the lottery trigger role and winning probability are set differently for each type of the pseudo-bonus state.
Further, the additional lottery is performed by lottery of random numbers for the additional lottery by the main controller 10. In FIG. Indicates the number of random numbers.

First, FIG. 42(a) shows an additional lottery table used during the red 7 pseudo-bonus state generated during the AT state.
As shown in FIG. 42(a), in a game in the red 7 pseudo-bonus state, when a replay combination is won, 0 games (no addition) are selected with a probability of 128/256 as the number of additional games. A lottery is conducted such that 10 games are selected with a probability of 128/256. Therefore, when the replay combination is won, the number of additional games of 20 games or 30 games is not selected.

Similarly, in the game during the red 7 pseudo-bonus state, if the player wins the cherry role, 0 games (no addition) are selected with a probability of 0/256 as the number of additional games, and 10 games are selected with a probability of 86/256. A lottery is performed such that 20 games are selected with a probability of 85/256 and 30 games are selected with a probability of 85/256. Therefore, when the cherry combination is won, any number of games is always added.

Similarly, in the game during the red 7 pseudo-bonus state, if the watermelon role is won, 0 games (no addition) are selected with a probability of 0/256 as the number of additional games, and 10 games are selected with a probability of 128/256. A lottery is performed such that 20 games are selected with a probability of 0/256 and 30 games are selected with a probability of 128/256. Therefore, when winning the watermelon role, either 10 games or 30 games will always be added.
Further, even if the bell combination (common bell combination and push-order bell combination) is won during the red 7 pseudo-bonus state, the number of games is not increased.

Next, FIG. 42(b) shows an additional lottery table used during the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state generated during the AT state.
As shown in FIG. 42(b), in the game in the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state, if the bell role (common bell role and push-order bell role) is won, the number of additional games is 0 (no extra games). is selected with a probability of 128/256 and 10 games are selected with a probability of 128/256. Therefore, if the bell combination is won, the additional number of games of 20 games or 30 games will not be selected.

Similarly, in the game during the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state, if the player wins the cherry role, 0 games (no addition) are selected with a probability of 0/256 as the number of additional games, and 10 games are selected with a probability of 0/256. A lottery is performed such that 20 games are selected with a probability of 128/256 and 30 games are selected with a probability of 128/256. Therefore, when winning the cherry combination, either 20 games or 30 games will always be added.

Similarly, in the game during the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state, if the watermelon role is won, 0 games (no addition) are selected with a probability of 0/256 as the number of additional games, and 10 games are selected with a probability of 64/256. A lottery is performed such that 20 games are selected with a probability of 0/256 and 30 games are selected with a probability of 192/256. Therefore, when winning the watermelon role, either 10 games or 30 games will always be added.
Further, even if a replay combination is won during the blue 7 pseudo-bonus state, the number of games is not increased.

The number of additional games determined by an additional lottery in each game in the pseudo-bonus state is finally summed up when the pseudo-bonus state ends, and is added to the number of remaining games when the AT state is restored.
When the pseudo-bonus state ends and the AT state is restored, it is preferable to notify the total number of games to be added when the first game is executed.

As described above, when the pseudo-bonus state occurs during the AT state, game value (medals) can be obtained by executing push-order navigation during the pseudo-bonus state, and the number of remaining games in the AT state also increases. Therefore, when the pseudo-bonus state occurs during the AT state, it is possible to increase the satisfaction of the player.

In addition, when a pseudo-bonus state occurs during the AT state, it is possible to heighten the player's sense of anticipation. When a blue 7 pseudo-bonus state occurs, that is, when a blue 7 pseudo-bonus state with a higher degree of advantage than the red 7 pseudo-bonus state occurs, the possibility that a larger number of games will be added increases. Therefore, it is possible to raise the player's expectation.
As described above, the additional lottery during the pseudo-bonus state that occurs during the AT state in the third embodiment is executed.

[Lottery table used when determining the concealment advance notice effect in the sub-controller in the third embodiment]
Next, referring to FIG. 43, the concealment advance notice effect executed by the sub control device 20 in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described.

As described above, in the third embodiment, the main controller 10 executes a pseudo-game in a predetermined game (3-bet game). The display device 8 executes a notice performance related to the pseudo game.
Further, in the sub-controller 20, when executing the above-mentioned notice effect, the main display 8 displays the notice reel image for notifying (notifying) the result of the pseudo-game in advance as described above. However, it is also possible to execute a concealment advance notice effect in which part or all of this advance notice reel image is concealed.

Therefore, in the normal notice effect, before the execution of the pseudo-game, all the notice reel images are displayed corresponding to the respective reels 4a to 4c, and the result of the pseudo-game is notified in advance. When the notice effect is executed, part or all of the notice reel image is concealed (hidden), and part or all of the result of the pseudo-game is not notified in advance by being hidden. It becomes.

In other words, in the normal notice effect, all the notice reel images are displayed before the execution of the pseudo-game, so that all the results of the pseudo-game are displayed in advance (advance notice), but in the concealment notice effect, the pseudo-game By hiding some or all of the notice reel images before the execution of , part or all of the results of the pseudo-game cannot be recognized until the pseudo-game is actually executed.

FIG. 43 shows a lottery table used in sub control device 20 to determine whether or not to execute the concealment advance notice effect and which advance notice reel image is to be concealed.
It should be noted that the lottery related to the concealment advance notice effect is executed in units of pseudo-game tables determined at that time.
Also, the lottery related to the concealment advance notice effect is performed by lottery of random numbers for the concealment advance notice effect by the sub-controller 20. In FIG. Indicates the number of random values, if determined.

In addition, "no cover-up" in the figure means that the notice reel images for all the reels 4 are displayed by executing a normal notice effect, and "full cover-up" means that the notice reel images for all the reels 4 are displayed. , and for the other items, it means that only the notice reel image for the corresponding reel 4 is hidden.

As shown in FIG. 43, when the weak table is selected, no concealment is selected with a probability of 128/256, and only the left reel 4a is concealed with a probability of 32/256. Selected, only the middle reel 4b is selected with a probability of 16/256 to be concealed, only the right reel 4c is selected with a probability of 16/256, and only the left reel 4a and the right reel 4c are concealed. is selected with a probability of 16/256, only the left reel 4a and the middle reel 4b are selected with a probability of 16/256, and only the middle reel 4b and the right reel 4c are hidden. , is selected with a probability of 16/256, and total concealment is selected with a probability of 16/256.

Similarly, when the strong table is selected, no concealment is selected with a probability of 64/256, and only the left reel 4a is concealed with a probability of 64/256. Only the reel 4b is hidden with a probability of 16/256, only the right reel 4c is hidden with a probability of 16/256, and only the left reel 4a and the right reel 4c are hidden. , is selected with a probability of 16/256, only the left reel 4a and the middle reel 4b are selected with a probability of 16/256, and only the middle reel 4b and the right reel 4c are hidden is 16/256. is selected with a probability of , and full concealment is selected with a probability of 48/256.

Similarly, when the Gachi table is selected, no concealment is selected with a probability of 16/256, and only the left reel 4a is concealed with a probability of 16/256. Only the reel 4b is hidden with a probability of 16/256, only the right reel 4c is hidden with a probability of 16/256, and only the left reel 4a and the right reel 4c are hidden. , is selected with a probability of 16/256, only the left reel 4a and the middle reel 4b are selected with a probability of 16/256, and only the middle reel 4b and the right reel 4c are hidden is 16/256. and full concealment is selected with a probability of 144/256.

Similarly, when one of the special 1 to special 3 tables is selected, no concealment is selected (no selection) with a probability of 0/256, and only the left reel 4a is concealed. is selected with a probability of 16/256, only the middle reel 4b is selected with a probability of 16/256, only the right reel 4c is selected with a probability of 16/256, and the left reel is selected with a probability of 16/256. Only the reel 4a and the right reel 4c are selected with a probability of 16/256 to be hidden, only the left reel 4a and the middle reel 4b are selected with a probability of 16/256, and the middle reel 4b and the right reel are selected with a probability of 16/256. A lottery is conducted such that only the reel 4c is selected with a probability of 16/256 to be concealed, and all concealed is selected with a probability of 160/256.

Since the concealment advance notice effect is executed based on the lottery as described above, when the advance notice effect is executed, part of it is executed as the concealment advance notice effect, and the game contents are diversified and more interesting. Therefore, it is possible to execute a high production performance.
In addition, when a pseudo-game table with a relatively high degree of expectation is selected, the probability of execution of the concealment advance notice effect increases, so that the expectation of the player when the concealment notice effect is executed is increased. It is possible to raise it.
In particular, when "total concealment" is selected, the probability of selecting a serious table or a special table, which have a very high degree of expectation, is increased.

In addition, during the execution of the concealment advance notice effect, the player's psychology such as wanting to see the final result of the effect works, and when the concealment notice effect is executed, the advantage is high as described above. Since the probability that the pseudo game table is selected is high, it is also possible to improve the player's willingness to play.

It should be noted that when the concealment notice effect is executed, if the replay role is simulated, the notice effect for the re-simulated game is not executed as in the case of the above-mentioned re-simulated game, but the notice effect again just before the re-simulated game is executed. may be executed. In this case, the lottery result related to the previously selected concealment notice effect in the re-pseudo-game may be used again, or the lottery related to the concealment notice effect may be performed again, and in the re-pseudo-game all may be concealed (completely concealed).
As described above, the lottery relating to the concealment advance notice effect in the third embodiment is executed.

[Concealment notice effect of pseudo-game on the main display in the third embodiment (at the time of full concealment)]
Next, referring to FIG. 44, there is shown an effect image on the main display 8 when the concealment notice effect is executed when a predetermined game (3-bet game) is executed in the normal game state. In particular, FIG. 44 shows a case where all the preview reel images are hidden (fully hidden).

The concealed notice effect is basically the same as the notice effect described above, and the notice reel image for notifying (notifying) the result of the pseudo-game in advance and the pre-effect for determining the result of the pseudo-game are executed. Result derivation reel image.
However, unlike the announcement effect, when all concealment is selected, the result derivation reel image for which the preliminary effect is executed, and the announcement reel image for notifying the predetermined symbol row (notice symbol) are all hidden and hidden.

FIG. 44 shows a state in which the concealment advance notice effect is executed when the common bell combination has already been won once in the normal game and the common bell combination has been won for the second time.
First, as shown in FIG. 44(a), during the normal notice effect, the common bell combination has already been won once. The left notice reel image 50a of the upper left notice reel image 50 is displayed. It is concealed by the reel concealment image 53a and is not displayed (not notified).

Although illustration is omitted, the result derivation reel image for which the preliminary effect for determining the symbol row of the left foretelling reel image 50a is executed is also hidden.
Also, each concealment image is a black image, but any image may be used as long as the preview reel image can be concealed.

That is, the result of the left reel 4a in the pseudo-game is determined in advance by winning the first common bell combination after the previous pseudo-game is executed, and the result determined in advance is the left notice reel image. 50a, but when the concealment advance notice effect is executed, the pseudo stop symbol row of the left reel 4a of the pseudo game determined in advance is not notified.
In this state, only the result of the left reel 4a in the pseudo-game is still pre-determined, and the results of the other reels 4 are not pre-determined, so the middle notice reel image 50b and the right notice reel image 50c The area is blank.

After winning the first common bell role, the system waits for the next common bell role to be won. The middle result derivation reel image 51a to be used is displayed. The image 51a is concealed by the intermediate result derivation reel concealment image 53b and is not displayed (not notified).
That is, by selecting the full concealment, the middle notice reel image 50b to be displayed next is also concealed, so naturally the middle result derivation reel concealment image 53b is also concealed, and the symbols displayed on the middle notice reel image 50b are hidden. The pre-rendering for the determination is also concealed.

Next, in FIG. 44(b), after two common bell combinations have been won, a predetermined pattern row on the middle result derivation reel image 51a is normally a preliminary effect on the middle result derivation reel image 51a. is derived and displayed, and as a result of the preliminary effect, the middle notice reel image 50b is displayed. It is concealed by the middle reel concealment image 54a and is not displayed (not notified).

That is, by winning the common bell combination twice, the result of the middle reel 4b in the pseudo-game is determined in advance, and originally, the result determined in advance is notified by the middle notice reel image 50b. When the concealment advance notice effect is executed, the pseudo-stop symbol row of the pre-determined pseudo-game middle reel 4b is not reported.

After the second common bell combination is won, the next common bell combination is awaited in the same way as the first time. As shown in FIG. Originally, the right result derivation reel image 52 used when the third common bell combination is won is displayed. The derivation reel image 52 is concealed by the right result derivation reel concealment image 53c and is not displayed (not reported).
Then, when the third common bell combination is won, the result of the right reel 4c in the pseudo game is determined in advance in the same way as above, but if the concealment notice effect is executed (when all concealment is selected) ), the preliminary effect on the right result deriving reel image 52 and the right notice reel image 50c are hidden and non-displayed (non-announced).

As described above, when the concealment notice effect (total concealment) is executed, all the notice reel images are concealed. Since the information is kept secret, the player's expectations can be extended accordingly.
In particular, when full concealment is selected as described above, the probability of selecting a serious table or a special table with extremely high expectations increases, so it is possible to greatly increase the player's expectations. be.
As described above, the pseudo-game concealment advance notice effect (total concealment) is executed on the main display device in the third embodiment.

[Concealment notice effect of pseudo-game on the main display in the third embodiment (at the time of partial concealment)]
Next, FIG. 45 shows an effect image on the main display 8 when the concealment advance notice effect is executed when a predetermined game (3-bet game) is executed during the normal game state. In particular, FIG. 45 shows a case where the preview reel image corresponding to the left reel 4a is partially hidden (partially hidden) as the preview reel image.

Even if some of the notice reel images are hidden in the concealment notice effect, basically the same as the notice effect described above, the notice reel image for notifying (notice) the result of the pseudo-game in advance, and the pseudo-game It is executed using a result derivation reel image that executes a preliminary effect for determining the result of.
Then, unlike the case where all the notice reel images are hidden, only some of the notice reel images are concealed, and the symbol row (prediction symbols) is displayed without concealing the other notice reel images. .

FIG. 45 shows a state in which the concealment advance notice effect is executed when the common bell combination has already been won once in the normal game and the common bell combination has been won for the second time.
First, as shown in FIG. 45(a), during the normal notice effect, the common bell combination has already been won once. The left notice reel image 50a of the upper left notice reel image 50 is displayed. The notice reel image 50a is concealed by the left reel concealment image 53a and is not displayed (not notified).

Although illustration is omitted, the result derivation reel image for which the preliminary effect for determining the symbol row of the left foretelling reel image 50a is executed is also hidden.

That is, the result of the left reel 4a in the pseudo-game is determined in advance by winning the first common bell combination after the previous pseudo-game is executed, and the result determined in advance is the left notice reel image. 50a, when the concealment notice effect of concealing the notice reel image corresponding to the left reel 4a is executed, similar to the above-described full concealment selection, the pre-determined pseudo-game is executed. The pseudo stop symbol row of the left reel 4a is not reported.
In this state, only the result of the left reel 4a in the pseudo-game is still pre-determined, and the results of the other reels 4 are not pre-determined, so the middle notice reel image 50b and the right notice reel image 50c The area is blank.

Then, in the case of the concealment advance notice effect in which only the notice reel image corresponding to the left reel 4a is concealed, the results corresponding to the middle reel 4b and the right reel 4c are thereafter performed in the same manner as in the above-described advance notice effect (see FIG. 24). The derivation reel image and the notice reel image are displayed, and finally the result of the pseudo-game decided in advance is given for notice display.

As described above, when the concealment notice effect (partial concealment) in which the notice reel images corresponding to some of the reels 4 are concealed is executed, until the actual pseudo-game is executed, the pseudo-game Part of the result is kept secret, and the player's expectation can be extended accordingly.
In addition, when a symbol combination (so-called Tenpai) capable of quasi-winning in a predetermined combination is formed by a notice reel image other than the hidden notice reel image, it is possible to greatly increase the player's sense of expectation. At the same time, it is possible to attract the player's interest to the hidden notice reel image, and to improve the amusement of the game.
As described above, the pseudo-game concealment advance notice effect (partial concealment) is executed on the main display device in the third embodiment.

In the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment, the symbol row to be pseudo-stopped during the pseudo-game is determined when the common bell combination is won, but is determined when the other combination is won. may
Further, the decision trigger combination of the symbol row to be pseudo-stopped during the pseudo-game may be changed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.
For example, when a predetermined rare combination is won or when a predetermined number of games are played, the determined trigger combination may be changed from the common bell combination to the replay combination.

Further, when determining the symbol row to be pseudo-stopped during the pseudo-game, it is determined in the order of the left reel 4a→middle reel 4b→right reel 4c, but it may be determined in another order, It may be determined simultaneously for a predetermined number or all reels 4 .

In addition, the pseudo-game is actually executed in the next game after the result of the pseudo-game is determined in advance, but after the result of the pseudo-game is determined in advance, a predetermined number of games are executed. After that, the pseudo-game may be actually executed.
Also, when the result of the pseudo-game is determined in advance, the pseudo-game is always executed, but the pseudo-game may be executed with a predetermined probability (for example, 80% probability).

Also, in the middle of the pre-determination of the result of the pseudo-game, when winning the grant of a privilege at another opportunity, another privilege may be granted to the privilege to be granted.
For example, if the CZ state is won in the middle of the pre-determination of the result of the pseudo-game, the probability of winning the pseudo-bonus state from the CZ state increases as the stage of pre-determination of the pseudo-game result progresses from 30% → It may be changed from 60% to 100%.
In addition, if the pseudo-bonus state is won in the middle of the pre-determination of the result of the pseudo-game, as the stage of pre-determination of the pseudo-game result progresses, the points used in the AT state lottery during the pseudo-bonus state 1 point→3 points→5 points may be added.
In addition, when winning the AT state in the middle of the pre-determination of the result of the pseudo-game, as the stage of pre-determination of the result of the pseudo-game progresses, the number of remaining games in the AT state is increased by 10 games. good too. Further, when the AT state is won with all the results of the pseudo-game determined in advance, the right to generate the specialized zone may be granted.

In addition, the operation of limiting means (so-called limiter) for limiting the total number of medals acquired during a specific game state (pseudo-bonus state, AT state, etc.) advantageous to the player is determined in advance, and the limiter is activated from the time of this determination. A pseudo-game can be executed even within a period (ending AT state), and when the pseudo-game is executed during the ending AT state, the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set for the symbol combination to be pseudo-stopped during the pseudo-game. It can be suggestive.
For example, the symbol combination at the time of pseudo-winning is formed so that the reliability of the suggestive information of the set value in the probability setting device 14 increases in the order of non-rare combination→rare combination→special symbol combination→middle cherry symbol combination. may Furthermore, when the symbol combination of "red 7", "blue 7", and "white 7" is quasi-stopped, the setting value of the probability setting device 14 may be reported as it is.

In addition, when using the weak table, only the symbol combination of the losing, replay role, and bell role is derived, but for example, "replay, replay, other than replay" (so-called replay tenpai losing) is set as a chance role, and this In the case of pseudo-winning the chance role, the same privilege lottery as in the case of pseudo-winning the rare role may be performed.
In this way, it is possible to prevent the player's expectations from dropping even when a weak table with a relatively low advantage is selected.

As described above, in the present invention, a plurality of reels (reels 4) each showing a plurality of symbols, and a plurality of stop operation means (stop button 5) associated with each of the plurality of reels. A plurality of reels that are displayed in a variable manner are stopped by operating the plurality of stop operation means, and when the symbol combination formed by stopping the plurality of reels becomes a predetermined symbol combination, a predetermined symbol combination is formed. A first game control means (main control device 10) capable of executing a first game (normal game) capable of imparting a game value of , based on the establishment of a game start condition, and a plurality of reels that are variably displayed is stopped by operating the plurality of stop operation means, and even if the symbol combination formed by stopping the plurality of reels becomes the predetermined symbol combination, the predetermined game value cannot be imparted. A second game control means (main control device 10) capable of executing a second game (pseudo game) based on the establishment of a predetermined game start condition, and stopping the plurality of reels in the second game Stop symbol determination means (main controller 10) capable of determining symbols for each reel, and when the symbol combination formed by stopping the plurality of reels in the second game becomes a specific symbol combination, and a privilege granting means (main controller 10) capable of granting a privilege different from a predetermined game value.

Here, the first game control means, the second game control means, the stop symbol determination means, and the privilege provision means may be provided in the main control device 10 or may be provided in the sub control device 20. . Alternatively, the main controller 10 and the sub-controller 20 may cooperate with each other.
Also, the game value may be a medal or a pachinko ball.

Therefore, when the game start condition is satisfied, the second game can be executed in addition to the first game, and the game is executed a plurality of times when the condition is satisfied once. It is possible to increase it accordingly.
Also, by executing both the first game and the second game, the game can be diversified, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, the stop symbol determination means can determine a stop symbol of one of the plurality of reels in relation to one execution of the first game, and the second game control means can determine the stop symbol of one of the plurality of reels. The second game can be executed when the symbols to be stopped on the plurality of reels are determined by the symbol determining means.
Therefore, the first game and the second game are associated with each other, making it possible to execute a more interesting game.
Also, since the first game needs to be executed a plurality of times until the result of the second game is determined, it is possible to extend the player's expectation accordingly.

Further, the stop symbol determining means can determine the stop symbol of the one reel based on the winning of a predetermined combination by the internal lottery process.
Therefore, the player will pay attention to the winning of the predetermined combination, and it is possible to heighten the player's expectation accordingly.

In addition, it is configured to have an informing means capable of informing the stop symbols of the predetermined reel determined by the stop symbol determining means for the predetermined second game before the predetermined second game is executed. .
Therefore, it is possible to heighten the player's expectation even before the second game is executed.
In addition, the prior notification of the stop symbols of the predetermined reel makes it possible to increase the player's willingness to play the corresponding second game, and to increase the player's sense of satisfaction when the second game is executed. It becomes possible.
Note that the notification means may be provided in the main control device 10 or may be provided in the sub control device 20 . Alternatively, the main controller 10 and the sub-controller 20 may cooperate with each other.

Further, a state control means capable of controlling a first state and a second state which is a state different from the first state is provided, and the specific symbol combination is the first specific symbol combination, and the privilege granting means is the second state. and a second specific symbol combination in which the probability of giving a privilege advantageous to the player is higher than that of the one specific symbol combination, and the stop symbol determining means is controlled to the first state rather than the second specific symbol combination. The stop symbol of the predetermined reel can be determined so that the probability of forming the second specific symbol combination is higher when the game is controlled to the state.
Therefore, it is possible to play a more colorful and interesting game, and it is possible to raise the expectations of the player when the control is in the second state.

On the other hand, Patent Literature 1 discloses a gaming machine in which the variable display can be stopped multiple times in one variable display game, thereby giving the player multiple opportunities to stop the display. there is
However, conventional gaming machines have not been sufficient to improve the interest in games and to improve the player's sense of expectation.
As described above, according to the slot machine 1 of the present invention, it is possible to solve all or part of such problems that conventional gaming machines should improve.

Although the preferred embodiments of the gaming machine of the present invention have been described above, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the present invention. Needless to say.
For example, in the present embodiment, the AT state (AT) is given as a privilege, but ART or RT may be given.

In addition, in this embodiment, the AT state type is a type that can be continued multiple times in the AT state, which is executed in units of a predetermined number of games. It may be of a type such as

In addition, in this embodiment, the effect button 2d and the upper effect button 2f are exemplified as operating means, but other means may be used as long as they output an input signal by the player's operation, such as the bet button 2a and the stop button. 5, the start lever 3 or the like may be used.

In addition, a vibrating means for vibrating the front door 1a by the operation of a motor, a speaker, etc. is provided in the front door 1a, and the vibrating means is operated at a predetermined time during the winning performance, the sign performance, and the notice performance. Player's expectation may be heightened, or the vibrating means may be operated when the winning effect, the sign effect and the selection effect are executed.
Further, a blowing means for blowing air toward the player is provided on the front door 1a, and the blowing means is operated at a predetermined time during winning performance, sign performance and selection performance, thereby heightening the expectation of the player. You may do so.

In addition, although the main display 8 and the sub-display 17 are provided as display means, the winning effect, the sign effect and the selection effect may be executed by any one of the display means, or by two display means. Both can be executed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main controller 10 operates as various means such as the lottery means, but the sub-controller 20 performs some or all of them, and the sub-controller 20 operates as the various means. can also
Conversely, the main controller 10 can perform some or all of the operations performed by the sub controller 20, and the main controller 10 can operate as various means.

Also, although the present invention is applied to slot machines, it can also be applied to other game machines such as pachinko (for example, ball slots).
In addition, the present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine that can execute a game using pseudo game media in a data format without using actual game media such as medals and game balls.

1: slot machine 2: bet button 4: reel 5: stop button 8: main display 10: main controller 17: sub-display 20: sub-controller

Claims (5)

a game state control means capable of controlling a first game state advantageous to the player and a second game state advantageous to the player;
a first game control means capable of executing a first game capable of imparting a game value for executing a game in the first game state;
A second game control means capable of executing a second game, which is a pseudo game in which the game value cannot be imparted, in the first game state;
winning combination determination means capable of determining a winning combination based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
a stop operation means operable by a player;
variable display means capable of stopping and displaying the identification information that is being variably displayed based on the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means and the stop operation mode of the stop operation means in the first game; ,
a point awarding means capable of awarding points based on the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means in the first gaming state;
a point storage means capable of storing the points given by the point giving means;
determination means capable of determining whether or not to shift to the second game state based on the points stored in the point storage means;
with
The variable display means is
When the stop operation means is operated in the second game after it is determined by the determination means to shift to the second game state, it is possible to stop and display the identification information that is being variably displayed in a specific manner. can be,
It is possible to stop and display the identification information in a non-specific manner when the stop operation means is operated in the second game after it is determined by the determination means that the game state will not shift to the second game state. Characteristic game machine. 2. The game machine according to claim 1, further comprising a notification means capable of notifying information about points stored in said point storage means in said first game state. The winning combination determination means
It is possible to determine one of a plurality of winning combinations including the first winning combination and the second winning combination,
The point giving means is
Claim 1 or 2, characterized in that more points can be awarded with a higher probability when the second winning combination is determined than when the first winning combination is determined. 2. The gaming machine described in 2. The first gaming state is
a first specific gaming state;
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, further comprising a first special game state in which the probability of points being awarded by the point giving means is higher than that of the first specific game state. . The first game state and the second game state are
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, characterized in that it is in an AT gaming state.

Images